26.11.2014 Views

Download - North Carolina A&T State University

Download - North Carolina A&T State University

Download - North Carolina A&T State University

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

<strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong><br />

Agricultural and Technical<br />

<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

GRADUATE TEACHING<br />

ASSISTANT HANDBOOK


Graduate Teaching Assistant<br />

Handbook<br />

Produced by<br />

A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams<br />

Assistant Dean for Graduate Studies<br />

Graphic Design by Vicki Cruise


<strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

Graduate Teaching Assistant Handbook<br />

II<br />

TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />

FORWARD:<br />

GREETING FROM THE DEAN OF GRADUATE S TUDIES...................................V<br />

INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................................................1<br />

SECTION I:<br />

WHAT IT MEANS TO BE AGRADUATE TEACHING ASSISTANT (GTA) AT<br />

NC A&T S TATE UNIVERSITY.....................................................................1<br />

Types of GTARoles and Duties.......................................................2<br />

Standards for GTAs Knowledge, Skills & Attitudes Necessary<br />

to Be an Effective GTA ....................................................................4<br />

Setting Boundaries and Limits .........................................................9<br />

SECTION II:<br />

INTERNATIONAL GRADUATE TEACHING ASSISTANTS....................................10<br />

Language Requirements ................................................................10<br />

Cultural Dimensions.......................................................................10<br />

Benefits of Having a Mentor...........................................................11<br />

Resources For Additional Advice ...................................................13<br />

SECTION III: FOUNDATIONS OF GOOD TEACHING .........................................................14<br />

The 10 Commandments of Teaching.............................................15<br />

Effective Instruction........................................................................15<br />

Traits of Effective Teachers............................................................18<br />

What Can Graduate Students Do To Be More Effective GTAs?....20<br />

Modes of Teaching.........................................................................21<br />

Dimensions of Effective Teaching..................................................22<br />

Teaching Methods and Active Learning.........................................23<br />

Tying Teaching Methods to Objectives .........................................24<br />

Classroom Situations to Consider .................................................26<br />

SECTION IV:<br />

GETTING S TARTED.................................................................................28<br />

Orientation to Teaching at N. C. A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>...................28<br />

Checklist for Teaching....................................................................29<br />

Establishing the Classroom Climate..............................................33<br />

Course Planning & Design.............................................................35<br />

Suggestions for the First Day of Class..........................................37<br />

Diversity in the Classroom.............................................................39


SECTION V. HELPING S TUDENTS LEARN ....................................................................44<br />

Helping Students Learn..................................................................44<br />

How Students Learn.......................................................................46<br />

Learning Styles and Preferences...................................................46<br />

Principles for Good Practice in Undergraduate Education ............47<br />

Cooperative Learning.....................................................................51<br />

Adults as Learners.........................................................................52<br />

Time Management in the Classroom.............................................53<br />

III<br />

SECTION VI.<br />

MULTIPLE INSTRUCTIONAL S TRATEGIES, SITUATIONS, TECHNIQUES,<br />

TECHNOLOGIES, AND TOOLS ...................................................................54<br />

Teaching With Technology .............................................................54<br />

Media/Audio-Visual Aids ............................................................55<br />

Computers and Instruction.........................................................59<br />

Incorporating Instructional Technology ..........................................61<br />

Additional Resources on Teaching & Learning..............................61<br />

Teaching Through Discussion........................................................63<br />

Planning a Class (Lecture Guidelines) ..........................................64<br />

Teaching Laboratory Sections........................................................70<br />

Safety Considerations....................................................................73<br />

Strategies to Enhance Learning.....................................................75<br />

Teaching Strategies for a Diverse Student Body ...........................78<br />

Using Your Voice Effectively ..........................................................79<br />

SECTION VII:<br />

GRADES AND CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT.................................................81<br />

Testing and Grading.......................................................................81<br />

Evaluating Student Performance ...................................................94<br />

Keeping Records ...........................................................................95<br />

Advising Students ..........................................................................97<br />

The Role of the TAas a Faculty-Student Liaison ..........................98<br />

Recommending ESL for International Students .............................99<br />

The Teacher - Student Relationship.............................................100<br />

SECTION VIII:<br />

PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT..............................................................102<br />

Reflective Practice .......................................................................104<br />

Feedback from your Students ..................................................105<br />

Links to Additional Resources .................................................107<br />

Instructional Support and Services offered at NC A&T<br />

<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> ............................................................................108<br />

Further Reading for Professional Development...........................110<br />

Contact Information for Professional Development .....................110<br />

Preparing a Teaching Portfolio .....................................................111


SECTION IX: UNIVERSITY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES RELATED TO GTAS ...................114<br />

GTAAdministration Policy ............................................................114<br />

Purpose........................................................................................114<br />

Categories................................................................................115<br />

Eligibility ...................................................................................115<br />

Appointment .............................................................................116<br />

Performance Review................................................................117<br />

Conduct & Discipline................................................................117<br />

Compensation..........................................................................117<br />

Grievance Procedures .................................................................118<br />

Guidelines Regarding GTAQualifications....................................118<br />

Professional/Ethical/Legal Responsibilities..................................118<br />

Safety and Emergency Procedures.............................................120<br />

<strong>University</strong>-Based Technology Transfer ........................................123<br />

Student Initiated Programs and Unfunded Projects .....................124<br />

IV<br />

SECTION X: HOW TO HELP GTAS BE S UCCESSFUL .................................................125<br />

Checklist for the Supervising Professor.......................................125<br />

GTA-to-GTAAdvice......................................................................126<br />

Additional On-line Resources for Teaching..................................127<br />

Balancing Your Roles...................................................................128<br />

Frequently Asked Questions by TAs............................................129<br />

REFERENCE GUIDE TO CAMPUS RESOURCES............................................................131<br />

APPENDIX A:<br />

N.C. A&T S TATE UNIVERSITY GRADUATE ASSISTANT EVALUATION<br />

FORM..................................................................................................134<br />

INDEX..................................................................................................................................135


V<br />

Congratulations on becoming a graduate teaching assistant at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong><br />

<strong>University</strong>. This is a unique opportunity to grow professionally and we hope to make it as<br />

valuable an experience as possible.<br />

We believe graduate teaching assistants play a vital role in educating undergraduate<br />

students at A&T and recognize the value of the experience that graduate teaching assistants<br />

gain as they develop and refine their teaching skills. We also acknowledge the challenges that<br />

graduate teaching assistants face as they serve in a teaching role while balancing their own<br />

course loads in graduate studies.<br />

The Office of Graduate Studies and members of the Teaching Assistant Advisory<br />

Committee have worked diligently to develop a handbook that is pertinent, comprehensive,<br />

and offers advice and guidance on issues that affect graduate teaching assistants in general. We<br />

hope you find it a valuable tool as you make your way into what can be an enriching experience<br />

in your academic career.<br />

Good luck, and I hope you enjoy the challenges and opportunities you will discover as a<br />

graduate assistant at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Dr. Kenneth H. Murray<br />

o<br />

Associate Vice Chancellor for Academic Affairs and<br />

Dean of Graduate Studies


PREFACE<br />

VI<br />

This handbook is provided as part of a four (4) phase comprehensive approach to training Graduate<br />

Teaching Assistants (GTAs) at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> Agricultural and Technical <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> in<br />

Greensboro, <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong>. The comprehensive training begins with a Summer Institute for<br />

Graduate Assistants, followed by supplemental training and support at the departmental level,<br />

on-going workshops throughout the academic year, and access to an on-line interactive handbook<br />

and CD as a reference and resource guide.<br />

The Graduate Teaching Assistant Handbook was produced with the support of a FUTURES Ventures<br />

Seed grant at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

The articles included in the handbook are based on information collected from a survey of graduate<br />

teaching assistants at A&T, feedback from students attending Effective Teaching Training Workshops,<br />

information collected from over fifty (50) universities, extensive discussions at the Graduate Teaching<br />

Assistant Advisory Committee meetings, and comments from graduate academic departments<br />

regarding graduate teaching assistant effectiveness and training.<br />

The edited collection is addressed particularly to graduate students who have teaching responsibilities<br />

at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> but also has practical relevance to anyone who is either<br />

currently engaged in teaching or interested in an academic career. The handbook will also be of value<br />

to supervisors of teaching assistants, as well as school administrators.<br />

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS<br />

I would like to take this opportunity to thank Chancellor James C. Renick, members of the<br />

FUTURES Planning and Resource Council, and the 2003-2004 FUTURES Review Committee for<br />

funding this project through the FUTURES Ventures Seed grant. I would also like to thank members<br />

of the Graduate Teaching Advisory Committee for their tireless effort in reviewing the volume of<br />

information collected and for providing critical feedback to help streamline the process. We owe a<br />

special thanks to Dr. Lelia Vickers and the faculty of the School of Education, as well as the other<br />

contributors for accepting our invitation to use their expertise in providing information for the<br />

handbook and for putting up with the friendly e-mail reminders about the deadline. I would also like<br />

to thank the many universities that we contacted for feedback about what they had in place to train<br />

graduate teaching assistants and for their generous permission to allow us to reference their materials<br />

throughout the document. Special thanks are extended to Dr. Michele Levy, Dr. Jane Brown and Mrs.<br />

Ruby Carlson for reviewing and proofing the document. I would also like to thank Miss Swapna<br />

Kanury for her technical expertise and assistance in preparing the document for on-line access.<br />

I am especially indebted to Susan Payne, not only for efficiently researching, collecting and<br />

organizing the information, but also for her invaluable input and suggestions. I would also like to<br />

thank Dr. Kenneth Murray for his on-going support of the project. Last, but not least, special thanks<br />

to our graduate students, particularly Mrs. Terese Coon and other graduate teaching assistants for<br />

providing the initial feedback that provided the impetus for the development of a graduate teaching<br />

assistant handbook.


FUTURES<br />

PLANNING AND RESOURCE<br />

COUNCIL 2002-03<br />

VII<br />

Dr. Janice Brewington<br />

Interim Associate Vice Chancellor for Academic<br />

Affairs-Institutional Planning, Research and<br />

Assessment<br />

Mrs. Deloris Chisley<br />

Program Director, IBM Corp.<br />

Dr. Quiester Craig<br />

Dean, School of Business and Economics<br />

Mrs. Mona Edwards<br />

Senior Operations Manager<br />

Center for Creative Leadership<br />

Mr. Tommy Ellis, Jr.<br />

Vice Chancellor for Business and Finance<br />

Nashett Garrett<br />

President, Student Government Association<br />

Dr. Colleen Grotsky<br />

Executive Assistant to the Chancellor<br />

Mr. Rodney Harrigan<br />

Vice Chancellor for Information Technology<br />

and Chief Information Officer<br />

Mr. David Hoard<br />

Vice Chancellor for <strong>University</strong> Relations<br />

and Development<br />

Dr. Alvin Keyes<br />

Chair, Faculty Senate<br />

Psychology Department<br />

Dr. Wanda Lester<br />

Assistant Dean, School of Business and Economics<br />

Ms. Albertina McGirt<br />

President Staff Senate<br />

Upward Bound<br />

Dr. Carolyn Meyers<br />

Provost & Vice Chancellor for Academic Affairs<br />

Dr. Peter Meyers<br />

Director, Honors Program<br />

Dr. Samuel Moseley<br />

Associate Professor, Political Science<br />

Dr. Earnestine Psalmonds<br />

Special Assistant to the Chancellor<br />

Mrs. Lesley Renwrick<br />

Special Assistant to the Chancellor for Legal Affairs<br />

Mr. Calvin Riley<br />

Owner, Nehemiah Leadership Company<br />

Dr. Sanjiv Sarin<br />

Associate Dean and Professor, Industrial Engineering<br />

Mrs. Mable Scott<br />

Associate Vice Chancellor for Media Relations<br />

Mr. Obrie Smith<br />

Chairperson, NC A&T Foundation<br />

Dr. Velma Speight-Buford<br />

Secretary, Board of Trustees<br />

Mr. Dennis Stearns<br />

Certified Financial Planner<br />

Stearns Financial Services<br />

Dr. Godfrey Uzochukwu<br />

Director, Waste Management Institute<br />

Dr. Willie Willis<br />

Professor, Animal Science School of Agriculture<br />

Dr. Roselle Wilson<br />

Interim Vice Chancellor for Student Affairs


LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS FOR<br />

GTA HANDBOOK<br />

VIII<br />

Dr. Paul Ankomah<br />

Human Performance and Leisure<br />

Studies<br />

Dr. Patricia Bethea-Whitfield<br />

Human Development and Services<br />

Mrs. A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams<br />

School of Graduate Studies<br />

Dr. Judie Bucholz<br />

Human Development and Services<br />

Dr. Shea D. Burns<br />

Mathematics<br />

Mrs. Terese Coon<br />

Graphic Communication Systems<br />

Dr. Jane Davis-Seaver<br />

Curriculum and Instruction<br />

Mr. Jason DePolo<br />

English<br />

Mr. Marvin Dickerson<br />

ARISA/Environmental Health<br />

and Safety<br />

Dr. Patrice Faison<br />

Curriculum and Instruction<br />

Dr. Marihelen Glass<br />

Landscaping Architecture and<br />

Horticulture<br />

Dr. Anthony Graham<br />

Curriculum and Instruction<br />

Dr. Etta Gravely<br />

Chemistry<br />

Dr. Vallie Guthrie<br />

GAMSEC<br />

Dr. Karen Guy<br />

Curriculum and Instruction<br />

Dr. Brenda Hall<br />

Human Development and Services<br />

Dr. Richard Jackson<br />

Curriculum and Instruction<br />

Dr. Muktha Jost<br />

Curriculum and Instruction<br />

Dr. John Kelly<br />

Computing and Electrical<br />

Engineering<br />

Dr. Rita Lamb<br />

Center for Student Success<br />

Dr. Trent Larson<br />

Human Performance and Leisure<br />

Studies<br />

Dr. Robin Liles<br />

Human Development and Services<br />

Dr. Kenneth Murray<br />

School of Graduate Studies<br />

Dr. Gloria Palma<br />

Human Performance and Leisure<br />

Studies<br />

Mrs. Susan Payne<br />

School of Graduate Studies<br />

Dr. Larry Powers<br />

Curriculum and Instruction<br />

Dr. Kimberly Richards<br />

Human Development and Services<br />

Dr. J. Y Shen<br />

Manufacturing Systems<br />

Dr. Karen Smith-Gratto<br />

Center for Professional<br />

Development<br />

Mr. Doug Speight<br />

Office of Technology Transfer and<br />

Commercialization<br />

Dr. Lelia Vickers<br />

School of Education<br />

Dr. Dawn Waegerle<br />

Human Development and Services<br />

Mr. Marvin Watkins<br />

Division of Research<br />

Administration<br />

Dr. Mulumebet Worku<br />

Animal Sciences<br />

GRADUATE TEACHING ASSISTANT ADVISORY COMMITTEE<br />

Dr. Kenneth H. Murray, Associate Vice Chancellor for Academic Affairs and Dean,<br />

Graduate Studies<br />

Mrs. A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams, Assistant Dean, Graduate Studies and Chair<br />

Dr. Goldie Byrd, Biology<br />

Dr. Erick Cheek, Electrical and Computing Engineering<br />

Dr. Robert Cobb, Graphic Communication Systems<br />

Dr. Marihelen Glass, Landscape Architecture and Horticulture<br />

Dr. Vallie Guthrie, GAMSEC<br />

Dr. John Kelly, Electrical and Computing Engineering<br />

Dr. Dorothy Leflore, Curriculum and Instruction<br />

Dr. Michele Levy, English<br />

Dr. Cynthia Nearman, English<br />

Mrs. Susan Payne, Research Assistant, Graduate Studies<br />

Dr. Leonard Uitenham, Chemical and Mechanical Engineering<br />

Dr. Mulumebet Worku, Animal Sciences


UNIVERSITY CONTACTS<br />

Brown <strong>University</strong><br />

Rebecca S. More, Ph.D.<br />

Sheridan Teaching Center<br />

Director<br />

IX<br />

<strong>University</strong> of<br />

California at Los Angeles<br />

Howard Lee<br />

Office of Instructional<br />

Coordinator Development<br />

TA Training<br />

<strong>University</strong> of California<br />

at San Diego<br />

<strong>University</strong> of California<br />

at Santa Barbara<br />

Rosalind Streichler, Ph.D.<br />

Shirley Ronkowski, Ph.D.<br />

Center for Teaching<br />

Development<br />

Director<br />

Director of<br />

Instructional Development<br />

Clemson <strong>University</strong><br />

<strong>University</strong> of<br />

Connecticut<br />

Linda B. Nilson, Ph.D.<br />

Catherine Ross, Ph.D.<br />

Office of Teaching<br />

Effectiveness and Innovation<br />

TA Programs<br />

Director<br />

Director<br />

Cornell <strong>University</strong><br />

Virleen Carlson, Ph.D.<br />

Center for Learning<br />

and Teaching<br />

Dean<br />

<strong>University</strong> of Delaware<br />

Gabriele Bauer, Ph.D.<br />

Center for Teaching<br />

Effectiveness<br />

Teaching Consultant<br />

<strong>University</strong> of Florida<br />

Linda S. Vivian<br />

The Graduate School<br />

Associate Director<br />

<strong>University</strong> of Georgia<br />

Dr. Kathleen Smith<br />

The Graduate School<br />

TA Program Coordinator<br />

Harvard <strong>University</strong><br />

John Hopkins <strong>University</strong><br />

Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

<strong>University</strong> of<br />

Massachusetts-Amherst<br />

<strong>University</strong> of Michigan<br />

<strong>University</strong> of Minnesota<br />

City <strong>University</strong> of<br />

New York<br />

<strong>University</strong> of NC at<br />

Chapel Hill<br />

<strong>University</strong> of NC at<br />

Charlotte<br />

<strong>University</strong> of NC at<br />

Greensboro<br />

Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

Penn <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

Rutgers <strong>University</strong><br />

Stanford <strong>University</strong><br />

Washington <strong>University</strong><br />

<strong>University</strong> of<br />

Washington<br />

Beckie Hunter<br />

Sabrina Raymond<br />

Karen Bovenmyer<br />

Dr. Matthew Ouellett<br />

Earl Lewis<br />

Joyce Weinsheimer<br />

Linda N. Edwards<br />

Donna Bailey<br />

Jill S. Ehling<br />

James Peterson, Ph.D.<br />

Alan Kalish, Ph.D.<br />

Barbara Pennypacker<br />

Barbara E. Bender<br />

Valerie A. Ross, Ph.D.<br />

Elaine Berland, Ph.D.<br />

Brenda J. Kelly or<br />

Donald H. Wulff<br />

The Derek Bok Center<br />

for Teaching and Learning<br />

Krieger School of Arts<br />

and Sciences<br />

Graduate College<br />

Center for Teaching<br />

Rackham School of<br />

Graduate Studies<br />

Center for Teaching and<br />

Learning<br />

The Graduate Center<br />

Center for Teaching<br />

and Learning<br />

School of Graduate Studies<br />

The Graduate School<br />

Office of Faculty and<br />

TA Development<br />

The Graduate School<br />

New Brunswick<br />

Graduate School<br />

Center for Teaching<br />

and Learning<br />

Graduate School of the<br />

Arts and Sciences<br />

Center for Instructional<br />

Development and Research<br />

Program Coordinator<br />

Assistant to Vice<br />

and Dean of Faculty<br />

Program Assistant<br />

Associate Director<br />

Dean<br />

Director<br />

Associate Provost and<br />

Dean Academic Affairs<br />

Director<br />

Assistant Dean<br />

Dean<br />

Director<br />

Assistant Dean<br />

Associate Dean<br />

Associate Director,<br />

Humanities<br />

Associate Dean<br />

Manager or<br />

Director


OVERVIEW OF THE CONTENTS<br />

X<br />

The handbook is divided into ten sections dealing with specific information regarding effective<br />

teaching. Some of the items offer information specific to <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, while<br />

others provide Internet hyperlinks to resources and articles of other outstanding institutions nationwide.<br />

Permission has been granted by all of the institutions to which links to resources have been made.<br />

Section I provides an overview of what it means to be a graduate student at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong><br />

<strong>University</strong> as it relates to advancing the mission of the university. Highlights of some of the advantages<br />

and challenges that you are likely to face in your role as a GTA are noted. The roles and responsibilities<br />

of the various types of graduate assistants are defined and discussed by Dr. John Kelly. Dr. J.Y. Shen<br />

provides a detailed description of the ten standards that are used to ensure the basic competency of<br />

GTAs at A&T. These ten standards are based on the standards established for teachers in public schools<br />

in <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> and reflect the requisite knowledge, skills, and attitudes necessary to effectively and<br />

successfully carry out their responsibilities as educators.<br />

The articles in Section II address the challenges facing international graduate teaching assistants. An<br />

overview of the language requirements for international graduate students applying as graduate teaching<br />

assistants is presented. Dr. Judie Bucholz provides a definition of culture and discusses some of the<br />

challenges instructors face in making diversity in the classroom work to their advantage. Dr. Mulumebet<br />

Worku offers specific suggestions on how international graduate students can take advantage of mentors<br />

and other services at the university to facilitate their transition to a GTA.<br />

Section III focuses on the fundamentals of effective teaching. Dr. Lelia Vickers begins with an overview<br />

of the basic concepts involved in being an effective teacher. Dr. Marihelen Glass lists the 10 tenets of<br />

good teaching. Dr. Larry Powers discusses the need to develop an instructional paradigm that includes<br />

planning, monitoring student progress, and effective communication skills. Dr. Richard Jackson lists<br />

traits that can have a negative impact on student learning. Dr. Brenda Hall and Dr. Jane Davis-Seavers,<br />

provide information on methods and styles of teaching that promote active learning. Dr. Dawn Waegerle<br />

describes various philosophical approaches that link learning with planned outcome measures. Dr. Judie<br />

Bucholz provides tips on how to handle various situations that many GTA may face in the classroom.<br />

Section IV includes information to help you get started. Assistant Dean A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams<br />

discusses the orientation and training program for GTAs at A&T. A checklist of things to do and people<br />

to contact before you begin your assignment is provided. Dr. Godfrey Uzochukwu provides helpful<br />

information on how to conduct a class. Dr. Kimberly Richards provides information on developing a<br />

positive classroom environment. Dr. Paul Ankomah suggests potential sources of information for<br />

planning and designing a course. Dr. Etta Gravely outlines suggestions on what to do during the first day<br />

of class. Dr. Muktha Jost presents information on dealing with the multiplicity of diversity issues in the<br />

classroom.<br />

Section V deals with helping students to learn. Dr. Trent Larson and Dr. Richard Jackson present<br />

strategies on how to help students learn. Dr. Kimberly Richards lists seven principles that can be used to<br />

enhance the learning experience of both the student and the GTA. Dr. Jane Davis-Seavers discusses<br />

using collaborative groups to foster cooperative learning. The special needs of the adult learner are<br />

identified by Dr. Judie Bucholz. Dr. Muktha Jost presents information on effectively managing the time<br />

allotted for each class.


Section VI identifies the various instructional tools available to enhance the learning process. Dr. Karen<br />

Smith-Gratto provides a list of audio, visual and motion media and suggests strategies for utilizing each<br />

instructional technique. Dr. Marihelen Glass offers tips for developing good discussion sessions.<br />

Dr. Kenneth Murray presents information guidelines for giving effective lectures. Dr. Vallie Guthrie<br />

provides useful information on teaching and managing laboratory sections. Information on laboratory<br />

and classroom safety guidelines is presented by Dr. Etta Gravely. Dr. Anthony Graham presents a list of<br />

recommended instructional strategies based on learning modalities. Dr. Gloria Palma suggests strategies<br />

for teaching culturally and linguistically diverse students in the classroom. Dr. Robin Guill Liles<br />

discusses the importance of self-discovery in understanding teaching responsibilities and identifies three<br />

basic elements needed to help teaching assistants create and refine their effective voices.<br />

XI<br />

Section VII covers issues related to grades and the overall management of the classroom. Dr. Karen<br />

Smith-Gratto discusses the role of grades in evaluating performance and provides various rubrics for<br />

assessing performance. Dr. Gloria Palma clarifies the distinction between evaluations that measure<br />

progress versus evaluations that measure performance. Dr. Rita Lamb discusses the roles and<br />

responsibilities of academic advisors. Dr. Robin Guill Liles reports on the exclusive role of the GTA as<br />

an academic liaison between senior faculty and undergraduate student. Dr. Patricia Bethea-Whitfield<br />

discusses the importance of building rapport and provides suggestions for expressing empathy with the<br />

student’s situation.<br />

Section VIII looks at the issue of GTA professional development. Dr. Patrice Faison and Jason DePolo<br />

discuss the value of reflective professional development. Terese Coon provides a sample survey for<br />

soliciting feedback from students. Assistant Dean A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams identifies services available<br />

at A&T to enhance professional growth. Dr. Karen Guy and Dr. Thurman Guy present information on<br />

how to prepare a competitive professional portfolio.<br />

In Section IX, Assistant Dean A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams details the <strong>University</strong> and <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong><br />

General Administration’s policies and procedures related to graduate teaching assistant appointments.<br />

Dr. Kenneth Murray discusses the professional and legal responsibilities of GTAs. Mr. Marvin Dickerson<br />

details the safety and emergency procedures in the classroom as required by ARISA/Health and Safety.<br />

Doug Speight provides information on the purpose and benefits of the university transfer program.<br />

Marvin Watkins provides information on student initiated programs and unfunded projects.<br />

Section X provides advice for supervisors and graduate students on how to help GTAs be successful. A<br />

checklist for supervisors to use to help orient GTAs to their assignment is included. Comments from<br />

Terese Coon and other experienced GTAs are listed.<br />

It is our sincere hope that you will use this handbook as a tool to guide you in making your experience<br />

as a GTA a significant milestone in your education.


SECTION I<br />

Introduction<br />

What it Means to be a Graduate Assistant at NC A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

1<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistants are a vital part of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>’s vision as a<br />

learning centered institution that fosters quality instruction and continued learning. They contribute to<br />

the teaching mission of the <strong>University</strong> by fulfilling their responsibilities in their role as paraprofessionals<br />

and the dual role they play are important to this university. Involving GTAs in labs, recitations, and<br />

discussion sessions allows faculty members more time to lecture, teach upper-division courses, and do<br />

research with their graduate students. Your insight as a student who has either taken this same course,<br />

or one very similar to it, is invaluable. Such insights are useful in planning the course and helping your<br />

students learn.<br />

As a student enrolled in a graduate study program, you are taking classes and managing the workload<br />

of any other grad student, yet, as a GTA, you are also juggling your role as a teacher. While you are<br />

working on your assignments for class, studying, writing papers, and all the other tasks that go with<br />

being a student, you are also planning lessons and grading papers for the students whom you teach in<br />

your role as GTA.<br />

This balancing act can often be unnerving, humbling, and even frustrating. Yet because you are both a<br />

student and a teacher, you are in an ideal position to be conscious of both sides of the situation and use<br />

that knowledge for your own benefit, as well as that of your students.<br />

There are other advantages to being a GTA. It helps finance your education and gives you a role in<br />

the everyday life of your department. Staff and faculty will learn your name, and you will have the<br />

opportunity to become acquainted with other GTAs with whom you can share ideas and support. The<br />

relationship you establish with the faculty member who supervises the course you teach is valuable. He<br />

or she may be a source of useful advice and guidance on teaching, and he or she may become a mentor<br />

during your graduate career and a reference for you when you search for your first job after graduation.<br />

As you prepare your lessons to teach you are also further embedding in your mind the subject matter,<br />

and the questions your students will ask can further stretch your knowledge.Your lecture notes, lesson<br />

plans, presentations, and other preparations for teaching are likely to be useful to you later on.<br />

This teaching experience may be one of the most important components of your education for the<br />

future. Whether you aspire to be a college professor or not, the experience of teaching others will help<br />

you develop poise, self-assurance, organizational skills, and structure. And it may be an important<br />

credential for employment applications and continuing your education even further.<br />

Teaching can be rewarding as you instill knowledge and serve as a role model for other students. You<br />

may influence many students, some of whom will be freshman, to seek a major in your field of expertise.<br />

Let’s be honest – serving as a GTA does have its drawbacks. You may be under a lot of pressure as you<br />

are also studying for a degree. In addition, the undergraduates that you teach may insist on individual<br />

attention and you will be in a position where you have to make decisions of authority in some instances.<br />

Often times, you are close in age to your students and they may expect you to be their friend and<br />

confidante in addition to their instructor. You will have to set limits on what you can and cannot do,<br />

and stick to it.<br />

You may discover from your role as GTA that you are not a born teacher or do not like the<br />

give-and-take of an undergraduate classroom. Teaching skills do improve with experience, and with<br />

that experience often comes increased satisfaction with the role. If this is not the case for you, at<br />

least you tried it and learned that teaching is not for you and you can plan your future accordingly.


Types of Graduate Assistant Roles and Duties<br />

Edited by John C. Kelly, Jr., Ph.D.<br />

Chairperson – Department of Electrical and Computing Engineering,<br />

College of Engineering<br />

2<br />

At <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> (NCA&T) the term, Graduate Assistants (GA),<br />

is a general term meaning a graduate student enrolled and employed by the university to<br />

assist in the area of administration, research, or teaching. Departments within the university<br />

vary in the responsibilities they assign their GAs, but the most common GA roles are<br />

described below in general terms:<br />

Graduate Administrative Assistant (GAA)<br />

A Graduate Administrative Assistant’s duties primarily involve assisting the university's<br />

administrative staff or a specific department with collecting, organizing and analyzing various<br />

administrative data. These duties should be relevant to the graduate program and professional<br />

goals of the student.<br />

A GAA is most often assigned to assist with registration, collection of materials, computer<br />

work, editing, department exhibitions or special projects. Minor responsibilities involve<br />

attending seminars, engaging in library research and holding conferences.<br />

Graduate Research Assistant (GRA)<br />

A Graduate Research Assistant is one who assumes research-oriented responsibilities<br />

including library work, computer programming, analysis, fieldwork, laboratory experiments,<br />

scientific investigations, or other endeavors. The principal investigator of a funded research<br />

project normally employs GRAs. The student’s work on a research project should be closely<br />

supervised; it could lead to the successful writing of a thesis or dissertation, a significant<br />

intellectual discovery, or provide long-range direction for the student’s development as<br />

a scholar.<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistant (GTA)<br />

A Graduate Teaching Assistant serves in an instructional role in a class or laboratory within<br />

a specific department at NCA&TSU. GTAs may perform pedagogical functions, such as,<br />

preparing lectures, teaching classes, grading tests, holding conferences, assigning course<br />

grades, or providing support for the faculty member in charge of the course. In all cases, the<br />

GTA works under the supervision of a faculty member. To this end, the GTA works to gain<br />

teaching skills and a better understanding of the essentials of his/her academic discipline.<br />

Both GRAs and GTAs must also fulfill duties and responsibilities concerning safety in the<br />

laboratory equipment. Supplemental guidelines are available from the colleges/schools<br />

department offices.<br />

The duties of GTAs will vary by department and role as well, but some of the more<br />

common duties are described below:<br />

Recitation or Discussion Leader<br />

This is the most common GTA assignment in many disciplines where lectures represent the<br />

major form of instruction. The supervising professor plans the course, makes the reading<br />

assignments, and delivers lectures on a regular basis. As a GTA you are expected to attend<br />

the lectures so that you can address student questions and relate your own teaching to<br />

the instructor’s.


The purpose of recitation or discussion section is to have students engage in discussion of the<br />

course content presented in the lectures. Students are divided into smaller groups that meet<br />

separately for interactive class sessions. As a GTA you may moderate or stimulate student<br />

discussions, solve homework problems, assign and evaluate student projects, answer questions,<br />

present additional materials, and serve as a liaison between the professor and the students.<br />

3<br />

In some instances you may be responsible for reading and evaluating written assignments<br />

submitted by students. You may also help develop or administer exams and quizzes, or grade<br />

them if the professor prepares them. At the end of the semester you may work in consultation<br />

with the supervising professor to assign grades. If you have any questions about your role or<br />

duties, please ask your supervising professor. In most cases, they served as a GTA during their<br />

own graduate training and will be more than willing to clarify what they want you to do.<br />

Laboratory Assistant<br />

Working as a GTA in a teaching laboratory is very much like being a GTA in recitation<br />

sessions (see section above). You provide supplemental, practical instruction to a lecture<br />

course for students in smaller groups; develop, assign, supervise and grade student projects in<br />

the lab; and periodically evaluate student progress.<br />

Your range of duties may include overseeing laboratory safety and maintenance, preparing<br />

samples, stocking supplies, fabricating equipment, and trouble-shooting computer problems.<br />

You may be involved in instruction, or you may be on hand to handle materials and problems<br />

that may arise. In all cases, the supervising professor is your contact person, defining duties<br />

and outlining expectations for the operation of the laboratory and the instruction that takes<br />

place in it.<br />

General Assistant to a Professor and His/Her Course<br />

This assignment generally involves duties to assist students in learning the course material,<br />

such as holding office hours and review sessions before exams. It may also involve<br />

maintaining course web pages, posting solutions to homework problems, and grading quizzes,<br />

exams, and projects. You may be asked to make a presentation to the class if you have<br />

knowledge or experience on a particular topic, or if the professor has to be away from class<br />

on occasion.<br />

Grader<br />

Some departments assign GTAs to evaluate student exams, projects and papers. As a grader,<br />

you are an extension of the professor and should consult that person regarding what standards<br />

and expectations he or she wishes to apply to the evaluation process. Through the grading<br />

process, you will become aware of how individual students are doing and may be asked to<br />

counsel certain students about their performance.<br />

Tutor<br />

Another common GTA assignment is tutoring for a specific course or in a department help<br />

session. Departments that offer tutoring opportunities usually structure this help in one of<br />

two ways. One way is to work with each student individually, walking through a problem<br />

with them step-by-step.<br />

Another method is to work with a group of students who may have similar problems or<br />

misunderstandings of the subject matter. By getting the group to interact and solve each<br />

other’s problems cooperatively, you can help them recognize the value of working in a<br />

study group.


Standards for Graduate Teaching Assistants -<br />

Knowledge, Skills, and Attitudes Necessary to Be an Effective GTA<br />

By J. Y. Shen, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Department of Manufacturing Systems, School of Technology<br />

(Edited by Mrs.Susan Payne, Research Assistant, School of Graduate Studies)<br />

4<br />

As a Graduate Teaching Assistant at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, you may be<br />

asked to engage in a variety of teaching-related activities including lecturing, class discussion,<br />

labs, one-on-one tutoring, office hours, testing, grading, and more. The standards described<br />

below, based on the standards established for teachers in public schools in <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong>,<br />

reflect the requisite knowledge, skills, and attitudes necessary for the successful execution of<br />

the duties of a GTA:<br />

1. Content Pedagogy<br />

The GTA understands the central concepts, tools of inquiry, and structures of the discipline he or she<br />

teaches and can create learning experiences that make these aspects of subject matter meaningful<br />

for students.<br />

For a GTA, being able to effectively teach a particular course is not based solely on having<br />

taken and passed that same course. Knowing the content is one thing, but being able to<br />

effectively teach it and help others learn it is another. Depending on the course you are<br />

teaching, you will need to think back to when you were taking it (or a similar course) and<br />

what principles for learning worked for you. Was there a particular assignment, exercise, or<br />

activity that brought some of the key concepts into focus for you? What was most<br />

challenging? What was most effective? Start by asking your supervising professor to suggest<br />

ways to present material and make it meaningful for students. Also read Sections III<br />

through VI of this Handbook for valuable information relating to course planning,<br />

teaching, and learning.<br />

2. Student Development<br />

The GTA understands how students learn and develop, and can provide learning<br />

opportunities that support a student’s intellectual, social, and personal development.<br />

Some ways to support the development of students whom you teach include the following:<br />

Make students feel important. Teachers, who value students, avoid condescension,<br />

sarcasm, and impersonal behavior, and cultivate self-esteem through praising good<br />

performance and taking a personal interest in students.<br />

Make students feel invited. Teachers, who make students feel invited both in class and<br />

outside of class, have a strong impact on motivation, student retention, the presence or<br />

absence of classes.<br />

Deal with needed changes from a positive point of view. Honest and frequent feedback is<br />

essential to good learning, but even very critical feedback can be offered in a constructive<br />

way. Teachers can usually find some good point to praise and can suggest specific ways in<br />

which unsatisfactory performance can be improved.<br />

Learn to make nonverbal cues. Good eye contact, smiles, and active listening skills such<br />

as nodding, help motivate students.<br />

Get to know students as individuals. Teachers who request that all students visit them<br />

outside of class to chat informally and instructors who have lunch or coffee with students<br />

are examples of those who understand that a personal acquaintance enhances the<br />

teaching-learning relationship.<br />

Learn to empathize. Teachers who remember some of the hardships, uncertainties, and<br />

stress of their own student days are better able to help their students who are undergoing<br />

those difficulties.


Establish parameters. Teachers who clearly define tasks and set high expectations for<br />

behavior and learning are better able to motivate students.<br />

Use student-centered instruction. Student-centered instruction involves planning<br />

learning activities that will actively engage students and will anticipate the kinds of<br />

opportunities and challenges that will be present in a specific area.<br />

Be enthusiastic. Most instructors find their discipline compelling, but sometimes it is hard<br />

to recapture excitement about a familiar topic. Trying to look at the familiar in a new<br />

light or to present things in fresh ways are strategies instructors use to maintain their<br />

enthusiasm. Integral to any discussion of motivation is “personalizing” the classroom.<br />

Using instructional strategies that enable some individualization of instruction or small<br />

group work helps develop personal investment and interest in learning. Similarly, direct<br />

attempts of instructors to talk about such things as their own life experiences related to the<br />

subject and their personal difficulties in mastering certain concepts create a warmer<br />

classroom climate.<br />

5<br />

3. Diverse Learners<br />

The GTA understands how students differ in their approaches to learning and creates<br />

instructional opportunities that are adapted to diverse learners.<br />

Sensitivity to cultural diversity is an important component of a good learning atmosphere.<br />

You should also be sensitive to other kinds of diversity, including everything from sexual<br />

orientation to political convictions to religious beliefs. The key to a good environment is<br />

freedom of thought and expression in which to explore new ideas, test hypotheses, and<br />

question old assumptions. No student should feel ostracized because of his or her thoughts,<br />

beliefs, or background. They come to A&T with different experiences and worldviews. Your<br />

job as a teaching assistant is neither to correct “wrong” views nor to allow students to<br />

placidly dismiss views different from their own. Learning implies the exchange of ideas and<br />

creating a classroom that allows for such an exchange is your responsibility.<br />

We all make conscious and subconscious decisions about what we consider valuable and<br />

why. However, be aware of your own biases and how you might be inadvertently<br />

communicating these to your students.<br />

Students who discontinue their education for any purpose and then later return to college<br />

can be considered re-entry students. They are usually older than what we normally think of<br />

as college-aged students and may have more varied life experiences than traditional-aged<br />

students. Many of them have been away from the classroom for many years, and entering or<br />

re-entering college represents a major change in their lives. For some, it is a great loss of social<br />

status to again be a student.<br />

For GTAs, teaching to re-entry students can be a challenge, particularly when the re-entry<br />

student is nearer in age to the GTA’s parents than to the GTA. Yet, such an age difference<br />

can be equally difficult for the student. The GTA needs to respect the student's life<br />

experience and the student needs to respect the GTA’s formal education. Because re-entry<br />

students tend to be very goal oriented, they want to learn and they want the GTA to teach<br />

them. Re-entry students are, for the most part, equal to their GTAs in age, life style, and<br />

seriousness of purpose. As a result, GTAs may have to exert more effort in getting re-entry<br />

students to utilize their help. A re-entry student is more likely to go directly to the professor,<br />

or feel uncomfortable asking anyone for help because of their more mature status. Also,<br />

re-entry students may want to know and discuss more than what is in the books. GTAs need<br />

to remember that these students have life experiences and responsibilities outside of the<br />

classroom that are quite different from those of the traditional full-time student.


Most <strong>North</strong> Americans value democracy and believe that all people should have equal social<br />

and political rights. In the classroom, this means a high level of student participation is<br />

usually expected. In other cultures, however, student questions and comments during class<br />

may be regarded as disrespectful interruptions. In the US, great importance is placed on the<br />

individual. In the classroom, most students expect individual attention and recognition.<br />

They expect to be rewarded for independent thinking and creativity. Conversely, other<br />

cultures may prioritize collectivity over individuality and may reserve the highest praise for<br />

teamwork, cooperation, and emulation.<br />

6<br />

Also, Americans are often comfortable with informality. In the classroom, students may<br />

slouch in their seats; many come to class wearing jeans and t-shirts. Teachers may also dress<br />

casually and may sit on their desks with their feet dangling to the floor. Students and GTAs<br />

generally expect to be on a first-name basis with each other. In more formal educational<br />

systems around the world, it is appropriate to come to class in dress clothes and polished<br />

shoes, maintain an erect posture throughout class, and address the teacher only by last name.<br />

Be cognizant of these differences and what they may or may not mean to you as a GTA.<br />

4. Multiple Instructional Strategies<br />

The GTA understands and uses a variety of instructional strategies to encourage student<br />

development of critical thinking, problem solving, and performance skills.<br />

Teachers should use a variety of teaching techniques to utilize and build on the students’<br />

experiences. Active participation by the students is critical to accomplishing this task.<br />

When students are involved, they are more likely to explore alternative ways to think about<br />

the subject as well as think of alternative ways to complete the task. As a result, critical<br />

thinking skills are enhanced. One active teaching technique is having students role play<br />

situations that they have confronted. Another is large and small group discussions in which<br />

adult students are encouraged to share relevant experiences. Posing questions to students can<br />

further encourage this integration. Equally effective is the instructor’s sharing examples from<br />

his or her own practice. The use of analogies and metaphors can also be extremely useful in<br />

helping students integrate new and old knowledge.<br />

Some traditional instructional strategies that you may incorporate into your classroom<br />

sessions include the following. More detail on many of them is provided in Section VI of<br />

this handbook.<br />

Lectures<br />

Class Discussions<br />

Question and Answer Sessions<br />

Small Group Activities<br />

Chalkboard and Dry Erase Board Work<br />

Overhead Projector Presentations<br />

Project Journals (as a way for<br />

students to record process<br />

and progress in a<br />

developing project)


5. Motivation and Management<br />

The GTA uses an understanding of<br />

individual and group motivation and<br />

behavior to create a learning environment<br />

that encourages positive social interaction,<br />

active engagement in learning, and<br />

self-motivation.<br />

Educational psychologists have<br />

concluded through various sorts of<br />

studies that in classes where students<br />

are highly motivated, there are eight<br />

characteristics that are almost always<br />

present related to the instructor:<br />

While motivation to make a good<br />

grade may also be a factor, it is believed<br />

that what an instructor does or does<br />

not do has a major impact on students’<br />

willingness to make a persistent effort<br />

to learn.<br />

★<br />

★<br />

★<br />

★<br />

★<br />

★<br />

★<br />

★<br />

Enthusiasm for the topic.<br />

Relevance of the course material to the<br />

lives, experiences, or career goals of the<br />

students.<br />

Classes were organized and well-planned.<br />

Material and workload was regarded by<br />

the students as challenging but “doable.”<br />

Students are actively engaged in<br />

classroom learning.<br />

A variety of instructional techniques and<br />

strategies were utilized.<br />

Instructors were perceived as<br />

approachable and friendly, and appeared<br />

interested in the students as individuals.<br />

Course material was made real, concrete<br />

and understandable through the use of<br />

appropriate examples and anecdotes.<br />

7<br />

6. Communication and Technology<br />

The GTA uses knowledge of effective verbal, nonverbal, and media communication<br />

techniques to foster active inquiry, collaboration, and supportive interaction in the classroom.<br />

In order to insure that all students are provided with the opportunity to learn, learning<br />

environments must be designed in ways that allow learners to approach learning in diverse<br />

ways. By including a variety of techniques and tools to enhance student learning, we allow<br />

students many opportunities to interpret the content.<br />

Section VI of this handbook includes volumes of information on how to incorporate various<br />

forms of media and technology into your teaching, thus allowing many ways that students<br />

can become engaged in an interactive classroom environment.<br />

7. Planning<br />

The GTA plans instruction based upon knowledge of subject matter, students, the<br />

community, and curriculum goals.<br />

Planning of a course<br />

and class time can be<br />

anxiety producing for<br />

GTAs. By devoting<br />

some creative energy<br />

to planning, you can<br />

lay the groundwork for<br />

a successful semester.<br />

Steps to make the<br />

planning process<br />

go smoothly include:<br />

Understand Your Position and Working Environment:<br />

Be sure you are in sync with the professor of the course. This<br />

is a partnership in which he or she is the lead partner. Follow<br />

the lead.<br />

Plan the first day of class carefully. Decide what you want to<br />

cover and how you want to present it. Balance is important.<br />

Balance the day between (a) introductions, (b) course<br />

policies and procedures, and (c) specific content that<br />

introduce students to the course, encouraging focus<br />

and enthusiasm.<br />

Check the room before class starts to study the<br />

layout and make sure everything is<br />

working. Think about logistics. Also, look<br />

at the room from the students’ perspectives.<br />

Can they see you, the board, or screen?


8. Assessment<br />

The GTA understands and uses formal and informal assessment strategies to evaluate<br />

and ensure the continuous intellectual, social, and physical development of the learner.<br />

Evaluating student performance is a key component of the role of an instructor. Constructing<br />

tests and assignments that measure student learning and understanding of course content<br />

requires careful planning and execution. The articles in Section VII of this Handbook<br />

provide multiple suggestions for making student assessment more effective and meaningful.<br />

8<br />

9. Reflective Practice: Professional Growth<br />

The GTA is a reflective practitioner who continually evaluates the effects of his or her<br />

choices and actions on others (students, faculty, and other professionals in the learning<br />

community) and who actively seeks out opportunities to grow professionally.<br />

One way to evaluate your teaching is to seek feedback from the students you teach. Many<br />

GTAs provide a form for student feedback during and/or at the end of the semester. Examples<br />

of survey/feedback forms are included in Section VIII of this Handbook, as well as a link to a<br />

web-site that offers a way to customize forms for the course(s) you teach.<br />

While most professors at A&T distribute a standard Student Opinion Form to students at the<br />

end of each semester to gather feedback, this data is not always compiled and available to the<br />

GTA in a time frame that allows them to use the feedback for the very next course they<br />

teach. By providing your own survey tool in addition to the standard university form, you will<br />

be able to study the feedback immediately and determine what aspects of the course and/or<br />

your teaching need to be fine-tuned before the next semester begins.<br />

For on-going preparation for your role as a Teaching Assistants, many departments within the<br />

<strong>University</strong> schedule orientation and training activities for new teaching assistants and/or<br />

faculty. In some cases, this orientation involves several days of meetings, interviews, and<br />

information sessions. Contact the department under which you teach concerning training<br />

opportunities that are available.<br />

In addition, Career Services in Murphy Hall offers university-wide training programs for new<br />

and returning graduate assistants and new faculty. Topics vary and have included promoting<br />

active learning, leading discussion, developing group process techniques, and using technology<br />

in the classroom. Pre-registration is required, but the seminars are offered free of charge.<br />

The School of Graduate Studies STAR program offers the Preparing Future Faculty (PFF)<br />

program for graduate students interested in pursuing a faculty career in Science, Technology,<br />

Engineering and Mathematics. PFF helps participants learn more about the full range of<br />

faculty life in teaching, research, and service at a variety of higher education institutions.<br />

The program includes seminar and workshop courses, individual faculty mentoring,<br />

opportunities to gain a variety of teaching experiences while earning graduate credit, and<br />

interactions with faculty and administrators from other institutions.<br />

The Effective Teaching Training Institute, coordinated by The School of Graduate Studies,<br />

offers workshops throughout the year on topics such as “Using Technology to Support<br />

Pedagogy,” “Using Your Voice Effectively,” and “Creating A Teaching Portfolio.”


The Academy of Teaching & Learning, located on the lower level of Bluford Library on<br />

campus, supports A&T’s commitment to effective teaching through seminars, workshops,<br />

newsletters, grants, and other efforts to improve the instructional environment.<br />

9<br />

Additionally, Section VIII of this Handbook contains numerous articles, suggested reading,<br />

contact information, and links to resources for professional development.<br />

10. School and Community Involvement<br />

The GTA fosters relationships with colleagues and agencies in the larger community<br />

to support students’ learning and well-being.<br />

Various departments on campus offer support services for students. As an instructor, when you<br />

identify students whom you believe need assistance with educational, health, or other issues<br />

that affect their learning or wellbeing, please make every effort to direct them to the<br />

appropriate resource(s). Establishing a contact at each of these departments when you decide<br />

to become a GTA may be helpful in the event you have questions you need answered before<br />

referring a student to one of these resources. In addition, your department chairperson and<br />

the student’s academic advisor are also valuable resources.<br />

Academic Affairs Dowdy Building 334-7965<br />

Academy of Teaching & Learning Bluford Library 256-0212<br />

Center for Student Success Hodgin Hall 334-7855<br />

Counseling Services Murphy Hall 334-7727<br />

Sebastian Health Center 334-7880<br />

Student Affairs Murphy Hall 334-7696<br />

Setting Boundaries and Limits<br />

The relationship between GTAs and students is<br />

multifaceted and thus can be a very complex one.<br />

Harassment -- sexual or otherwise -- can work<br />

both ways. You could be perceived of as harassing<br />

a student in your class, or, you could be the<br />

recipient of what you perceive of as harassment<br />

by a student in your class. GTAs are, after all, the<br />

peers and colleagues of the students whom they<br />

are assisting. Yet by the nature of their position,<br />

they are often perceived of as having power and<br />

authority. You may not feel you have power and<br />

authority, but the students may feel you have.<br />

Under these circumstances, you need to be<br />

particularly sensitive to the relationship you<br />

establish with students.<br />

Remember, there are two versions of events --<br />

what you mean, and what the other person hears.<br />

Your intention might be one thing, but for a<br />

variety of reasons, the student you are talking<br />

with may perceive your actions or words differently.<br />

Be sure you make it clear when you are on duty<br />

and accessible and when you are not. You have a<br />

responsibility to yourself to protect your own<br />

boundaries. You have your own courses to study<br />

for, or to work in the library or computer lab on<br />

your own work without interruption. If you give<br />

out your phone number to students so that they<br />

may call you at home for assistance, make it clear<br />

what hours are acceptable for calling.<br />

If students approach you for assistance during<br />

times that you are doing your own work, its<br />

OK to tell them you cannot help them now,<br />

but suggest they contact you during your<br />

designated office hours, or at some other<br />

time when you will be available to<br />

help them.


SECTION II<br />

International GTAs<br />

A significant number of GTAs at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> come from outside the<br />

United <strong>State</strong>s, from countries where English is not the dominant language or where it is spoken with<br />

different pronunciation and vocabulary. As an international GTA, we value the knowledge of the<br />

world that you bring to teaching here. The special flavor and perspective you can contribute to undergraduate<br />

education is important, however, U.S. classrooms and undergraduates may present challenges<br />

for you if you are new to higher education in this country.<br />

Language Requirements<br />

English Proficiency Tests (Procedure, ITAs Duties for Non-native Speakers)<br />

International students applying for graduate assistantships who are graduates of institutions of higher<br />

education located outside the USA in non-English speaking countries are required to demonstrate<br />

proficiency in the English language by having official scores directly from the test of English as Foreign<br />

Language (TOFEL) submitted to the School of Graduate Studies. International teaching assistants<br />

MUST score a minimum of 550 on the paper base test or 213 on the computer base test. Only scores<br />

received from Educational Testing Service, Princeton, NJ 08451, will be considered official. Students<br />

are responsible for requesting ETS to forward scores to the university.<br />

A graduate student for whom English is a second language must obtain clearance through the<br />

International Students Office for enhancing their communication skills. This office is located in<br />

Murphy Hall, <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> Agricultural and Technical <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, Greensboro, NC 27411;<br />

the telephone number is (336)334-7551. The academic unit (department, college, and school) also<br />

evaluates international students’ effective communication skills.<br />

In addition to the TOEFL requirement, a number of departments stipulate that graduate student for<br />

whom English is a second language must engage in a personal interview, satisfy the expectations of a<br />

faculty mentor, and/or meet other standards such as presenting a certain score on the Graduate Record<br />

Examination (GRE).<br />

Other methods used to assess English proficiency include writing assignments or oral presentations<br />

under the supervision of faculty mentors. Student evaluations are also used to determine mastery of<br />

English. Students with a need for additional language work are required to audit appropriate classes in<br />

English or Business Communication. The Department of English requires their teaching assistants to<br />

take English 700, a special topics course designed to instruct, monitor, and evaluate each individual<br />

graduate student in the art of teaching English 100: Ideas and Their Expression I. Additionally,<br />

personal interviews by the department are used to evaluate the student’s verbal skills and proficiency<br />

in communicating, i.e., clarity, accent, demeanor, etc.<br />

As a non-native speaking GTA, you may be assigned to activities that do not demand extensive oral<br />

communication, such as laboratory preparation and demonstrations or grading.<br />

10<br />

Cultural Dimensions<br />

By Judie Bucholz, Ph.D., SPHR<br />

Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />

Human Development and Services<br />

There have been many definitions of culture over the years. Walter Lonner (1994) said the<br />

most common definitions of culture include the following ingredients:<br />

Culture is an abstract idea, a hypothetical construct that is created by humans and is<br />

useful primarily for scientific reasons.


Culture is not behavior. It simply provides complex settings in which various behaviors<br />

may occur. To say that Astrid behaves in a certain way because she is Swedish is like<br />

saying that a man limps because he is lame. Culture creates for individuals certain<br />

potentials for reaction. These potentials differ from time to time and place to place.<br />

Culture shapes and bends behavior by interacting with individuals. Not even the most<br />

sophisticated and enlightened definition of culture can explain behavior, because<br />

definitions themselves are static and not dynamic. A good definition however, may help us<br />

to organize the various ways in which we might formulate explanations of differences<br />

in behavior.<br />

Any culture contains values, beliefs, attitudes, and languages that have emerged as<br />

adaptations to the peculiar geographic and temporal circumstances that have impinged on<br />

the lives of a group of people who agree on what to call themselves.<br />

The values, beliefs, attitudes, and languages that have proved to be adaptive are<br />

considered important enough to pass on to the next generation. Such generational<br />

transmission either can be done explicitly, by using formal instruction and rules (the<br />

socialization processes), or can be implicitly and subtly taught to succeeding generations<br />

in the course of everyday life. The enculturation process).<br />

11<br />

Instructors confront significant challenges in making diversity work to their advantage. These<br />

challenges include: (1) genuinely valuing student diversity, (2) balancing individual needs<br />

with group fairness, (3) coping with resistance to change, (4) promoting group cohesiveness,<br />

and (5) ensuring open communication.<br />

If effectively managed, diversity can be powerful in the classroom because it stimulates<br />

creativity, enhances problem solving by offering broader perspectives, and infuses flexibility.<br />

Personal and cultural values are challenged by diversity. In addressing the challenge, we must<br />

develop an appreciation of variations among human beings, even if the differences may be<br />

antagonistic to our own beliefs and values.<br />

Benefits of Having a Mentor<br />

By Mulumebet Worku, Ph.D.<br />

Assistant Professor<br />

Department of Animal Sciences and Veterinary Medicine,<br />

School of Agricultural and Environmental Sciences<br />

The first weeks as an international student can be confusing and difficult in particular if you<br />

are in the United <strong>State</strong>s for the first time. Settling in is vital and will contribute to your<br />

academic performance. Living in a new environment has many challenges. International<br />

students have the added pressures of having to learn how to cope in a new cultural environment,<br />

dealing with language issues, getting around, learning the rules and regulations of the university,<br />

experiencing loneliness and separation from family and friends, wanting to make friends with US<br />

students without knowing how, understanding US laws and living up to expectations from family.<br />

Many international students find that one of the best ways to overcome issues of relating to<br />

culture shock and homesickness is through the use of Peer-support or mentoring. Mentors can<br />

make this adjustment easier by providing support, encouragement and friendship. This support<br />

may be social, emotional, and academic, though mentors are not expected to serve as either<br />

counselors or tutors. Having a mentor who will be available to answer questions, give a point<br />

of view on life at the university, and how to get the most out of it as well as pointing you in<br />

the right direction to the services offered at A&T will be most helpful to you.<br />

Services such as help with language and writing are especially significant for international<br />

students. International students go through overwhelming experiences as newcomers while<br />

adjusting to the demands of graduate study in a US university. A mentor serves as a contact


that will share experiences and their time with you to help you adjust to the culture on campus<br />

and the US way of life. Webster’s dictionary defines a mentor as ‘a wise person and advisor, a<br />

teacher…, and a loyal friend to someone.’ International students often feel disconnected when<br />

they have left their countries to seek new friends. Mentors offer both help and support when<br />

coming to a new country where you’re not familiar with the culture of the people.<br />

12<br />

As an international student the mentor gives you an opportunity to get to know other students<br />

and helps with practical matters such as getting a bank account. Mentors should have a<br />

genuine interest in the experiences and well being of the international student to share<br />

cross-cultural experiences and knowledge in a reciprocal fashion, to help guide the student<br />

through the rules of the institution, to provide appropriate feedback on academic work and<br />

questions and to broaden the student’s exposure to US culture.<br />

To identify a mentor, students should look for individuals with a strong willingness to<br />

understand international students, familiarity with American universities, and a good academic<br />

standing and reputation within the university. The mentor will help introduce you to an<br />

environment that will allow you to develop a network of individuals that will be important to<br />

your academic career and social needs. This relationship is valuable for both the mentee and<br />

the mentor.<br />

The advantages of having a mentor include:<br />

Assistance with the rules and<br />

.<br />

regulation expectations<br />

activities and the general<br />

necessities of student life on<br />

campus and in the community<br />

Guidance in adjusting to the<br />

campus culture and academic<br />

environment.<br />

Career goals that are<br />

strengthened and sustained.<br />

Promise of an exciting and<br />

fulfilling and successful<br />

experience at NC A&T.<br />

Increased knowledge about<br />

campus services, self<br />

confidence and reinforced<br />

personal values and<br />

professionalism.<br />

Service as a peer mentor for<br />

other students.<br />

Students, staff and faculty at NC A&T have embraced globalization as part of the FUTURES<br />

initiative. They are very willing to get an insight into other cultures. This willingness creates a<br />

welcoming atmosphere on campus for international students to identify peer mentors and<br />

faculty mentors. Further, the large number of international faculty and staff and who have<br />

international experience are a resource for any international student interested in identifying a<br />

mentor. This introduces exciting possibilities for global cultural awareness.<br />

Get connected by keeping abreast of campus news and interacting with the Office of<br />

International Programs and the International Student Scholars Office. For example, the<br />

university hosts an international week celebration, the Mattye Reed Cultural Arts Center, and<br />

also interacts with community-based international activities in the area. Further, visitors and<br />

speakers from numerous countries are hosted on the campus. Mentors can make a difference<br />

and provide support in understanding rules and procedures in the context of the institution and<br />

way of life.<br />

An incoming international student requires basic information such as where to buy food, where<br />

things are in the university, how to set up a bank account, how to find housing or where the<br />

recreational areas are and faith-related organizations are located. Ask other students in your<br />

program. A student should identify a mentor on campus that will provide this information. The<br />

new international student should attend all orientation programs. In particular, you must check<br />

in with the International Student and Scholars office at 221 Murphy Hall immediately upon


arrival and use this office as a resource in identifying mentors on campus. The Office of<br />

Graduate Studies in Gibbs Hall and the Offices of Foreign Languages are also important<br />

contacts. The campus map in your registration packet will provide the locations of these<br />

places.<br />

13<br />

Form relationships with your academic advisor who might be able to recommend mentors.<br />

Your academic advisor may serve as your mentor and provide guidance in areas including<br />

courses and academic expectations. Consider joining the national or ethnic organization that<br />

best fits your need on campus or in the community. These organizations may sponsor events<br />

and activities of special interest to your group and will notify you of upcoming activities. Read<br />

campus newspapers as they are a good source of current information about possible mentors.<br />

Look over bulletin boards in the classroom, buildings, cafeteria and student union. Also, check<br />

bulletin boards in the dormitory and apartment house. The university has an e-mail system and<br />

the web-site provides information on upcoming activities and the names of faculty who will<br />

help you identify mentors. As an international students at NC A&T, you will have many<br />

opportunities to meet new people, learn a new language and experience a different culture. You<br />

will experience new things and your mentors will be learning from you, too. Remember, being<br />

an international student is a give and take situation. You bring a wealth of experience, too.<br />

Resources For additional advice:<br />

Althen, G. (1988). Manual for Foreign Teaching Assistants. Iowa City, IA.: <strong>University</strong> of Iowa.<br />

Althen, G. (1988). American Ways. Yarmouth, ME: Intercultural Press.<br />

Derek Bok Center for Teaching and Learning. (1993). Teaching in America (Video). Cambridge,<br />

MA: The President and Fellows of Harvard <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Illinois <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, link to their International TA Program resources.<br />

Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> TA Handbook, Section II for International TAs<br />

Sarkisian, E. (1997). Teaching American Students: A Guide for International Faculty and Teaching<br />

Assistants in Colleges and Universities. Cambridge, MA: The<br />

President and Fellows of Harvard <strong>University</strong>.<br />

<strong>University</strong> of California at Santa Barbara, link to TA Handbook<br />

and International TA Handbook.<br />

<strong>University</strong> of Washington, link to their International TA Program<br />

resources.


SECTION III<br />

Foundations of Good Teaching<br />

The ultimate test of your classroom abilities may well be not how much you have taught, but<br />

how much you have learned and the degree to which your students have learned to learn.<br />

C. Roland Christensen<br />

in The Art and Craft of Teaching<br />

14<br />

Overview<br />

By Lelia Vickers, Ph.D.<br />

Dean<br />

School of Education<br />

Good teaching is imbued in principles of learning based on scientific research and information<br />

that has been acquired from observations and analyses of actions in the world. Social scientists<br />

and others who try to discover the complexities of teaching and learning frequently focus on<br />

variables such as students’ characteristics and abilities, teaching behaviors, communication,<br />

organization, and measure of students’ learning. From kindergarten through graduate instruction,<br />

good teaching requires one to possess the knowledge, skills and disposition to create meaningful<br />

learning environments.<br />

Good teachers know that scientific research has identified simple truths about connecting<br />

teaching to learning. Effective teachers apply these principles to the learning situation in both<br />

creative and technical ways to ensure that students utilize their capabilities to acquire new<br />

knowledge. Understanding students and communicating effective are two strategies for<br />

effective teaching for all teachers.<br />

Understanding students is a key criterion for teachers to use in the selection and use of the<br />

most appropriate pedagogical content . The student’s cultural background and experiences can<br />

be expanded and used as the foundation to infuse the knowledge base. Good teaching always<br />

conveys to the students ways to build new learning upon previous learning. Good teachers<br />

strive to help students become discerning, critical, and life long learners. Good teachers<br />

employ the students’ cultural context as a means of accomplishing effective communication.<br />

Communication is the transmission of information through a variety of mediums including<br />

lectures/discussions, technology, direct or indirect instruction, and experiences. Good teachers<br />

use effective communication skills to establish expectations for students’ performances. In<br />

addition, effective communication allows teachers to clarify goals, objectives, evaluation criteria,<br />

and outcomes so that the expectations of the teachers are clear to the students. Goals extend the<br />

opportunity to delineate expectations, align curricula, and select appropriate materials, methods,<br />

assignments, and evaluation strategies. Effective teachers of graduate students organize instruction<br />

that will create active learning and collaborative activities to engage students in intellectual<br />

discussions that result in independent learning. Clear articulation of the expectations for courses,<br />

assignments, and experiences sets the foundation to ensure that students accomplish the goals.<br />

Knowledge of the students and effective communication are prerequisites for good teaching.<br />

Outcomes of good teaching include the acquisition of content knowledge, sequenced<br />

instruction, infusion of cultural influences, attention to learning styles, and a viable evaluation<br />

construct. Good teaching ensures that learners have acquired new knowledge, skills, and<br />

dispositions, which have been integrated to reconfigure and expand the knowledge base.<br />

References:<br />

Davis, Barbara (1993). Tools for Teaching. San Francisco, Jossey-Bass Publishers.<br />

McNergney, Robert and Joanne Herbert (2001) Foundations of Education, New York,<br />

Allen Bacon.


The Ten Commandments of Teaching<br />

By Marihelen Glass, Ph.D.<br />

Professor of Horticulture, School of Agricultural<br />

and Environmental Sciences<br />

15<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Good teaching is as much about passion as it is about reason.<br />

Good teaching is about substance and treating students as consumers<br />

of knowledge.<br />

Good teaching is about bridging the gap between theory and practice.<br />

Good teaching is about listening, questioning, being rigid but flexible,<br />

fluid and experimenting, and having the confidence to react and adjust<br />

to changing circumstances.<br />

Good teaching is about style. Should good teaching be entertaining?<br />

Good teaching is about caring, nurturing, and developing minds and talents.<br />

Good teaching is about strong visionary leadership and tangible instruction<br />

support.<br />

Good teaching is about mentoring between senior faculty and junior<br />

faculty, teamwork, and being recognized and promoted by one’s peers.<br />

At the end of the day, good teaching is about having fun, experiencing<br />

pleasure and intrinsic rewards.<br />

GOOD TEACHERS COULD NOT IMAGINE DOING ANYTHING ELSE!<br />

Effective Instruction<br />

By Larry Powers, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Dean and Professor<br />

Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />

School of Education<br />

Many writers indicate that teaching is too often simplified by someone who has the notion<br />

that knowledge alone is the prerequisite for effective instruction. This notion is supported by<br />

the old adage referred to in the question---what do you need to know to teach a horse? The<br />

answer is -- more than the horse! Certainly, good instruction is a complex maze of intentional<br />

acts undergirded by rigorous behavioral science research, instructional planning, assessment of<br />

what the learner already knows, an in-depth knowledge base of the subject, and the utilization<br />

of appropriate methodology (pedagogy). The purpose of this paper is to assist graduate<br />

teaching assistants to become effective instructors in the academy. Therefore, the primary<br />

focus is to assist the graduate assistant with the development of an instructional paradigm<br />

based upon contemporary behavioral science research inclusive of instructional planning,<br />

monitoring student progress, and utilization of effective communication skills.


Instructional Planning<br />

Prior to teaching any university course, the instructor should review the course description in a<br />

current <strong>University</strong> Bulletin. By reviewing the course description the instructor will ensure that<br />

the course syllabus to be distributed to all enrolled students within the first two class meetings<br />

is consistent in content established by the academic department. In developing the syllabus a<br />

primary starting place for the graduate instructor is to decide what he/she wants his/her students<br />

to know. At the very minimum an adequate class syllabus would include: (1) course description<br />

from <strong>University</strong> Bulletin, (2) itemized course objectives, (3) schedule of test dates and course<br />

topics including dates, (4) detailed description of all assignments and the point value for final<br />

grade, (5) description of instructional strategies, (6) required references and or books, and (7)<br />

other specific information students need to know to matriculate through the course in a timely<br />

manner. Once the instructor has determined what he/she wants the students to learn a plan<br />

should be made to facilitate the process. The plan essentially outlines the teaching methodology<br />

to accomplish instructional goals.<br />

Writing behavioral/performance objectives is a major part<br />

of preparing any lesson. There are three domains that<br />

categorize objectives. According to McNergney and<br />

McNergney (2004), behavioral objectives are categorized<br />

as cognitive, affective, and psychomotor. Cognitive<br />

objectives address mental processes and are expressed with<br />

verbs such as identify, write, explain, list, or discuss, etc.<br />

Affective objectives address feelings and are expressed<br />

using terms such as appreciation, love, fear, anxiety,<br />

and/or hate. Psychomotor objectives address physical<br />

movement and are expressed using action verbs such as<br />

lift, jump, run, or walk, etc. The most common behavioral<br />

objective is cognitive. Behavioral objectives when<br />

properly written have three sometimes four components<br />

depending upon the writer.<br />

BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVE COMPONENTS<br />

1. Behavior or outcome – clearly states<br />

what the learner should know or<br />

be able to do.<br />

2. Conditions under which learning will<br />

occur – describe the teaching<br />

technique or learning intervention.<br />

3. Criteria or standard – describes the<br />

level of achievement or the<br />

acceptable performance to mastery.<br />

4. Student or learner may or may not<br />

be indicated – this is the student<br />

or learner.<br />

16<br />

To assist the instructor, an example of each type of objective is provided below.<br />

Cognitive – Given lecture<br />

and group activity the<br />

students will be able to<br />

identify the four components<br />

of a behavioral objective<br />

according McNergney and<br />

McNergney.<br />

Affective – Given group and<br />

individual assignments<br />

students will develop an<br />

appreciation for the food<br />

production system as evidence<br />

by their selection of at least 8<br />

of 10 politically appropriate<br />

responses according to Mager.<br />

Psychomotor – Given<br />

demonstration students will<br />

be to assemble a small<br />

engine according to the 25<br />

specifications in the Briggs<br />

and Stratton Manual (2004).<br />

Instructors need to clarify for themselves what they are attempting to teach students. By<br />

shaping/writing it in the form of a measurable objective they must reflect upon it in a way that<br />

they clarify it for themselves. When the instructor has a plan, monitoring students progress<br />

becomes a strong vehicle to inform the instructional process by letting students know that they<br />

will be held accountable for learning.


Monitoring Student Progress<br />

To ensure that all students perform up to their maximum potential, the instructor must develop<br />

and implement an instructional monitoring system. It is important and plausible to indicate the<br />

details of the instructional monitoring system in the course syllabus. It is not only necessary to<br />

monitor the performance of each student; it is also important to let them know their performances<br />

are constantly being monitored and each student is systematically apprised of his or her progress.<br />

17<br />

This raises a basic question – what do students need to be apprised of in relation to their<br />

performances? The instructor should evaluate, grade, and return all student work by the next class<br />

meeting. When student work is not returned in a timely manner it loses its utility as a positive<br />

impact on the student. Returning student work late also sends the wrong message to the student.<br />

When work is returned late students interpret this as the instructor’s lack of professionalism.<br />

Returning work late reduces the overall impact of its importance. The instructor should<br />

systematically meet with each student at specified intervals during the semester. During these visits<br />

the student should be kept up-to-date on his or her performance and provided substantive feedback<br />

on how he or she can improve. Students should be apprised of their attendance and the extent to<br />

which attendance will impact final grading. The best plan and monitoring system will fail if the<br />

instructor does not have effective oral and written communication skills.<br />

Effective Communication Skills<br />

Effective instructors are good communicators both orally and in written. Instructors tend to focus on<br />

the group; however, effective instructors tend to focus on the individual student. The literature is<br />

clear that we work with groups but we teach individuals. Effective instructors must be able to relate<br />

to the learning of individual students. This means that in order to effectively teach the material<br />

the instructor must be able to make connections with individual students. In other words, learners<br />

must believe/perceive that the instructor is attempting to communicate with them.<br />

Effective instructors are skilled at communicating learning expectation and setting attainable goals<br />

for learners. How can the instructor communicate this perception to the learner? Effective<br />

instructors learn and refer to students by name soon after the class starts. During class sessions the<br />

instructor should frequently call upon students to interact within the context of the subject matter.<br />

When students do not respond correctly to in class questions the instructor should not chastise the<br />

but provide clues and tips to encourage them. Students tend to respond more favorable to positive<br />

reinforcement in class. Effective instructors never use sarcasm or embarrass students.<br />

According to Slavin (2004) “communicating expectations for success and reinforcing success when<br />

it occurs are two of the most important skills a teacher exhibits.” Instructors must communicate in<br />

such a way that they are able to acknowledge student failures in a supportive environment and in<br />

the context of goal setting and improvement. Developing effective communication skills is an<br />

integral part of learning and implementing effective instructional strategies. According to Slavin<br />

(2003) “the link between what the teacher wants students to learn and students’ actual learning is<br />

called instruction or pedagogy.”<br />

Summary<br />

Effective instruction is a complex social, cultural and interpersonal interaction/communication<br />

between the instructor, and learner. The instructor must be an effective planner and be familiar<br />

with instructional strategies that best communicated the pending subject. The instructor must be<br />

able to access what the student already knows and be able to clarify for himself what he is<br />

attempting to teach. The effective instructor is able to motivate students through success and use<br />

failures positively as building blocks for improvement. Effective instructors are able to set learning<br />

objectives and assess when they have been accomplished. The effective instructor has passion for<br />

his subject matter and enjoys working with students.<br />

Additional Resources include:<br />

What Is Good Teaching? By Diane M. Enerson – Linked with permission from The Penn<br />

<strong>State</strong> Teacher II: Learning to Teach; Teaching to Learn, a publication of Schreyer<br />

Institute for Teaching Excellence at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.


Traits of Effective Teaching<br />

By Richard A. Jackson, Ph.D.<br />

Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />

Department of Curriculum and Instruction, School of Education<br />

18<br />

What is an effective teacher? In large measure, we identify effectiveness by input and outcome<br />

measures, along with the performance of students on various testing criteria. We often tend to<br />

generalize student performance as a simple measure of teacher effectiveness. A forceful<br />

argument can be made that the upward change in a students’ performance on an examination<br />

is not the only measure to identify teacher effectiveness.<br />

Some of the traits of a good teacher now being explored as effectiveness measures include:<br />

• Student motivation: Knowing<br />

when and how to intervene. A<br />

teacher must decide whether a<br />

student is off task or misbehaving.<br />

• Use of the principle of least<br />

intervention: When simple or<br />

routine classroom behavior is being<br />

handled, such misbehaviors should<br />

be handled with the simplest, least<br />

intrusive methods of prevention<br />

or correction measures that<br />

will work.<br />

Some practices to avoid include:<br />

• Harsh and humiliating reprimands<br />

that involve very negative verbal<br />

feedback: Teachers sometimes give<br />

harsh reprimands when they have<br />

lost emotional control in response<br />

to misbehavior.<br />

• Threats: A statement that<br />

expresses the intent to punish if<br />

the student does not comply<br />

with the teacher’s wishes.<br />

• Group punishment: This occurs<br />

when the entire class or group is<br />

punished because of the<br />

misbehavior of an individual.<br />

Additional information is available at the following link:<br />

Traits of Effective Teachers<br />

Borrowed with permission from Teaching at The Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>: A<br />

Handbook 2001.<br />

Published by the Office of Faculty and TA Development, The Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>


Although many people believe that good teaching is impossible to define in any general way, a<br />

large body of research suggests that certain characteristics are consistently associated with good<br />

college teaching as viewed by students, other teachers, and administrators. In a study of<br />

winners of the Alumni Distinguished Teaching Award at Ohio <strong>State</strong> (Ebro, 1977), observation<br />

of classes identified the following characteristics of effective teaching, which strongly parallel<br />

those found in other studies:<br />

19<br />

The teachers got right down to<br />

business. They began class promptly<br />

and were well organized.<br />

They taught at an appropriately fast<br />

pace, but stopped regularly to check<br />

student comprehension and<br />

engagement.<br />

They used a variety of instructional<br />

strategies rather than lecture alone.<br />

They focused on the topic and their<br />

instructional objectives and did not<br />

get sidetracked. Their explanations<br />

were clear.<br />

They used humor that was in keeping<br />

with their individual styles.<br />

They practiced good classroom<br />

management techniques, holding the<br />

attention and respect of the group.<br />

They interacted with students by<br />

providing immediate answers to<br />

questions or comments and corrective<br />

feedback when needed. They praised<br />

student answers and used probing<br />

questions to extend the answers.<br />

They provided a warm classroom<br />

climate by allowing students to speak<br />

freely and by including personal<br />

humor or other attempts to relate to<br />

students as people.<br />

They used nonverbal behavior, such<br />

as gestures, walking around, and eye<br />

contact, to reinforce their comments.<br />

Joseph Lowman (1996) describes two main dimensions of effective college teaching that<br />

emerged in his studies: intellectual excitement (enthusiasm, knowledge, inspiration, humor,<br />

interesting view-point, clarity, organization) and interpersonal concern/effective motivation<br />

(concern, caring, availability, friendliness, accessibility, helpfulness, encouragement,<br />

challenge). Other studies (see, for example, Chickering and Gamson, 1991) consistently<br />

identify knowledge of subject matter, organizational skills, enthusiasm, clarity, and interpersonal<br />

skills as marks of the effective teacher. The amount of agreement across studies suggests that<br />

the characteristics of good teaching are not mysterious or extremely discipline-specific. They<br />

can, and have been, identified by researchers, students, and professionals alike. Inspection of<br />

these characteristics fails to support another commonly held belief about teaching:<br />

“Good teachers are born, not made.” While certain characteristics, such as humor and interpersonal<br />

skills, seem to come easily to some people and not others, people are not born with knowledge of a<br />

given discipline or competency in the use of instructional strategies. Furthermore, those who exhibit<br />

these qualities most consistently state that they work hard at attaining them and are very conscious<br />

of their actions and their effects.<br />

These highly conscious teachers are examples of what Donald Schön (1983) has termed the<br />

“reflective practitioner,” the professional who acquires expertise by learning in the action<br />

environment. In a study of Ohio <strong>State</strong> faculty (Chism, 1988), a model of faculty growth in<br />

teaching emerged that suggested that effective teachers develop by maximizing what they learn


through experience. They engage in cycles of learning during which they try a practice,<br />

observe its effects, and decide how and when they will use a similar practice. The process is<br />

often carried on without a great deal of conscious attention and rather unsystematically by<br />

most teachers. What distinguishes those who learn best, however, is the very level of conscious<br />

reflection and the quality of information they bring to bear in determining the effects of a<br />

practice in a particular context. The best teachers know not only what they are doing, but why<br />

it is working and why it is likely to work in one kind of environment and not in another.<br />

Although they may have some natural personality characteristics that support their success,<br />

they also work very hard at their teaching and continually try to improve.<br />

Teaching Styles<br />

Borrowed with permission from Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> Teaching Handbook, Chapter 3.<br />

A number of writers have observed differences in style among teachers. They classify them<br />

according to a number of dimensions that represent how the teachers approach their students,<br />

the ways in which they think learning takes place, and personal strengths and preferences.<br />

Lowman (1996), for example, observes that exemplary college teachers “appear to be those<br />

who are highly proficient in either one of two fundamental sets of skills: the ability to offer<br />

presentations in clearly organized and interesting ways [intellectual excitement] or to relate to<br />

students in ways that communicate positive regard and motivate them to work hard to meet<br />

academic challenges [inter-personal rapport]. All are probably at least completely competent in<br />

both sets of skills but out-standing in one or, occasionally, even both of them” (p. 38). Grasha<br />

(1996) delineates five teaching styles:<br />

20<br />

Expert — is concerned with transmitting information from an expert status; challenges<br />

students to enhance their competence.<br />

Formal Authority — is concerned with the acceptable ways to do things and providing<br />

students with the structure they need to learn.<br />

Personal Model — believes in teaching by personal example; oversees and guides<br />

students to emulate.<br />

Facilitator — emphasizes the personal nature of teacher-student interactions;<br />

guides students toward developing their capacity for independent action.<br />

Delegator — is concerned with developing students’ capacity to function<br />

autonomously; encourages independent projects.<br />

Grasha advocates an “integrated model” of teaching and learning styles, recognizing that<br />

individual teachers will naturally exhibit different styles, but stressing that teachers must<br />

cultivate certain styles so that they can use approaches that are appropriate to the instructional<br />

situations and kind of learners they encounter. For example, he observes that a blend of the<br />

Expert-Formal Authority styles works best with learners who are dependent and less capable<br />

with the content. Grasha advocates that teachers reflect on their stylistic approaches and make<br />

conscious decisions about these. His book, Teaching with Style, provides many exercises for<br />

faculty to use in thinking about styles of teaching.<br />

What Can Graduate Students Do To Be More Effective TAs?<br />

Linked with permission from Washington <strong>University</strong> TA Handbook (See Page 6 of PDF file)<br />

with credit given to the <strong>University</strong> of California at San Diego for providing the original<br />

article from which it was derived.<br />

Additional Resources include:<br />

What Is Good Teaching? By Diane M. Enerson – Linked with permission from The Penn <strong>State</strong><br />

Teacher II: Learning to Teach; Teaching to Learn, a publication of Schreyer Institute<br />

for Teaching Excellence at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.


Modes of Teaching<br />

By Brenda Hall, Ph.D.<br />

Assistant Professor<br />

Department of Human Development and Services,<br />

School of Education<br />

21<br />

Modes of teaching refer to the manner or ways of teaching. It is essential to link the way an<br />

individual teaches to his or her understanding of learning. Students in academic settings must<br />

be encouraged to know how and why to think for themselves, how to make and support<br />

individual judgments, and recognize the vital connection between content and skills<br />

development. Learning is inspired by sentiments of compassion, fairness, and a fervent desire to<br />

gain the intrinsic and pragmatic values of education. It is crucial for students to build this<br />

foundation for the pursuit of knowledge and growth in a world that is changing so quickly and<br />

where career opportunities are becoming more complex.<br />

Modes of teaching must inspire an active exchange of ideas, knowledge, and experiences that<br />

enhances the learning of others and self. Based on this notion, there are several guiding<br />

principles for selecting the ways of teaching. These include:<br />

Knowledge is viewed<br />

as a social construct,<br />

contextual and relative.<br />

Learning occurs<br />

through constructing<br />

knowledge with a<br />

social context or group.<br />

The learning<br />

environment must<br />

be one where students<br />

actively participate,<br />

searching for meaning<br />

and asking questions.<br />

Learning is<br />

developmental,<br />

interactive.<br />

Learning is student<br />

centered, uses prior<br />

knowledge and<br />

capitalizes on context.<br />

Teaching assistants can provide students with experiences that help them to rethink their<br />

existing ideas, knowledge bases, and skills, creating new skills, and developing their full<br />

potential. Specifically in the classroom this requires that teachers create an interactive<br />

environment, promote an exchange of a wide variety of information (theory, concepts, ideas,<br />

research, experiences) and encourage ownership and application of content. In addition to<br />

lecture other specific modes of teaching include:<br />

Collaborative learning groups - The key concept in the collaborative learning group is<br />

“shared responsibility.” This is a version of small group work but the major difference is that all<br />

members of the group must contribute equally and most of the work is done in class, following<br />

specific instructions. The collaborative groups are designed so that students must integrate<br />

their work and function as a team.<br />

Research projects - These can be assigned individually or as a large class project. By involving<br />

the entire class in a project and working through the research process, students can take<br />

ownership and have a “hands-on” experience regarding research. It is useful to have an end<br />

result such as a workshop or research presentation so that students can share their data and<br />

results with another audience.<br />

Case study - This mode of teaching requires application of content to specific experience.<br />

Students are expected to apply understanding of theories and concepts to a practical situation.<br />

These are particularly helpful for those classes related to professional training programs.<br />

Concept checks - These are a series of assignments designed to facilitate student learning,<br />

especially as it relates to reading assignments. A variety of formats can be used. Students may<br />

be asked to respond to specific questions, locate and summarize related research, identify and<br />

critique web-sites. It is a good way to ensure students are comprehending the readings.


Large/small group discussion - One way to implement these modes of teaching is to have<br />

students responsible for leading a discussion. The instructor can model appropriate ways to<br />

present information and involve the students in discussion. These discussions can be facilitated<br />

by individuals or by small groups.<br />

22<br />

These modes of teaching allow for connections among theoretical, conceptual, and practical<br />

learning. Students exposed to a variety of teaching modes help to create a supportive, positive<br />

learning environment.<br />

Additional Resources on Teaching Modes includes:<br />

Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> Teaching Handbook - Linked with permission from Ohio <strong>State</strong><br />

<strong>University</strong>. Topics covered include:<br />

◆ Active Learning<br />

◆ Leading and Managing Discussions<br />

◆ Lecturing<br />

◆ Building Rapport<br />

◆ Student Feedback<br />

◆ Creating Closure<br />

Dimensions of Effective Teaching<br />

By Richard A. Jackson, Ph.D.<br />

Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />

Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />

School of Education<br />

There are many elements to consider if one is to be an effective teacher. These include:<br />

• Planning and goal setting – What are the goals of the course, class, or lesson to be taught?<br />

•Teaching or classroom environment – What is the structure of the teaching environment?<br />

Is it one dimensional and multi-dimensional? Are there various delivery systems and<br />

instructional methods available, or is the instructor limited to traditional lecture and<br />

demonstration?<br />

• Cultural considerations – Are there cultural elements that need to be considered? Is the<br />

classroom a multicultural or single cultural environment? Are the students functioning in<br />

their native language or are they learning a second language? Can the students relate the<br />

lessons being taught to their own backgrounds and experiences?<br />

• Classroom management – Are there basic classroom management issues that need to be<br />

considered? Student discipline issues, cultural values, and religious backgrounds all can<br />

impact successful classroom management.<br />

• Student motivation and interest retention – What techniques will be employed to develop<br />

and maintain student interest in the subject matter and motivate student learning?<br />

Additional information is available at the following link:<br />

Effective Teaching - Linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of Georgia TA Handbook.


Teaching Methods and Active Learning<br />

By Jane Davis-Seaver, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />

School of Education<br />

23<br />

Perhaps the most effective teaching method is the hands-on approach that requires students to<br />

become actively involved in the learning process. This is easy to accomplish in a lab setting, or<br />

an art, music or physical education setting. These disciplines are inherently hands-on.<br />

It can also be accomplished in lecture classes however, by doing one or all of several things.<br />

First, you can begin the class by asking a question, then dividing the class into small groups for<br />

a short discussion. One person from each group can summarize the conversation of his or her<br />

group, and when you begin your lecture, the students are already actively involved. A second<br />

method for actively involving students in a lecture is to punctuate your lecture with timely<br />

questions and call on several students to respond to each one, (not just one student per<br />

question). A third method is known as the call and response wherein students actively enter<br />

the lecture itself by repeating or responding in a repetitive way to your comments. For<br />

example, if you are reviewing the characteristics of a butterfly and comparing them to a moth,<br />

you can ask “Does a butterfly fly at night?” and all the students can respond “No!” You can say<br />

“Does a moth fly at night?” and the students can respond “Yes!” You should break this pattern<br />

from time to time, however, to make sure that the students are actually listening to your<br />

questions.<br />

Another way to do this is to start a sentence and have one or several students finish it for you.<br />

Grouping students within the class for discussion of topics brought up in your lecture while you<br />

walk around and listen to the conversation is an effective way of checking to see if they<br />

understood what you have said to them.<br />

The lecture method of teaching can be enhanced by the effective use of technology. A lively<br />

and colorful PowerPoint presentation can help students think through difficult material.<br />

However, the instructor should be careful not to read the slides to the students but to add to<br />

and explain the information on the slides. It is also helpful for students to have individual<br />

copies of the outline form of the presentation to take notes on. That way they can pay more<br />

attention to what you are saying instead of trying to copy the slides. Short videos, DVD’s<br />

or other visuals that accompany your lecture should enhance, not replace, your role as<br />

the instructor.<br />

Whatever method you choose,<br />

adequate and careful preparation<br />

is vital. All materials should be<br />

prepared ahead of time and be<br />

readily available. All technology<br />

should be ready and on standby<br />

when class begins, and you should<br />

be present when students come<br />

into class. Not all surprises can be<br />

anticipated, but careful and<br />

thorough groundwork can<br />

eliminate most of them. When<br />

you are well-prepared, you can<br />

then be enthusiastic about your<br />

topic and students will have<br />

confidence in your knowledge<br />

and ability as an instructor.<br />

Additional information on teaching methods and<br />

strategies can be found at the following links:<br />

In the Classroom - Linked with permission from John<br />

Hopkins <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Alternative Strategies and Active Learning - Linked with<br />

permission from “Teaching at <strong>Carolina</strong>,” a publication of<br />

the <strong>University</strong> of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> at Chapel Hill.


Tying Teaching Methods to Objectives<br />

By Dawn C. Waegerle, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />

School of Education<br />

24<br />

One of the most difficult things a teacher must do is to make learning mean something, not<br />

just for a test, but for use later in life. Knowledge itself is the outcome of learning, but general<br />

knowledge built on rote, short term memory, fades quickly and may not be used to facilitate<br />

later learning. There are a number of models that teachers use to help bring sense to their<br />

instruction. One is a revised Bloom’s Taxonomy of Learning, which ascribes levels of learning<br />

to cognitive processes. The link below will take you to a web-site that explains the concept<br />

more fully.<br />

http://faculty.washington.edu/krumme/guides/bloom.html<br />

Evaluation<br />

Synthesis<br />

Analysis<br />

Application<br />

Understanding<br />

Knowledge<br />

Another philosophical approach comes from Constructivist approaches where teachers and<br />

students plan and make decisions about content, activities and approaches to learning content.<br />

No one of these theoretical approaches is the right one to use all the time with all content.<br />

Some work better than others viewing the students, their needs, and the learning that<br />

must occur.<br />

Each of these approaches does present an opportunity for the teacher and the learner to<br />

develop a depth of learning and understanding that takes them beyond pure memory. The<br />

teacher that can cause “big picture” learning to happen, is the most effective teacher.<br />

In order to determine which of these teaching models to follow based on the course objectives,<br />

teachers must think about what the objectives describe and then determine the best way to<br />

present the content. They must think about who the potential students are that will be taking<br />

the class. The prior experiences and knowledge that they bring to the desk have a great deal<br />

to do with the instructional choices made. Try to design the course around the needs of the<br />

students. What are the students like and what do they know? Are they traditional age students<br />

or adult learners? Individuals of different ages have different learning styles and needs. All of<br />

this requires thought and planning. It is best to try to make your teaching flexible to meet the<br />

needs of the learners, the setting, the number of students in your class, and the primary<br />

purposes of the lesson.<br />

Rosenshine has given us Six Teaching Functions. (Rosenshine, 1988). These functions give a<br />

skeletal guideline for effective instruction, particularly for content that lends itself to more<br />

direct instruction.


Teaching Functions:<br />

Review and check previous lesson’s work and<br />

check to see that students understood<br />

content prior to moving to the next concept.<br />

Provide for guided practice, where the<br />

students can demonstrate what they are<br />

learning or understanding from the lesson.<br />

25<br />

Present new material, making sure to tell the<br />

students what will be taught. In other words,<br />

describe and review the objectives for the<br />

lesson, then teach in small steps,<br />

providing examples.<br />

Give feedback and correctives as needed.<br />

Provide independent practice, where<br />

students can demonstrate what they know.<br />

Review as needed to tie new learning to<br />

old knowledge.<br />

Constructivist models lend themselves to inquiry learning, cooperative grouping, instructional<br />

conversations, and cognitive apprenticeships. This form of instruction is based on social<br />

cognitive theories of learning. Observational learning is one of the ways that this constructivist<br />

approach uses this technique. Through observational learning, we learn how to perform<br />

behaviors. This requires attention, retention, production, motivation and reinforcement.<br />

Some common elements of<br />

constructivist perspectives<br />

include the beliefs that the<br />

learning environment<br />

presents:<br />

• Complex, challenging, environments and authentic tasks<br />

• Social negotiation and shared responsibility as a part of learning<br />

• Multiple representations of content<br />

• The understanding that knowledge is constructed<br />

• Student-centered instruction (Driscoll, 1994)<br />

The teaching approach used can be effective if it is matched to the needs of the learner and<br />

the content to be taught. As a teacher develops lessons and teaching strategies tied to objectives,<br />

thought must be given to the types of materials and content used for teaching enhancement.<br />

These materials must:<br />

Be appropriate for defined objectives.<br />

Provide adequate instruction for required<br />

skills.<br />

Be sequenced logically and chunked<br />

meaningfully.<br />

Be clear and understandable.<br />

It is important to remember what teaching strategies worked well when you were a student,<br />

but don’t design your teaching strategy solely on the style of learning you prefer. Thought and<br />

reflection prior to instruction will help create learning environments that work for most<br />

students and give the teacher the satisfaction of a class well taught.<br />

Additional information can be found at the following link:<br />

The Penn <strong>State</strong> Teacher II: Learning to Teach; Teaching to Learn, a publication of Schreyer<br />

Institute for Teaching Excellence at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> (linked with permission):<br />

Articles to select from include: (click on links below)<br />

Be relevant to learners' needs.<br />

Use media and technology that encourages<br />

efficient management.<br />

Allow adequate opportunity for practice<br />

and constructive feedback.<br />

Provide relevant assessment tied<br />

to performance objectives.<br />

• Teaching with the Lecture Method - Effective Explanations--John P. Lowe<br />

• Teaching with Collaborative Activities and Small Groups<br />

• Preparing Effective Collaborative Activities<br />

• The Process and Product of Collaborative Activities or Three Men and an Egg<br />

• Commonly Asked Questions about Teaching Collaborative Activities


Classroom Situations To Consider<br />

By Judie Bucholz, Ph.D.<br />

Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />

Department of Human Development and Services,<br />

School of Education<br />

26<br />

1. Be Professional. You are no longer a student and will command more respect from the<br />

students if you dress in professional attire and carry yourself as a professional. You should not<br />

hang out with the students at the wall or the plot or go to parties where your students might<br />

be. Your language should be professional and not heavy in slang. Keep your biases in check.<br />

2. Be Prepared. Students will know if you know the material or if you’re bluffing. Do your<br />

homework and prepare for the classes in advance. If you don’t know the answers to questions<br />

the student’s pose, let them know you’ll find the answers and get back to them and be sure<br />

you do.<br />

3. Use Various Forms of Course Delivery. Students learn in many ways. Lecture is not the<br />

only method of course delivery. Use technology in the classroom and encourage the students<br />

to use it as well. Many times the publisher of the text will provide PowerPoint slide<br />

presentations to compliment the course, some have videos available, and others have<br />

web-sites available to the students for other learning activities. Ask your advisor about the<br />

options in the course you are teaching.<br />

4. Absenteeism. It is not unusual for students to skip a class here and there. An attendance<br />

policy clearly stated in the syllabus will eliminate many issues associated with attendance.<br />

Students should be informed how their grade will be affected by attendance. Consistent<br />

application of the policy and reminders of the policy will reinforce the standards.<br />

5. Plagiarism. Plagiarism is not tolerated by any institution of higher learning. Some students<br />

may not understand what constitutes plagiarism and may need to be reminded of the proper<br />

procedures for citing another person’s work.<br />

6. Textbooks. Some students try to get through a course without buying a textbook. The<br />

importance of the text to the student’s successful passing of the class should be emphasized<br />

early in the course. There are a variety of sources on the web and in the local area that sell<br />

textbooks, new and used, some even cheaper than the bookstore. Cost and availability should<br />

not be prohibitive factors in getting a textbook. Remind the students of their options as well<br />

as responsibilities.<br />

7. Inadequate Writing Skills. Students without adequate writing skills should be referred to the<br />

Center for Student Success or Student Services as soon as possible.<br />

8. Disruptive Students. Swift action sets the tone that disruption will not be tolerated. If a<br />

student becomes disruptive and will not listen to you, report him or her to your advisor. An<br />

altercation in the classroom will undermine your position and authority. Let the advisor<br />

handle the situation.<br />

9. Personal Issues. Some students think the classroom is a place to vent their personal issues.<br />

Rather than allow a student’s personal issues to overwhelm a class, students should be referred<br />

to agencies appropriate for the issue e.g., counseling center, financial aid, registrar’s office,<br />

etc. When a student is venting, ask him or her to speak to you after class and make the<br />

referral. Be careful how you shut the student down. Do it tactfully and appropriately. Do not<br />

join in when a student is criticizing or displaying negativism. You will lose the respect from<br />

the students.


10. Tardiness. It is the student’s responsibility to report to class on time, allowing time for<br />

parking, traffic and other issues. Coming to class late is an unnecessary disruption. A clear<br />

statement on tardiness should be in the syllabus and the consequences enforced fairly and<br />

equitably. You as the Teaching Assistant should not be late for class. In fact, early is better.<br />

When you cannot avoid being late, notify someone who is able to notify the class before it<br />

starts. You do not want to give the students the impression you do not care about the class or<br />

about them.<br />

27<br />

For additional information:<br />

Common Teaching Situations: Teaching and Learning @ UW - Linked with permission from<br />

Teaching and Learning at The <strong>University</strong> of Washington, a publication of The<br />

<strong>University</strong> of Washington.<br />

Articles to select from this section include: (click on links below)<br />

Presenting Information<br />

Tutoring<br />

Leading Discussions<br />

Critiquing Student Projects<br />

Conducting Labs<br />

Teaching Problem Solving<br />

Teaching Foreign Languages<br />

Student Writing<br />

Leading Quiz Sections


SECTION IV<br />

28<br />

Orientation at N.C. A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

Getting Started<br />

By A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams,<br />

Assistant Dean<br />

School of Graduate Studies<br />

At the beginning of each semester, the School of Graduate Studies presents an orientation and<br />

training session for all graduate students who have either applied for or were offered a teaching<br />

assistantship. As mandated by the <strong>State</strong> of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> General Administration, all<br />

departments hiring graduate assistants are required to have their graduate assistants attend the<br />

orientation and training sessions provided by School of Graduate Studies prior to the first day<br />

of class.<br />

In addition to the orientation and training program, your academic departments may<br />

supplement these training efforts with such activities as laboratory safety orientation, faculty<br />

mentoring, weekly colloquium sessions dealing with teaching techniques, learning styles,<br />

technical topics, and required courses. Other departments require teaching assistants to<br />

participate in an initial orientation session with the course faculty. These sessions acquaint<br />

the teaching assistants with faculty expectations, grading standards, and specific methods of<br />

laboratory instructional delivery. Some departments require their students to take a teaching<br />

methodology class as well as a course in class management prior to becoming a GTA.<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistants in the English department are required to take English 770,<br />

which is a seminar, designed for student presentations and discussion.<br />

Funding to supplement the cost of the GTA Orientation Program is provided by the National<br />

Science Foundation Student Transition and Retention Program (STAR) as part of its mission<br />

to recruit, retain and prepare the next generation of under represented minority professors in<br />

the sciences, mathematics, engineering and technology.<br />

The workshop consists of two half-day segments and focuses on topics such as Duties and<br />

Responsibilities; Compensation; Effective Teaching; Roles and Expectations, Performance<br />

Evaluation; Classroom Management and Diversity, Professional Portfolio Development and<br />

Professional Ethics.<br />

Please click on link to view a sample current and previous training program information.<br />

http://www.ncat.edu/~gradsch/orientation.htm


Planning Ahead of Time<br />

Checklist for Teaching<br />

Getting off to a good start requires planning ahead. Well before the semester begins, check<br />

with the supervising professor in charge of the course to confirm or clarify expectations for<br />

your role(s) in the course.<br />

The following list will give you some ideas about what you may want to ask people in your<br />

department before the first day of class:<br />

Questions to ask the department chair or graduate coordinator<br />

• Terms of your contract written in the letter of intent: What are the possible duties? Do I<br />

have a choice of courses to GTA for? What is the usual length of time to serve as a GTA?<br />

Are there limits on the number of semesters I can be employed as a GTA? Is there a<br />

reapplication to be a GTA each year or is my GTA appointment automatically renewed?<br />

• Office space and facilities: Do I have a choice of office space? What facilities and supplies<br />

(telephone, computer, photocopier, or other job supplies) are provided?<br />

• Employment opportunities: Are there summer GTA opportunities? Is it possible to hold<br />

another part-time job at the same time as the assistantship? What other means of<br />

financial support are available within the department?<br />

• Training for new GTAs: Does my department offer orientation or training for new GTAs?<br />

Is the <strong>University</strong> Teaching Seminar in August required? Who coordinates the GTAs?<br />

Who supervises my course?<br />

• Evaluation process of GTA’s performance: Is my teaching observed and assessed by faculty<br />

or lead-GTAs? Do I have access to the results of my evaluation? Are written performance<br />

standards available? Is the student evaluation form available for my information? When<br />

are student evaluations given during the semester?<br />

Questions to ask the course supervisor<br />

• Goals of the course: Are there course prerequisites? What are the course learning<br />

outcomes? What is the level and range of abilities of typical students? What are the<br />

expectations for student performance?<br />

• GTA Structure: Is my section a highly structured course with each GTA required to cover<br />

the same information and give the same tests, or is there more latitude in determining<br />

the material?<br />

• Course/Meetings: What is the place and time the class meets? Are GTAs expected to<br />

attend lectures?<br />

• Specifics of your section, lab, or other duties: What are my responsibilities for preparing<br />

lectures? Evaluating student work? Getting or creating quizzes, tests, and assignments? In<br />

general, how much time will these responsibilities take?<br />

• Course policies and materials: Is there an attendance policy? Plagiarism policy?<br />

Disabilities policy? What is the department procedure for handling student requests to<br />

drop or add the course? Getting the class list? Getting or creating a course and/or section<br />

syllabus? What are some first day activities? How do I post grades? How do lab or<br />

recitation grades contribute to the students’ course grades? Are there assigned textbooks<br />

and readings? Does the course have a web page?<br />

• Department procedures: What are department procedures when I am sick or have<br />

another necessary absence? What is appropriate dress when teaching?<br />

29


Questions to ask experienced GTAs in your department<br />

• Role GTAs play in the life of the department: Are we required to attend faculty meetings? Serve on<br />

committees? Socialize? What are the means of information about departmental policies and activities?<br />

Getting things done in the department, e.g., copying, getting coffee, selecting a major professor?<br />

• Amount of departmental guidance and support for GTAs: Are there weekly GTA meetings? Do we<br />

attend course lectures? Are mentors available?<br />

• Approximate amount of time a GTA spends: How much time will I spend preparing for class? Meeting<br />

with students during office hours? Grading papers and tests?<br />

• Experiences other GTAs have had with the course you will GTA: Is this a difficult course for<br />

undergraduates? On what areas of the course do they need the most help? What are students’<br />

attitudes towards class?<br />

Planning Ahead of Time<br />

Getting off to a good start requires planning ahead. Well before the semester begins, check with the<br />

supervising professor in charge of the course to confirm or clarify expectations for your role(s) in the course.<br />

Once you are clear about your teaching roles and responsibilities, here are the next things to think<br />

about as you prepare to teach:<br />

Goals<br />

Whether you are planning a ten-week course, a fifty-minute section<br />

meeting, or a twenty-minute office hour, it will help you and your<br />

students if you think about your teaching and learning goals. For any<br />

of these interactions with students, plan ahead by asking yourself:<br />

For example, as a lab assistant your goal might be to have students<br />

solve problems for themselves. With this goal, your task is to design<br />

What do I want students to learn?<br />

What challenges to learning are<br />

students likely to face?<br />

How can I help students meet<br />

those challenges?<br />

How will I be able to tell<br />

what they have learned?<br />

activities that will lead students to take appropriate independent steps with an experiment rather than<br />

relying solely on step-by-step instructions in the lab manual.<br />

You can anticipate that students who have previously worked only with carefully prescribed lab procedures<br />

may have some difficulty working in the lab more independently. Therefore, you should provide them with<br />

guidelines for making decisions as they work through the lab, and monitor students’ decision-making in their<br />

lab groups in order to assess their progress.<br />

You will need to decide in advance how to determine the effectiveness of these activities in helping students<br />

to solve problems on their own. For example, will it be apparent from their lab write-up? Or will you need to<br />

have students document their decision-making process separately from the lab manual, so you can judge their<br />

problem-solving process in addition to the final results of the<br />

experiment?<br />

The Syllabus<br />

The value and utility of a good syllabus should not be underestimated. The time you spend planning the<br />

course and writing a syllabus will have far-reaching and time-saving benefits throughout the semester. A good<br />

syllabus will answer many of your students’ questions about your expectations, your role in the course, and<br />

their responsibilities. Typically the syllabus includes information on learning goals, course content and<br />

materials, a timetable for class meetings (including reading, assignments, due dates, examination dates, etc.),<br />

and evaluation procedures. The supervising professor generally develops the syllabus; however, you may be<br />

involved in the process.<br />

If you are teaching quiz sections or labs, you may not be involved with development of the syllabus for the<br />

course as a whole, but students will appreciate receiving a syllabus providing information for the portion of<br />

the course that they have with you. In your section or lab syllabus, provide clear and specific information<br />

about policies and expectations (for example, participation, plagiarism, make-up examinations, absences, late<br />

assignments, incompletes, and extra credit). Include your office location and hours so students know where<br />

and when to find you. You may also find it useful to offer "online "office hours, so students know your policies<br />

and timelines for responding to their e-mail messages.<br />

For more information on how to develop a course syllabus, click on this link borrowed from Pennsylvania<br />

<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

30


Classroom Guidelines<br />

Many of the classroom policies you develop to manage your classroom have the potential to affect<br />

students’ grades. When developing policies, first check with your department or supervising<br />

professor to determine if there are set rules to which you must adhere. Whether you use<br />

departmental policies or create your own after talking with experienced GAs and professors, be sure<br />

to clearly state your policies on your course syllabus. In all cases, you are required to make clear at<br />

the beginning of the term exactly what elements will be evaluated. It is not appropriate, for<br />

example, to include classroom participation in your final evaluation if your students have not been<br />

advised of this requirement. When developing classroom rules, keep in mind that it is always easier<br />

to loosen up tight policies than to introduce stricter policies midway through the semester.<br />

Attendance<br />

Students are expected to attend class meetings as scheduled. As an instructor, you decide how to<br />

evaluate attendance in determining students’ grades. Before doing so, check to see if your<br />

department has a policy regarding attendance. Excuses for absence from class are handled<br />

you and the student, and you may refuse a student’s request that an absence be excused or require<br />

the student to submit proof of absence (e.g., a doctor’s note).<br />

Late Assignments<br />

Accepting late assignments with no penalty is unfair to students who meet the deadline and have<br />

less time to perfect their work. To discourage late work, establish clear consequences for late<br />

assignments and discuss those consequences with the students at the beginning of the term. For<br />

instance, you may lower the grade on a late paper so much per calendar day, or you may add extra<br />

requirements to late papers. You may also establish a point (e.g., one week; once the next<br />

assignment is due) after which you will no longer accept late work. If your supervisor does not<br />

already have a policy in place for late work, talk with experienced GAs about their policies.<br />

Cheating<br />

The university has an established system for dealing with those who violate its conduct regulations.<br />

If you become involved in such a case, you should contact your supervising professor for assistance<br />

in handling the situation.<br />

31<br />

It is wise to find out before you give exams or start receiving students’ work just how your<br />

supervising professor would like you to handle instances of academic dishonesty. Often the professor<br />

will wish to take the leading role in dealing with any problems that arise, and he or she should be<br />

able to assess whether the incident should be reported to the Dean.<br />

If you are proctoring an exam and notice that a student is using unauthorized reference material or<br />

copying from a neighbor, you should attempt to halt that activity at that point or note the students<br />

involved and handle the matter after the exam ends.<br />

Plagiarism<br />

If you receive term papers or reports that you suspect are plagiarized (i.e., copied in whole or in part<br />

from some other author), you should make a reasonable effort to identify the source of the copied<br />

material before discussing your suspicions with the student. In some cases, you will find that the<br />

student does not understand the distinction between appropriate use of sources and outright<br />

plagiarism. Often your counseling and guidance can help you resolve the issue with the student.<br />

If after speaking with the student, you believe he or she has knowingly plagiarized all or part of the<br />

assignment, you must follow university procedures in dealing with the student. Although this is an<br />

unpleasant business, it is unfair to the students in the class who have done their work honestly to<br />

allow others to get away with cheating.


The best way to avoid plagiarism, however, is to prevent it. Below are some suggestions for<br />

preventing plagiarism in your classroom:<br />

<br />

When giving a writing assignment, discuss plagiarism and its consequences.<br />

To help those students who simply do not understand plagiarism (e.g., they<br />

think it only means copying an entire paper or section word-for-word; they<br />

come from a culture that has a different attitude toward using the words/ideas<br />

of others), provide examples of various types of "borrowing" and discuss<br />

whether each is plagiarism.<br />

32<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

When developing a major assignment, include several steps along the way so<br />

students have to work on the assignment early and turn something in to you<br />

on specific dates. For example, if you want them to write a term paper or create<br />

a poster on a topic of their choice, you could also include another two steps,<br />

such as a project proposal and an outline of their projects. This strategy<br />

minimizes procrastination and gives you a chance to see what the students<br />

are working on and guide them a little. Because of time limitations and<br />

fairness, you have to be careful to limit the scope of the feedback and give<br />

the same amount to all class members.<br />

Make it clear in the assignment instructions that you expect students to hand<br />

in all their preliminary workings together with the final draft of their project:<br />

their notes, doodlings, outlines, web and library printouts, preliminary computer<br />

drafts with notes and crossings out, etc. This material itself will not be graded,<br />

but will show the path the project took and demonstrate that the complete<br />

project was thought through and created rather than being downloaded whole<br />

from the web. Remind the students several times not to throw away their<br />

preliminary notes and drafts. Do not accept assignments that have almost<br />

no preliminary workings, and check that what is submitted relates to the<br />

final draft.<br />

Alter assignments from one semester to the next to decrease the likelihood<br />

that students will borrow papers from others who took the course in<br />

previous semesters.<br />

Make assignments specific to your course. For example, rather<br />

than asking students to write a paper on Stephen Jay Gould’s<br />

contributions to the field of science, ask them to write<br />

about how Gould’s book The Structure of Evolutionary<br />

Biology supports or conflicts with the principles discussed<br />

in your class.<br />

Additional Resources on Preventing Plagiarism:<br />

Can We Solve the Problem of Plagiarism? –linked from EXCHANGE, a collaborative<br />

publication of the following partners:<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

The National Co-ordination Team (NCT)<br />

The Learning and Teaching Suppor Network (LTSN)<br />

The Institute for Learning and Teaching (ILT)<br />

The Joint Information Systems Committee (JISC)


Graduate Teaching Assistants As Writing Teachers<br />

Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of California at Santa Barbara,<br />

Office of Instructional Development.<br />

33<br />

Recommended Reading on Teaching Writing Skills:<br />

Elbow, P. Writing Without Teachers. New York: Oxford <strong>University</strong> Press, 1973.<br />

Fader, D. N., with Duggins, J., Fenn, T., and McNeil, E. The New Hooked on Books. New York:<br />

Berkeley Medallion Corporation, 1976.<br />

Fader, D. N., and McNeil, E. B. Hooked on Books: Program and Proof. New York: Berkeley<br />

Medallion Corporation, 1970.<br />

Holt, J. “How Teachers Make Children Hate Reading”. The Norton Reader, Eastman, A. M., et al.<br />

(Eds.). New York: W. W. Norton and Co., Inc., 1977, pp. 189-198.<br />

Marcus, S. “Teaching Editing in Composition Classes: A Somewhat Confluent Approach”.<br />

California English, 1978, October, Vol. 14, No. 5, pp. 4-5.<br />

On-line Resources on Including Writing Across Disciplines:<br />

Including Writing in Instruction linked with permission from The Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Click on link and go to Chapter 5, pages 11-12 of PDF file.<br />

Writing Across the Curriculum linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of Wisconsin –<br />

Madison.<br />

Writing to Learn by Professor Erika Lindemann, as part of the monograph series “For Your<br />

Consideration,” published on-line by the <strong>University</strong> of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> at Chapel Hill.<br />

Establishing the Classroom Climate<br />

By Kimberly Richards, Ph.D.<br />

Department of Human Development and Services,<br />

School of Education<br />

Setting a positive classroom climate is perhaps the most important aspect of the teaching<br />

process. Though climate or tone is conveyed from the first day of class and is important to<br />

develop this tone over the first few class meetings, maintaining the classroom climate is a<br />

consideration for the instructor throughout the period of the course.<br />

A positive classroom climate develops when instructors construct environments where all<br />

students are respected, given equal consideration, dealt with fairly, and have equal opportunity<br />

to understand and develop mastery of course subject matter. Humanistic environments<br />

cultivate a positive emotional atmosphere so students are able to develop a sense of connection,<br />

inquisitiveness, empowerment, and scholarly excitement. Inclusive environments are vital as<br />

well as learning will increase when students feel appreciated, safe, supported, and encouraged.<br />

Some tips for establishing a positive classroom environment are provided below.<br />

Get to Know Your Students<br />

Students are more likely to behave respectfully and learn more readily when the teacher has a<br />

genuine interest in their students. Students can be asked the first day of class to write their<br />

names, details, such as phone number and e-mail address, and professional goals/interests, or<br />

even a short autobiography. The instructor can refer to this information throughout the term.<br />

If class size permits, have students introduce themselves verbally.


Communicate Interpersonal Sensitivity<br />

You may have more positive experiences with students as you become aware of issues affecting<br />

students of various backgrounds. Instructors that are warm, empathetic, respect the students,<br />

and enthusiastic are likely to motivate students and build positive relationship with their<br />

students. Even if students demonstrate negative emotions, it is important for instructors to still<br />

exhibit warmth, respect, and empathy.<br />

Allow for Student Input into Course Framework<br />

Student input into the formulation of the class framework maximizes the chance that they will<br />

perceive the course as pertinent and valuable.<br />

Use a Variety of Instructional Strategies<br />

Students in your classes will have an array of learning styles. Develop a full repertoire of<br />

instructional strategies so you can reach as many students as possible and enhance the learning<br />

process of the students.<br />

Promote and Provide Multicultural Viewpoints on Issues and Experiences<br />

By presenting views and materials from a variety of perspectives you can promote a multitude<br />

of viewpoints on issues and experiences for your students. For example, if the topic is<br />

“Epistemology,” the content should include various ways of knowing/epistemological experiences,<br />

that is Euro-American, African-American, Native-American, and Asian-American ways of<br />

knowing can be included in the discussion and included with equal importance. It would also<br />

be important to include for example, the experiences and views of people with different<br />

socio-economic and gender statuses.<br />

Have High Student Expectations<br />

The instructor should have high expectations for all students, not just students from particular<br />

membership groups.<br />

Provide all Students the Opportunity to Participate<br />

Develop a system to ensure that all students are called on or provided with opportunities to<br />

participate if they wish to do so.<br />

34<br />

References:<br />

Sandler, B., Silverberg, L. & Hall, R. (1996). The Chilly Classroom Climate: A Guide to Improve<br />

the Education of Women. National Association for Women in Education.<br />

Saunders, S. & Diana Kardia. (2002). Classroom Climate For Graduate Teaching Assistants.<br />

Center for Research on Learning and Teaching. <strong>University</strong> of Michigan, Ann Arbor.<br />

Tulane <strong>University</strong>. (2000). Teaching Resource Manual. Teaching Enrichment Program New<br />

Orleans, LA 2000.<br />

Wright, J. (2002). Teacher Tips for Managing Group Behaviors. Intervention Central.<br />

Additional Resources on Classroom Climates:<br />

In the Classroom - Linked with permission from John Hopkins <strong>University</strong>. (Click on link<br />

above and scroll down to section titled “Establish A Classroom Climate.”)


Course Planning and Design<br />

By Paul Ankomah, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Department of Human Performance and Leisure Studies,<br />

School of Education<br />

35<br />

Course Planning: This stage involves identifying potential sources of information and the<br />

types of information to be collected from each source. Potential information sources include:<br />

the <strong>University</strong> Bulletin, the College/School, Department, Faculty, Students, Professional<br />

Associations, Practitioners/Employers, etc.<br />

1. <strong>University</strong> Bulletin: You may obtain information on the<br />

resources available to both students and faculty and how<br />

to access these resources.<br />

2. College/School: From this source, you will gather<br />

information on the conceptual framework that guides all<br />

departments and programs within this unit. Also from this<br />

source, you will obtain information on accreditation<br />

standards and other requirements established by some<br />

education governing bodies. Information from this source<br />

is very critical in the course design phase. For instance, in<br />

the School of Education, the conceptual framework<br />

guiding all departments and programs is referred to as<br />

DART (Diversity, Assessment, Reflection and<br />

Technology). Your course design should be guided and<br />

reflected by the conceptual framework of your particular<br />

College/School.<br />

3. Department: From your department, you may obtain<br />

information about individual or specific program<br />

accreditation requirements and standards, certifications,<br />

pre-requisites, available resources, etc.<br />

4. Faculty: Faculty, especially those who have taught the<br />

course before you, may be an excellent source of<br />

information for course planning. Such individuals can<br />

share with you their personal experiences and also provide<br />

you with suggestions and ideas on how to structure the<br />

course, recommendations on textbooks and actual copies<br />

of course syllabi. Faculty interactions should not be<br />

restricted to only those that have previously taught the<br />

course. They should be extended to include faculty in your<br />

department/college/university teaching different courses<br />

and faculty from other universities teaching similar<br />

courses. Views and advice form such diverse sources will<br />

greatly enhance your course.<br />

5. Professional Organizations (including Accreditation and<br />

Certification)/Practitioners/Journals: From professional<br />

organizations you will learn about specific standards and<br />

expectations required of your students. Practitioners/<br />

potential employers will provide you with an overview and<br />

information on expected skills required of potential and<br />

future employees. Journals will help identify the current<br />

state of the literature and knowledge in the area.<br />

Cumulatively, all these sources enhance your ability to<br />

structure and design a course that is relevant, up-to-date,<br />

stimulating and comprehensive.<br />

Course Design:<br />

This stage entails creating the<br />

course syllabus. You will need to<br />

decide upon the components of<br />

the syllabus. The components<br />

may comprise of:<br />

1. Goals for the course.<br />

2. Specific Learning Objectives:<br />

These refer to the desired learning<br />

outcomes.<br />

3. Activities to be used:<br />

Refer to activities that you will use to<br />

facilitate student learning. Examples<br />

include, lectures, guest speakers,<br />

role-playing, student presentations<br />

(individual/groups), course projects,<br />

discussions, seminars, field trips,<br />

interviews, etc. It is important to use<br />

different activities and strategies for<br />

instructional delivery because of the<br />

different learning styles of students.<br />

4. Assessment:<br />

The purpose is to demonstrate that<br />

students actually learned what you<br />

claim they did learn in the course.<br />

Some forms of evidence that may<br />

be used to support your assertion<br />

include: test/exam results, portfolios,<br />

copies of assigned projects, student<br />

self-assessment evaluations,<br />

certification exams, reflective<br />

journals, pre and post exit interviews.<br />

In other words, employ a variety of<br />

assessment methods to evaluate<br />

student learning. Using just test<br />

grades may not provide a sufficient<br />

and comprehensive learning profile<br />

of any individual student.<br />

Assessment results can provide<br />

an invaluable piece of<br />

information for course<br />

planning, restructuring,<br />

and re-design.


References:<br />

Fairweather, James, A. (1996) Faculty Work and Public Trust: Restoring the Value of Teaching<br />

and Public Service in American Public Life. Boston, Massachusetts: Allyn & Bacon.<br />

36<br />

Haworth, G., & Conrad C. (1997). Emblems of Quality Education: Developing and Sustaining<br />

High-Quality Programs. Boston, Massachusetts: Allyn & Bacon.<br />

George, P. (1995) College Teaching Abroad: A Handbook of Strategies for Successful<br />

Cross-Cultural Exchanges. Boston, Massachusetts: Allyn & Bacon.<br />

http://catalyst.washington.edu/planning/portfolio_design.html (retrieved: 2/6/04). Designing a<br />

Portfolio Assignment.<br />

http://online.fsu.edu/learningresources/handbook/instructionsatfsu/. Instructions at FSU: A<br />

Guide to Teaching and Learning Practices (retrieved: 2/6/04).<br />

Additional Resources for Planning and Preparing for the Classroom are linked below:<br />

Course Planning and Teaching – Linked with permission from “Teaching at <strong>Carolina</strong>,” a<br />

publication of the <strong>University</strong> of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> at Chapel Hill.<br />

Planning a Class Session – Linked with permission from The Penn <strong>State</strong> Teacher II: Learning<br />

to Teach; Teaching to Learn, a publication of Schreyer Institute for Teaching<br />

Excellence at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Planning What You Are Going To Teach – Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of<br />

California at Santa Barbara, Office of Instructional Development.<br />

Preparing To Teach – Linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of Georgia.<br />

Preparing for Class – Linked with permission from John Hopkins <strong>University</strong>.<br />

The First Day of Class – Linked with permission from Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.


Suggestions for the First Day of Class<br />

By Etta C. Gravely, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Department of Chemistry,<br />

College of Arts and Sciences<br />

37<br />

Prior to going to class, obtain a validated class roster from the web site. Check the roll. If<br />

students are not on the roster, they must produce a validated receipt to remain in the class.<br />

Inform students to go to the registrar’s office if they are not on the roster. Non-validated<br />

students must not be permitted to remain in class.<br />

Introduce yourself to the students and inform them of your office location and office hours<br />

which should be written on the course syllabus. Use a student questionnaire to obtain background<br />

information on the student, the preparedness of the students (previous courses taken<br />

relevant to the discipline), present course load, what the student perceives as his/her talents,<br />

hobbies, weaknesses and strengths, their method of learning, and what grade the student<br />

expects to obtain from the course. Review the course syllabus, which should include<br />

the following:<br />

•Your name, office location, office hours, office<br />

telephone number and e-mail address.<br />

• Catalog course description.<br />

• Course goals.<br />

• <strong>State</strong> Department of Public Instruction<br />

Goals, if applicable.<br />

• Praxis goals, if applicable.<br />

• Performance objectives/goals or their location if<br />

included in the textbook.<br />

• Outline of subject matter (Point out if<br />

arrangement is different from textbook).<br />

• Name of textbook, edition, author and<br />

publisher. Point out special aids and<br />

features of the textbook and any<br />

supplementary materials provided<br />

with the textbook.<br />

• Method of evaluation.<br />

• Activities to be engaged in, how they will be<br />

evaluated and due date for each activity.<br />

• Date for make-up work.<br />

• Indicate co-requisites for the course and if they are<br />

graded as separate courses or part of the present course.<br />

• References including multimedia available.<br />

• Sample of an examination.<br />

• Sample of a quiz.<br />

• Sample of homework or special project, if applicable.<br />

• Safety rules and regulations contract for laboratory.<br />

• Attendance policy.<br />

• If freshman- Study strategies for succeeding in<br />

the discipline.<br />

• <strong>University</strong> policy on issuance of Incompletes and<br />

the dates for removal.<br />

• Sources for tutorial assistance and other types of<br />

assistance.<br />

Allow students to converse in pairs to obtain information about someone they do not know.<br />

Have each one to introduce the other. Use the questionnaires to identify various majors and<br />

ask students of each major to raise their hands so that they can identify others in their majors<br />

in the event they want to form study groups for some of their classes. Emphasize that<br />

preconceived beliefs about the class is detrimental to their success.<br />

Have students complete a form indicating that they understand the syllabus and that it was<br />

explained to them. Also ask them to sign a form permitting or not permitting the instructor to<br />

speak with their parent/guardian about their progress in the class.<br />

Inform students of emergency exits and where they will assemble outside the building in case of<br />

an emergency. Inform them they are not to return to the building until instructed by you to do<br />

so. If the emergency requires that students assemble inside a facility, designate a person to lead<br />

the student to that location while the instructor will follow the last student out.


Tips for Conducting The Class<br />

By Godfrey A. Uzochukwu, Professor, LSS<br />

Director<br />

Interdisciplinary Waste Management Institute<br />

38<br />

In order for graduate students to effectively and confidently carry out their responsibilities as<br />

teaching assistants it may be helpful for them to consider the following advice:<br />

Dress appropriately, smile big, and<br />

wear a name tag.<br />

Provide the following personal<br />

information about themselves to<br />

students: Full name, hometown,<br />

education, experience, and hobbies.<br />

Obtain the following information<br />

from students: Graduation date,<br />

contact information (e-mail, phone<br />

numbers, etc), course background<br />

(science, mathematics, English, etc.<br />

already completed), extracurricular<br />

activities (band, choir, football,<br />

basketball, etc).<br />

Course Materials (textbooks,<br />

workbooks, and laboratory books)<br />

must be carefully reviewed with<br />

students.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Class policy, grading, attendance,<br />

participation, assignments, quizzes,<br />

examinations, and office hours should be<br />

explained to students on the first day<br />

of class.<br />

Students should be encouraged to write<br />

in class.<br />

Speak clearly and loud enough while<br />

conducting the class. The whole class<br />

must be engaged in discussions.<br />

Classroom time management is very<br />

important. Know when to start and<br />

when to stop.<br />

Develop a study guide, hold review<br />

sessions before examinations, compose<br />

reasonable examination and quiz<br />

questions, give adequate time for<br />

examinations and quizzes, be available<br />

to answer questions, grade fairly, look<br />

for creativity and innovation, return<br />

graded work promptly, and let<br />

students know their grades at all times.


Diversity in the Classroom<br />

By Muktha Jost, Ph.D.<br />

Assistant Professor<br />

Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />

School of Education<br />

39<br />

Much like the proverbial blind<br />

brothers attempting to understand<br />

the different parts of the elephant,<br />

much confusion, ambivalence, and<br />

contradiction awaits those wanting<br />

to open the diversity door for true<br />

understanding. What you see<br />

beyond the door depends very<br />

much on the lens you wear or the<br />

fact that your eyes are closed.<br />

What you learn with your eyes<br />

closed is that diversity is a<br />

cumbersome issue that makes your<br />

already challenging teaching<br />

life even more difficult. If you<br />

have your eyes open, you may be<br />

viewing diversity issues through<br />

the lens of –<br />

The Root of Diversity Issues:<br />

The Elephant in The Room<br />

While all the above ways of looking at diversity sheds light on the different parts of the<br />

elephant, they seldom illuminate the whole elephant, and it becomes just what it is in the<br />

classroom – a huge elephant that we mostly ignore because we don’t understand it.<br />

At the heart of all the above diversity issues is a paradox of the U.S. political, social, economic,<br />

and philosophical context: equality, fairness, and democracy for the majority culture on one<br />

end and domination and oppression toward minority cultures on the other. The current<br />

approach to addressing diversity issues is like attempting to cajole an elephant into your home<br />

through the front door. What makes the attempt futile is the push and pull between the two<br />

extremes of the paradox; the stresses and tensions caused by the inequities; the anger and<br />

sadness at the limited successes of the crusades and struggles by minority cultures; and the<br />

disappointment at the subversion and cooption of diversity issues.<br />

Barriers to Understanding the Diversity Elephant<br />

Teaching styles (Lecture?<br />

Group discussion? Cooperative learning? Quiz? Project?<br />

Service learning? Student-designed assignments?)<br />

Learning styles (Sensory or intuitive learner? Visual<br />

or verbal? Sequential or global? Inductive v. deductive?<br />

Active v. reflective?)<br />

Race (African-American or Black? Latino or Hispanic?<br />

Native American or Indian American? Stereotypes,<br />

differences, preferences)<br />

Gender (what are the inherent differences between<br />

male and female? Can they learn content the same way?)<br />

Culture (individualistic v. cooperative)<br />

Disability (special needs, inclusion, curriculum<br />

modification, adaptation of learning context)<br />

Sexual preference (right v. wrong, human rights, right to<br />

lifestyle)<br />

Religion (Christianity, Islam, Hindu, pacifism v.<br />

terrorism, moral v. immoral).<br />

• Fear of the elephant - Much of the dialogue on race, racism, institutional racism and<br />

internalized racism stems from fear, lack of knowledge, divisive propaganda, and human<br />

frailty. A true educator must go through this maze in order to understand them and then<br />

find a place of knowledge and compassion.<br />

• Racism v. Institutional Racism - The dialogue and debate about racism is confined to the<br />

personal level: what is done by one person to another because of personal hatred or prejudice.<br />

What follows from this perception is that if we work on individual feelings of racism, then the<br />

problem is addressed. What is a thousand times more powerful and a thousand times harder to<br />

understand is the power of institutional racism. This is the power that has been vested<br />

systematically with institutions, organizations, and society through a history of separation,<br />

exclusion, and oppression of minority cultures.<br />

• Institutional Racism - Institutional racism manifests itself in ways and places that actually<br />

double its power and makes people believe that social disparity exists because minorities are<br />

inferior. For instance, it is institutional racism that has prevented minorities from having a<br />

fair and equal education, deprived them of equal housing or health care, and lead to


deplorable statistics on prison population, school suspensions and dropouts, special<br />

education classes, and the achievement gap. At the other end of the paradox, corporate<br />

boardrooms, gifted education, academically advanced contexts, and places of power are<br />

filled with members of the majority culture leading many, including minorities, to believe<br />

that they are not up to par.<br />

• Internalized racism - Another outcome of institutional racism is internalized racism.<br />

Minorities living and breathing in the environment created by the subjugation and<br />

oppression of minority cultures eventually internalize those feelings of inferiority that are<br />

related to issues of self-esteem, self-confidence, depression, and anxiety.<br />

Scaling the Walls: A Look Back<br />

Once you understand the barriers and give the diversity elephant its rightful place in your<br />

classroom, the issues and challenges of diversity may not seem as insurmountable. There is one<br />

little course, however, that you have to go through yourself before you make any alterations to<br />

your syllabus, lesson plans, or assignments. It’s a look back at the history of the education of<br />

dominated cultures: Native Americans, African Americans, Asian Americans, and<br />

Hispanic/Latino Americans. While there are numerous resources, a slim book (127 pages) by<br />

Joel Spring called “Deculturalization and the Struggle for Equality: A brief history of the<br />

education of dominated cultures in the United <strong>State</strong>s” is an excellent one.<br />

As an educator at NC A&T you must be aware of the collective story of these cultures,<br />

especially African-American culture, if you plan to feel any satisfaction in your diverse class<br />

room. Educational policies in the United <strong>State</strong>s have historically served mainstream society<br />

and were often formulated with the notion of minorities,<br />

their language, culture, traditions, and religion, as<br />

inferior. The reading gives you a clear understanding of<br />

the systematic efforts to deculturalize the people from<br />

their cultures and the effects of that insidious process in<br />

society today. It also provides historical information on<br />

what was systematically denied to these cultures –<br />

democracy, equality, respect, and access to education.<br />

Issues of immigration, colonization, slavery, constitutional<br />

rights, justice and legal cases, citizenship, etc., are<br />

truthful pointers to the challenges in the classroom when<br />

it comes to diversity issues. For centuries, educational<br />

policy used the following methods of deculturalization<br />

(Spring, 2004):<br />

The popular discourse in society is that all things are equal now. Nothing can be farther from<br />

the truth. After 50 years of desegregation with Brown v. Board of Education, the judgment is<br />

that public schools are not successfully educating African-American and Hispanic-American<br />

students. One of the reasons attributed to this colossal educational failure is that schools were<br />

integrated without appropriate diversity training for teachers, principals, and administrators.<br />

Other reasons include institutional racism, racism, internalized racism, and various social<br />

inequities.<br />

At the Top of the Wall: A Look Within<br />

1. Segregation and isolation<br />

2. Forced change of language<br />

3. Curriculum content that reflects<br />

culture of dominant group<br />

4. Textbooks that reflect culture of<br />

dominant group<br />

5. Denial of cultural and religious<br />

expression by dominated groups<br />

6. Use of teachers from dominant<br />

group<br />

From this place of understanding, your view of yourself is likely to be altered. Where do I stand<br />

on the race circle? Where am I on the color continuum? What are my attitudes toward minority<br />

cultures (if you are white)? What are my attitudes about myself and people from other<br />

dominated cultures (if you are minority)? What is the nature of the content I am trying to<br />

teach? Is the content that I’m trying to teach completely reflective of the culture of the<br />

dominant group? Can my learners connect to the curriculum? Can they connect to me? How<br />

am I different from my students? How are they different from each other? What are my beliefs<br />

about teaching and assessment?<br />

40


Bridging the Gaps<br />

The diversity elephant is in full view now, and you begin to see the gaps. The gaps are spaces<br />

between you the teacher, your students, and those that create the curriculum or content that<br />

you are trying to teach. Many of those spaces are so challenging that they cannot be addressed<br />

in a semester or two, which is the time frame that you are likely to be involved in the lives of<br />

your students. Many others though can be understood and addressed through reflection, action<br />

research, and appropriate action.<br />

Action Research<br />

The disconnects or gaps that can be addressed often come in areas of prior knowledge and<br />

experiences, language, communication styles, racial and ethnic identities and histories, cultural<br />

value systems, and assessment. The writing, reading, and communication skills that students<br />

bring into the classroom are a result of their K-12 experiences, and you’ll gain valuable insights<br />

if you spend any significant time in those classrooms. While you cannot change those<br />

classrooms, coming to grips with those deplorable conditions can help you address the needs<br />

of your students in ways that build bridges between you and your students.<br />

Many of us in higher education make the mistake of running to the ‘literature’ for help. When<br />

it comes to diversity issues, the literature is often too diluted, too narrow, or too universal. The<br />

best strategy is to go to the source: your students. Observe them, ask them, poll them, goad<br />

them, but make every effort you can to understand them. If they are strong on one learning<br />

style, introduce another to them. If you have a preference for group discussions, try a lecture<br />

for a change. Ask them what they value, and ask yourself where you internalized your values.<br />

Ask them about their reading habits and check your syllabus to see for a connection between<br />

their reading habits and your expectations. If the gap is too wide, discuss it in class.<br />

Know your Curriculum Thoroughly<br />

Most of the dialogue about diversity centers on teaching styles and learning styles and ignores<br />

the tremendous role played by the curriculum. Like one master teacher says, make your course<br />

curriculum centered. Ultimately, your students are in the class to learn content, and the best<br />

way to communicate that content so each student understands it is a logical approach. Before<br />

you even begin to design the course, examine the curriculum. Ask yourself how well you know<br />

what you are trying to teach. Who are the people who contributed to the curriculum? What<br />

are their values and priorities? How is it connected to the needs of the students?<br />

Are the goals of the course mostly related to knowledge, skills, or attitudes? Each of the three<br />

categories call for different approaches in teaching and different methods of assessment, and it<br />

is only at this level that the teaching style and learning style comes into play. For instance, if<br />

you are teaching psychological principles related to motivation, which falls mostly in the<br />

category of attitudes and knowledge, then a lecture followed by an objective test is probably<br />

the least effective. If your curricular goals include the teaching of skills, then hands-on<br />

teaching with a performance assessment is better than a lecture.<br />

Integrate Categories of the Curriculum to Teaching Methods and Assessment Methods<br />

Do everything you can to make the curriculum come alive for<br />

students. This process begins with the goals of the course. If the plan<br />

is to take a trip to Paris, then make it explicit in your syllabus. Then<br />

explain to your students how you are planning to get everyone to Paris<br />

from Greensboro, <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong>. Your syllabus is essentially a road<br />

map of that trip. Most of us will not undertake a trip without<br />

knowledge of the cost, but our students often sign up for courses<br />

without considering the price they have to pay that semester to<br />

successfully complete the course. Explain to your students what it<br />

‘costs’ to take the course, what your role is, and what role you expect<br />

them to play. Most importantly, explore together how you’ll know<br />

when you’ve reached your destination (assessment).<br />

Once you come to<br />

grips with the diversity<br />

elephant, other issues<br />

begin to fall in place.<br />

Your understanding of<br />

these issues will begin<br />

to have a profound<br />

effect on the interest,<br />

achievement, and<br />

motivation of your<br />

students.<br />

41


References:<br />

Spring, J. (2004). Deculturalization and the Struggle for Equality: A brief history of the<br />

education of dominated cultures in the United <strong>State</strong>s. New York: McGraw Hill<br />

Diversity: A Selected and Annotated Bibliography<br />

Prepared by R. Johnson with Diane M. Enerson and Kathryn M. Plank at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong><br />

<strong>University</strong>.<br />

42<br />

Borrowed with permission from The Penn <strong>State</strong> Teacher II: Learning to Teach; Teaching to<br />

Learn, a publication of Schreyer Institute for Teaching Excellence at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong><br />

<strong>University</strong>.<br />

Although cognitive psychologists have long been interested in diverse learning styles, the<br />

debate about accommodating social diversity and creating multicultural classrooms in<br />

institutions of higher learning began only recently. Still in its infancy, research on the<br />

educational impact of socio-cultural differences has developed as a result of two things: larger,<br />

better organized, and more visible minority populations on American campuses; and, perhaps<br />

more importantly, increasing diversity among those actually doing the teaching and research.<br />

The bibliography below brings together a number of challenging and useful materials on<br />

diversity and multiculturalism in higher education. Besides being descriptive, each annotation<br />

is intended to provide the reader with a sense of the educational purpose the book or article<br />

could serve. Although several sources address cognitive diversity alone, most are concerned<br />

with the connection between students' approaches to learning and their socio-cultural<br />

backgrounds. For balance, one critique of the multicultural movement has also been included.<br />

Because issues of multiculturalism arouse strong emotions, we must address these issues with<br />

considerable patience and provide ample opportunities for dialogue. Our hope is that the<br />

bibliography below will provide you with one such opportunity, and we look forward to your<br />

reactions, comments, and suggestions.<br />

Border, Laura L. B., and Nancy Van Note Chism, eds. Teaching for Diversity. New Directions<br />

for Teaching and Learning, no. 49. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1992.<br />

Capello, Doris Correa and Paul G. Kreuzer. ‘“Don't Teach It to Us; Teach It to Them’:<br />

Teaching Cross-Cultural Literature to a Multicultural Class.” In Teaching a "New<br />

Canon"?: Students, Teachers, and Texts in the College Literature Classroom, edited<br />

by Bruce A. Goebel and James C. Hall, 96-114. Urbana, Ill.: National Council of<br />

Teachers of English, 1995.<br />

Chism, Nancy. “Taking Student Diversity into Account.” In Teaching Tips: Strategies,<br />

Research, and Theory for College and <strong>University</strong> Teachers, 9th ed., by Wilbur J.<br />

McKeachie, 223-37. Lexington, Mass.: D. C. Heath, 1994.<br />

Crawford, Mary and Roger Chaffin. “The Reader's Construction of Meaning: Cognitive<br />

Research on Gender and Comprehension.” In Gender and Reading: Essays on<br />

Readers, Texts, and Contexts, edited by Elizabeth A. Flynn and Patrocinio P.<br />

Schweickart, 3-30. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins <strong>University</strong> Press, 1986.<br />

D'Souza, Dinesh. Illiberal Education: The Politics of Race and Sex on Campus. New York:<br />

Vintage, 1992.<br />

Davis, Barbara Gross. “Learning Styles and Preferences.” Chapter 22 of Tools for Teaching.<br />

San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1993.<br />

Davis, Barbara Gross. “Responding to a Diverse Student Body.” Part 2 of Tools for Teaching.<br />

San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1993.


Goebel, Bruce A. “‘Who Are All These People?’: Some Pedagogical Implications of Diversity<br />

in the Multicultural Classroom.” In Teaching a "New Canon"?: Students, Teachers,<br />

and Texts in the College Literature Classroom, edited by Bruce A. Goebel and James<br />

C. Hall, 22-31. Urbana, Ill.: National Council of Teachers of English, 1995.<br />

43<br />

Laube, Linda. “Gender, Assessment, and Writing Instruction.” In Teaching a “New Canon”?:<br />

Students, Teachers, and Texts in the College Literature Classroom, edited by Bruce<br />

A. Goebel and James C. Hall, 148-63. Urbana, Ill.: National Council of Teachers of<br />

English, 1995.<br />

Martin, Warren Bryan, ed. New Perspectives on Teaching and Learning. New Directions for<br />

Teaching and Learning, no. 7. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1981.<br />

Metzger, Mary Jane. “A Journey Defined by Place: Anti-Racism in the College Classroom.” In<br />

Teaching a “New Canon”?: Students, Teachers, and Texts in the College Literature<br />

Classroom, edited by Bruce A. Goebel and James C. Hall, 67-80. Urbana, Ill.: National<br />

Council of Teachers of English, 1995.<br />

Steele, Claude M. “Thin Ice: 'Stereotype Threat' and Black College Students.” The Atlantic<br />

Monthly (August 1999): 44-54.<br />

Sternberg, Robert J. “Thinking Styles: Keys to Understanding Student Performance.” Phi<br />

Delta Kappan (January 1990): 336-71.<br />

Tatum, Beverly Daniel. “Talking about Race, Learning about Racism: The Application of<br />

Racial Identity Development Theory in the Classroom.” Harvard Educational Review<br />

62 (Spring 1992): 1-24.<br />

Tobias, Sheila. They’re Not Dumb, They’re Different: Stalking the Second Tier. Tucson,<br />

Ariz.: Research Corporation, 1990.<br />

Wertheim, Margaret. Pythagoras’ Trousers: God, Physics, and the Gender Wars. New York:<br />

Times Books, 1995.


SECTION V<br />

44<br />

Helping Students Learn - Overview<br />

By R. Trent Larson, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Department of Human Performance and Leisure Studies,<br />

School of Education<br />

Learning is a dynamic process of making sense of the real world. It requires a purposeful effort<br />

on the part of both the instructor and the student. To build an environment conducive to<br />

learning, the instructor must develop a genuine interest in students and come to value the<br />

whole of students’ experiences (cultural, linguistic and historical). These experiences represent<br />

a wellspring of knowledge and information and provide a foundation for planning subsequent<br />

learning activities. Likewise, instructors should bring their own appropriate life experiences to<br />

the classroom to stimulate student interest and understanding of salient concepts.<br />

To help students learn, instructors must also teach them to value knowledge whether obtained<br />

through formal or informal activities. As they come to value knowledge, students will see what<br />

they lack and become motivated to learn more in these areas. The key is to make learning<br />

relevant and connected to the real lives of students. Through observation, dialogue and<br />

self-reflection, students come to a greater understanding of the world around them. The focus<br />

of the instructor should be to assist students in discovering their purposes for learning, where to<br />

go to find adequate information to make good decisions and how to become contributing<br />

citizens, even advocates for change in the community.<br />

There are a number of strategies or outcomes that instructors should consider in order to foster<br />

student learning and these must be addressed within a conceptual framework. Such a frame<br />

work should consist of the following elements: diversity, an assessment system, student selfreflection<br />

and the utilization of appropriate technology. Attention to diversity assists the<br />

teacher in presenting information in a format that encourages learning. This means developing<br />

an awareness of differences in students due to culture, gender or other personal issues. An<br />

assessment system provides the instructor with regular updates on the progress of students in<br />

the course. With ongoing assessment, evidence of student achievement is monitored and<br />

adjustments in instruction (e.g., new teaching strategies) can occur. Self reflection exercises<br />

such as reflective logs or diaries can help students better understand the concepts learned and<br />

the type of learning styles most preferred. Lastly, technology serves as a basis for stimulating<br />

student interest, understanding and involvement. Teaching the use the Internet and other<br />

related technologies empowers students to seek information on their own. Computers serve as<br />

a useful tool tracking performance within and without the classroom.<br />

With a conceptual framework in place, the instructor becomes prepared to incorporate various<br />

strategies to encourage the learning process. Some of the concepts/strategies that could be<br />

important in this process include: learning styles and preferences, cooperative learning, seven<br />

principles, time management and how students learn.


Helping Students Learn<br />

By Richard A. Jackson, Ph.D.<br />

Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />

Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />

School of Education<br />

45<br />

Depending on the course and the lesson to be taught, there are numerous strategies one can use<br />

to help students learn. In general, the following tools and techniques will have a positive effect<br />

on student learning.<br />

(1) Require students to explain their answers. Pose questions during the instructional process.<br />

Do not simply accept a brief answer or response to a question. Ask the student to explain<br />

their reasoning for their answer and to justify their answer. Higher order questions require<br />

students to apply, analyze, synthesize and evaluate concepts.<br />

(2) Reframe your questions or break them into smaller parts. Teachers often need to adjust the<br />

delivery of their lesson depending on the needs of the students and their ability to<br />

understand the content. Where students seem unsure, you may need to provide prompts or<br />

clues. You may even need to reframe the question or present it in a different way. This is<br />

especially true if the subject matter is complex.<br />

(3) Other strategies to help students learn include:<br />

Select various procedures<br />

for monitoring and<br />

judging student performance.<br />

Decide how and when to<br />

give feedback and/or<br />

rewards.<br />

Select various types of<br />

feedback and rewards such<br />

as verbal praise, awards,<br />

rewards, etc.<br />

Use mistakes and re-doing<br />

work as learning<br />

opportunities, not punishment.<br />

Press students to think. Make<br />

them explain and justify their<br />

answers.<br />

Monitor for comprehension<br />

rather than just procedural<br />

correctness.<br />

Additional information is available at the following link:<br />

Helping Students Learn – Linked with permission from Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> TA Handbook -<br />

Section III (scroll about a fourth of the way down the article)


How Students Learn<br />

By Richard A. Jackson, Ph.D.<br />

Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />

Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />

School of Education<br />

46<br />

Students learn in a variety of ways, and one of the challenges every teacher must face is<br />

determining what is the best approach for each lesson taught. Making that decision involves an<br />

analysis of a number of factors – Is lecture the best approach? Should a combination of lecture<br />

and demonstration be used? Does the lesson lend itself to demonstration, or is that approach<br />

impractical for the subject matter? Would a student best learn by practice and repartition?<br />

Determining the best teaching method and instructional delivery system to be employed is a<br />

fundamental question that must be answered before effective teaching can occur. Students learn<br />

best by building on information and/or knowledge they already have acquired. Mastering new<br />

information occurs when they integrate what they already know with the new material, thus<br />

expanding their knowledge base.<br />

The techniques of learning work successfully once the basic fundamentals occur. Take a<br />

chemistry experiment or physics exercise. Once one understands what is happening on a<br />

theoretical level, the experiment reinforces the knowledge by verifying that which is expected<br />

or known.<br />

Practice and repartition are approaching teaching tools in some instructional settings. This<br />

method is typically used in settings where eye-hand coordination or other dexterity-based skills<br />

are required.<br />

In order for learning to be effective, there must be a feedback system in place between the<br />

student and the teacher. It is extremely important that the student receive progress feedback<br />

from the teacher and understand the level and quality of their learning.<br />

Additional information is available at the following link:<br />

How Students Learn - Borrowed with permission from Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> - Teaching<br />

Handbook<br />

Learning Styles and Preferences<br />

By R. Trent Larson, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Department of Human Performance and Leisure Studies,<br />

School of Education<br />

According to Litzinger & Osif (1992), learning styles are described as “the different ways in<br />

which . . . adults think and learn” (p. 73). Each individual possesses a unique set of behaviors<br />

or strategies to acquire, process and apply new information. Litzinger & Osif (1992) also<br />

indicate that this learning process depends on several processes including cognition (how one<br />

acquires knowledge), conceptualization (how one processes information) and affective (one’s<br />

motivation, decision-making styles and emotional preferences also characterize learning styles).<br />

Many researchers (e.g., Kolb) have identified different types of learning styles.<br />

Kolb (1984) placed learning styles along a continuum ranging from concrete experiences<br />

(learning by putting concrete ideas into practice), reflective observation (learning by<br />

observation or thinking), abstract conceptualization (using abstract thought to consider<br />

relationships), and active experimentation (learning by participating in activities or<br />

experiments). Kolb observed that while individuals move from one learning style to another<br />

over the course of time, they usually settle on one style they prefer over the others.


Some students prefer a particular type of learning style involving the senses. They may be<br />

visual learners, auditory learners, kinesthetic learners or tactile learners. Visual learners want to<br />

see the information in front of them (e.g., a movie over the Internet or a PowerPoint<br />

presentation to view pictures). Auditory learners enjoy providing verbal feedback to questions,<br />

listening to speeches through web-sites, or collaborating with other students on projects that<br />

require someone to read the directions while the others perform some operation. Kinesthetic<br />

learners prefer “hands-on activity” and participate in projects involving a computer (especially<br />

the mouse and keyboard). Tactile learners require extensive input using their hands and<br />

brains.They might, for example, use computer-drawing tools to illustrate a product or idea, or<br />

use a tablet to produce an art creation. Other students like seeing the overview of a concept or<br />

problem and require the big picture to gain a complete understanding. Some prefer to view<br />

concepts or processes from a step-by-step perspective.<br />

47<br />

In contrast to learning styles, preferences refer to the conditions under which students prefer to<br />

work and learn. These may refer to things such as the arrangement of the classroom, student<br />

groupings or whether the instruction is teacher driven or self-taught via independent learning.<br />

An observant instructor will detect which preferences work best with particular students.<br />

Learning styles and preferences are also knowable through diagnostic tests and personal<br />

observations. The salient point regarding teaching is that, although students have preferred<br />

learning styles and preferences, it may be unrealistic to expect to meet everyone’s needs<br />

entirely. Therefore, the best approach is to provide instruction using a variety of strategies<br />

during each class period and throughout the semester to attempt to satisfy the needs of as many<br />

different types of learners as possible.<br />

References:<br />

Kolb, D. (1984). Experiential Learning: Experience as the Source of Learning and<br />

Development. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.<br />

Litzinger, M., & Osif, B. (1992). Accommodating Diverse Learning Styles: Designing<br />

Instruction for Electronic Information Sources. (pp. 73-82) In Linda Sharito (Ed.)<br />

What is Good Library Instruction Now? Library Instruction for the 1990s. MI: Pierian<br />

Press.<br />

Other resources on Learning Styles:<br />

Learning Styles - Linked with permission from “Teaching at <strong>Carolina</strong>,” a publication of the<br />

<strong>University</strong> of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> at Chapel Hill.<br />

Principles for Good Practice in Undergraduate Education<br />

By Kimberly Richards, NCC, SACC, Ph.D.<br />

Assistant Professor<br />

Department of Human Development and Community Services,<br />

School of Education<br />

Chickering and Gamson (1991) formulated seven principles for good practice in undergraduate<br />

education after undertaking a meta-analysis of 50 years of educational research. Though the<br />

seven principles they developed relate to undergraduate education, these principles can be<br />

applied to learning at any level. These principles imply a collective and constructivist learning<br />

environment. Learning is enhanced in collective constructivist environments as working with<br />

others can increase student involvement in learning and knowledge construction. Using these<br />

principles provides an approach to education that makes learning more relevant, evocative,<br />

and meaningful for the student. Students take co-responsibility for their knowledge and skill<br />

acquisition and the educator becomes a guide to help students gain/construct new knowledge.<br />

These seven principles are briefly described below and examples for implementing the<br />

principles are provided so that the Teaching Assistant can become familiar with the types of<br />

activities that can be used to enhance the classroom experience for both the students and<br />

the educators.


Encourage student-faculty contact.<br />

Student-faculty contact in the classroom and, perhaps even more importantly, outside of the<br />

classroom, can provide the motivation for a student to pursue his/her professional and personal<br />

interests. Individual contact with the student encourages reflection, critical thinking, and<br />

independent learning, which is learning for the love of learning. This contact can enhance student<br />

self-worth and can help a student through academic, professional and personal uncertainty. Below<br />

are listed some ways to increase individual contact with students:<br />

Communicate with students on a personal<br />

level, for example, learn about their<br />

educational and career goals.<br />

Personalize feedback on student tasks.<br />

Be visible.<br />

Learn students’ names.<br />

If possible arrive to class early and stick<br />

around after class.<br />

Serve as an informal mentor to students.<br />

Involve students in professional activities<br />

such as presentations, conferences, research,<br />

and writing.<br />

Have on-line time with students such as<br />

through discussion boards/chat facilities.<br />

Advise students about professional opportunities.<br />

Communicate with students through the<br />

e-mail.<br />

At the end of each test/task have students<br />

comment on how they feel they are doing<br />

and how the class is going.<br />

Encourage Cooperation Among Students<br />

Learning can be heightened and reinforced when students work together to construct knowledge.<br />

Students sharing ideas and knowledge and responding to each other help develop thinking<br />

abilities and deepens students’ knowledge and understanding. Students working together<br />

strengthens student participation in the learning process. Educators help create positive<br />

interdependence but emphasize individual accountability of students. Some techniques that can<br />

be used to facilitate cooperative learning are:<br />

48<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Group assignments, problem solving,<br />

reviewing, and testing.<br />

Activities that encourages students to get to<br />

know each other, such as students sharing<br />

their viewpoints on topics discussed in class.<br />

Create learning communities/teams.<br />

Make use of peer evaluations.<br />

Have students explain difficult ideas or<br />

teach each other.<br />

Good Practice Encourages Active Learning<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Have students give classroom and public<br />

presentations of their papers, projects,<br />

discussions, etc.<br />

Break up into small groups for discussions<br />

and other activities.<br />

Have games, skits, and panel discussions.<br />

Lead by example – team teach classes.<br />

Active learning promotes the appreciation of both knowledge construction and knowledge itself.<br />

The educator can provide scaffolding for the students such as brief lectures, individualized<br />

instruction, prepackaged information, and assignments, and with this scaffolding students can<br />

then create their own knowledge. Active learning gives students control and ownership of the<br />

learning process and the knowledge they create. Active learning can take on a variety of forms of<br />

both individual and group work in and outside the classroom. Though through the use of active<br />

learning students are more likely to understand, retain, appreciate, and apply this knowledge to<br />

real life situations, many students may feel anxiety and even resentment at having to construct<br />

their own knowledge as most students are use to being spoon-fed knowledge. Students may<br />

perceive that the instructors who have active learning classrooms are not doing their jobs. One<br />

way of preventing this misunderstanding is to explain to the students your philosophy of<br />

education and have them read some articles that speak to active learning and its benefits. The<br />

following ideas can help you develop an active learning classroom:


✰ Provide students with or have students<br />

identify field work opportunities to<br />

participate in, such as, job shadowing,<br />

service learning, practicum, internships,<br />

apprenticeships, activities they participate in.<br />

✰ Encourage students to apply ideas learned or<br />

constructed in the course and reflect on the<br />

implementation process.<br />

✰ Encourage students to challenge ideas.<br />

✰ Give students real-life situations to analyze<br />

and explain or assign projects with real life<br />

application.<br />

✰ Encourage students to suggest curriculum.<br />

✰ Make subject material more relevant by<br />

making course content related to the local<br />

community or home.<br />

49<br />

Good Practice Gives Prompt Feedback<br />

Most students want and appreciate appropriate and timely feedback. This feedback helps<br />

students to access their levels of knowledge and focus their learning efforts on suitable<br />

topic/areas and sources of information. Feedback is important in that it helps students acquire<br />

the greatest benefit from their education. This feedback allows the student to reflect on not only<br />

their knowledge base, but for example, who they are as individuals; that is, their believes, values,<br />

culture, career choice, and identity. Ways to provide feedback are:<br />

When possible provide immediate and<br />

direct feedback on classroom<br />

activities/events.<br />

Return papers, assignments, and testing<br />

material the following week they were<br />

handed in.<br />

Provide student evaluations throughout the<br />

semester/quarter.<br />

Provide meaningful written comments.<br />

Give homework and quizzes even if they are<br />

upgraded.<br />

Have classroom exercises that provide<br />

immediate feedback.<br />

Schedule individual student conferences to<br />

discuss student progress.<br />

Have students reflect on and record their<br />

progress.<br />

Contact students who miss classes.<br />

Good Practice Emphasizes Time on Task<br />

Time on task refers to both the time a student is engaged in learning and the student’s use of<br />

time management. Time on task helps the student learn both efficiently and effectively and<br />

helps instructors teach effectively. For example, students who use their time ineffectively may<br />

interrupt the teaching process and, as such, hinder other students’ ongoing learning. Learning<br />

time management skills is a practical way for students to prepare themselves for both continuing<br />

academic studies and for the ‘real world’ . Effective use of one’s time is a key element in having<br />

successful careers and positive personal relationships. Time expectations need to be made clear<br />

for students in order to establish the basis for high levels of functioning for all involved in the<br />

learning process. Ways to help students stay on task are:<br />

⋆<br />

⋆<br />

⋆<br />

⋆<br />

Have well defined guidelines and due dates<br />

spelled out in the syllabus and go over<br />

timelines in class.<br />

Refer back to the syllabus on occasion<br />

throughout the term to see if class is on<br />

track.<br />

Assign realistic time values for each task.<br />

Let students know the minimum amount of<br />

time they should spend preparing for class<br />

and working on assignments.<br />

⋆<br />

⋆<br />

⋆<br />

Encourage students to prepare papers/<br />

assignments and presentations well in<br />

advance.<br />

Help student develop time management<br />

skills when they fall off task.<br />

Students can be asked to identify how they<br />

can best use their classroom time.


Good Practice Communicated High Expectations<br />

When instructors indicate that they believe all students have the potential to achieve academic<br />

success, students may then be encouraged to set high expectations for themselves. This<br />

philosophy indicates that the instructor believes in the good of all students and can become a<br />

self-fulfilling prophecy for students that feel respected. Communicating high expectations needs<br />

to be followed up by creating humanistic environments where it is possible for students to<br />

attain and maintain high standards of academic support and student behavior. The following<br />

techniques may help the students live up to high expectations set by the instructor:<br />

✰ Support students in living<br />

up to classroom expectations.<br />

✰ Provide students with<br />

examples of outstanding<br />

student work.<br />

✰ Recognize students who do<br />

extraordinary work and provide<br />

other positive reinforcement.<br />

✰ Encourage students to<br />

always be at their best.<br />

✰ Expect students to participate<br />

in the learning process.<br />

✰ Make course expectations<br />

clear.<br />

50<br />

Good Practice Respects Diverse Talents and Ways of Learning<br />

The diversity of student epistemology in any given class would require instructors to construct<br />

classes in ways in which students have a variety of ways of learning/discovering knowledge and<br />

indicating the depth of their knowledge for assessment purposes. Each student should be<br />

provided with the chance to highlight their knowledge, skills, and talents and to learn in ways<br />

that make sense to them. Instructors need to identify diverse classroom methods and practice<br />

them. This expands the educators teaching skills toolbox. In essence, educators that recognize<br />

the diversity of epistemology create a climate that acknowledges and respects cultural diversity.<br />

Engage as many ways of<br />

learning as possible.<br />

Let students know it is okay<br />

to speak up when they do<br />

not understand.<br />

Frequently change the<br />

methodology of material<br />

delivery.<br />

Use diverse teaching<br />

activities to address student<br />

diversity.<br />

Make use of multimedia<br />

presentations to enhance the<br />

learning of all students.<br />

Develop learning contracts<br />

with students in order to<br />

provide students with<br />

alternative learning<br />

methodologies.<br />

Encourage all students to<br />

share their viewpoints during<br />

classroom discussions.<br />

Set activities that relate to<br />

the local community/<br />

background of the students.<br />

Select a variety of types and<br />

options for student<br />

assessment.<br />

Allow students to identify<br />

the ways they would like to<br />

be assessed.<br />

These principles and the examples provided can be useful guidelines for the Teaching Assistant<br />

in transforming the classroom into a vital and vibrant learning community. This, in turn, will<br />

augment and facilitate the student learning process. While instructors are responsible for the<br />

outcome of their learning communities, students also become responsible for their education<br />

and this empowers the student not only as a learner, but also as a member of the academic<br />

community, and as a member in the community at large. Such andragogy provides the learner<br />

with both direction and freedom and can liberate the learning processes of the student and<br />

create students that can empower themselves and others.<br />

Bibliography<br />

Chickering, A.W., and Gamson, Z.F. (1991). Applying the Seven Principles for Good Practice in<br />

Undergraduate Education. In New Directions for Teaching and Learning. San Francisco:<br />

Jossey-Bass Inc.<br />

<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> of West Georgia. (2003). Faculty Manual. The <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> of West Georgia,<br />

Carrollton, GA.<br />

California <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> Bakersfield. (2003). Constructivist Learning Environments. Faculty Teaching<br />

and Learning Center, California <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, Bakersfield.<br />

Additional Resources:<br />

Seven Principles for Good Practice: Enhancing Student Learning - Linked with permission from the<br />

<strong>University</strong> of Delaware TA Handbook – as adapted from The Seven Principles Resource<br />

Center, Winona <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, Winona, Minnesota.


Cooperative Learning<br />

By Jane Davis-Seaver, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />

School of Education<br />

51<br />

Cooperative learning can be accomplished in several ways. The central purpose of those ways,<br />

however, is the same. Many students enjoy working in groups; they tend to do higher quality work,<br />

retain more information, and raise the overall level of learning for the whole group when they work<br />

in cooperative or collaborative groups. Advantages for the teacher are that more coverage of subject<br />

matter can be done, more students are actively engaged in the topics, and the students take over the<br />

responsibility for accomplishing the tasks required. It is important, however, for the groups to spell<br />

out exactly what is expected from each group member, to be ure the work is divided fairly, and that<br />

all members are satisfied with the final project before it is submitted for evaluation. Each group<br />

member should clearly understand that any member who does not uphold the goals of the group, does<br />

not attend the group meetings and does not hand in high-quality work on time may be removed from<br />

the group by the other members of the group. Evaluation of group projects should be done by rubric.<br />

Working in pairs is perhaps a good way to begin for those students who are not accustomed to working<br />

together. The possibilities for problems are minimized when students can establish their own pairings.<br />

However, at times it may be more efficient for the instructor to assign the pairs.<br />

“Jigsaw” is another way to establish cooperative groups. The advantage of this strategy is that a lot of<br />

material can be covered in a short amount of time. A key to making this work, however, is that at the<br />

end of the project or research adequate time be given to presentations, and hand outs for everyone<br />

must be given. “Jigsaw” means that subtopics under a larger topic are divided among several groups.<br />

Each group researches or creates a part of the larger presentation, and when all group work is done,<br />

each group presents their work to the rest of the groups. For example, a large topic in an education<br />

class might be Teaching Methods. Several students can collaborate on the Montessori Method, another<br />

group can research teacher-directed methods, and a third group could research student-directed<br />

methods. Each group would present their findings and provide hand-outs for the other groups. All<br />

students, however, would be responsible for knowing the information found by all the groups.<br />

Groups can be formed in several ways. One quick and easy way is to have students “count off.” That is,<br />

each student says a number. Then, all the 1’s are in a group, the 2’s are in another group, the 3’s in<br />

another, etc. Another way is to have students choose a group according to their interest in or<br />

knowledge about the topic the group will be working on. Another way is to have students analyze the<br />

task, and then choose their members according to whom they feel can best meet the goals of the<br />

project. For example, if artwork is going to be required, the group will want to have a member who is<br />

talented in that area.<br />

Additional Resources on Cooperative Learning:<br />

Cooperative Learning - Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of California at Santa<br />

Barbara, Office of Instructional Development.<br />

Reading Resources:<br />

Cooper, Jim (1990), Cooperative Learning and College Teaching: Tips from the Trenches, The<br />

Teaching Professor, 4 (5).<br />

Crowley, Mary and Dunn, Ken (1993). Cooperative Learning at Dalhousie, a workshop<br />

presented at Dalhousie <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Fennell, Hope-Arlene (1994) Cooperative Learning: Students' Perceptions and Preferences,<br />

The Lakehead <strong>University</strong> Teacher, 4 (1).<br />

King, Alison (1993), From Sage on the Stage to Guide on the Side, College Teaching, 41 (1).<br />

Millis, Barbara (1993), Cooperative Learning, a workshop presented at Dalhousie <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Sego, Arlene (1991), Cooperative Learning: A Classroom Guide, Info-Tec, Cleveland, Ohio.


Adults as Learners<br />

By Judie Bucholz, Ph.D.<br />

Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />

Department of Human Development and Services,<br />

School of Education<br />

52<br />

◆<br />

◆<br />

◆<br />

◆<br />

◆<br />

◆<br />

Part of being an effective instructor involves understanding how adults learn. Malcolm<br />

Knowles, who pioneered the field of adult learning, identified the following characteristics of<br />

adult learners:<br />

Adults are autonomous and self-directed. Effective instructors actively involve adult students<br />

in the learning process and serve as facilitators for them. They get adult perspectives on topics<br />

and let the students work on projects that reflect their interests. Effective instructors allow the<br />

adult students to assume responsibility for presentations and group leadership. Instructors act as<br />

facilitators, guiding students to their own knowledge rather than simply supplying them with<br />

facts. Effective instructors show adult students how the class will help them reach their goals.<br />

Adults have accumulated a foundation of life experiences and knowledge that includes workrelated<br />

activities, family responsibilities, and previous education. Adults need to connect<br />

learning to this knowledge and experience base. Effective instructors can help do this by<br />

drawing out the student’s experience and knowledge that is relevant to the topics in the course.<br />

Effective instructors relate theories and concepts to the students and recognize the value of<br />

experience and sharing of experiences in the learning process.<br />

Adults are goal-oriented. When adults enroll in a program, they usually know what goal they<br />

want to attain. They, therefore, appreciate an educational program that is organized and well<br />

defined. Most adults who are motivated to go to school do so primarily because they have use<br />

for the knowledge or skill being sought. Effective instructors show how the course will help<br />

them reach their goals early in the course. Effective instructors are organized in the delivery of<br />

the course and reach the objectives outlined in the syllabus.<br />

Adults are relevancy-oriented. They want to see a reason for learning something. Learning must<br />

be applicable to their work or other responsibilities to be of value to them. Effective instructors<br />

identify objectives for adult students before the course begins; theories and concepts should be<br />

related to a setting familiar to adults. Allowing adults to choose projects that reflect their<br />

interests and experience can bring relevancy into the classroom.<br />

Adults are practical, focusing on the aspect of a lesson most useful to them in their work. Adults<br />

may not be interested in knowledge for knowledge sake. While adults may tend to learn new<br />

concepts more slowly, they compensate for this by being more accurate and making fewer trial<br />

and error ventures. Effective instructors show adults how the lesson will be useful to them on<br />

the job or their other responsibilities.<br />

Adults, and all learners, need to be shown respect. Effective instructors acknowledge the wealth<br />

of experiences that adult students bring to the classroom. Adults should be treated as equals in<br />

experience and knowledge and be allowed to voice their opinion freely in the class room.<br />

Shared lessons in life can prove an invaluable learning experience.<br />

Educators must remember that learning occurs within each individual as a continual process<br />

throughout life. People learn at different speeds and in different ways. Effective instructors<br />

recognize this and incorporate different methodologies in their classrooms.<br />

It is natural for some adult learners to be anxious or nervous when faced with a new learning<br />

situation and many adults take errors personally. Positive reinforcement by the instructor can<br />

enhance learning and overcome anxiety.<br />

Learning results from stimulation of the senses. In some people, one sense is used more than<br />

others to learn or recall information. Effective instructors present materials using technology<br />

and other sources that stimulate as many senses as possible in order to increase their chances of<br />

teaching success.<br />

Sources used:<br />

“30 Things We Know for Sure About Adult Learning” by Ron and Suzan Zembe.<br />

“Principles of Adult Learning” by Stephen Lieb.


Time Management in the Classroom<br />

By Muktha Jost, Ph.D.<br />

Assistant professor, Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />

School of Education<br />

53<br />

The key to time management in the classroom starts with a good, clear, and interesting<br />

syllabus. The syllabus is your road map to the course and should include simply written sections<br />

on goals of the course, topics covered, textbooks and other materials required, methods of<br />

instruction, methods of assessment, grading scale, calendar, academic honesty and integrity,<br />

and information about the instructor (office hours, phone number, e-mail, etc.)<br />

For a semester filled with learning, take the first class and focus it on getting to know your<br />

students and giving them opportunities to get to know each other. Communicate the best ways<br />

to get in touch with you, ways to reach you and ask you for help, what you expect from them,<br />

and what they can expect from you. If you can, learn the names of each and every one of your<br />

students (depending on class size). For large class sizes, a digital camera can be handy to store<br />

pictures of students.<br />

Before the semester starts, design the course calendar. Make sure that each class meeting is at<br />

least outlined with readings and activities. Make it a habit to assess continuously whether the<br />

class activities are in sync with the goals of the course and the work assigned to the students.<br />

Once you design and circulate the calendar, stick to it and announce any changes that you<br />

may have to make to the calendar.<br />

Before the class, spend time prepping the class space. Arrange it in ways that can make the<br />

kind of communication and interaction that you want possible. When you design the agenda<br />

for the class, make sure that you are matching it to the attention span of learners, interest in<br />

the topic, prior knowledge about the subject, and familiarity with teaching methods. Breaking<br />

up the class in segments for mini-lectures, group discussion, activity, reflection, etc are very<br />

effective in conveying content in the time provided. If you are using technological tools, make<br />

sure that they are set up and ready before class, and that you have a back up plan when the<br />

tools fail.<br />

Communication related to assessment is important when it comes to using class time<br />

effectively. Grade student work promptly and return with constructive feedback to students.<br />

This will help with student confusion or anxiety about their performance in your course.<br />

While it’s important to keep your eye on the clock and make those transitions to the next<br />

segment, do keep in mind that there are teachable moments that must be seized at the expense<br />

of time. In addition, being around a few minutes before class begins to greet students and<br />

answer questions, and staying after class to clarify questions and provide help can give that<br />

extra support to those students hesitant to take class time for their needs.<br />

Additional Resources include:<br />

Time Management in the Classroom - Linked with permission from John Hopkins <strong>University</strong>.<br />

(Scroll down to near the bottom of linked page to locate the Time Management section.)<br />

The Role of Motivation & the Classroom Environment – Linked with permission from Ohio<br />

<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>. (Section begins on Page 2 of linked PDF file)


SECTION VI<br />

Multiple Instructional Strategies, Situations, Techniques,<br />

Technologies, and Tools<br />

54<br />

The courses I remember the most are the ones where the professor talked, used<br />

videos, did demonstrations, used overheads and did other things to save us from<br />

just listening to him droning on.<br />

- Graduate student<br />

Teaching with Technology<br />

By Karen Smith-Gratto, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Center for Professional Development,<br />

School of Education<br />

In order to insure that all students are provided with the opportunity to learn, learning<br />

environments must be designed in ways that allow learners to approach learning in diverse<br />

ways. First and foremost we need to understand that all learners are unique and interact with<br />

the content based upon their experiences. Once we understand this, it becomes clear that<br />

educational environments need to include a variety of techniques and tools to enhance<br />

student learning.<br />

Students come to the learning environment with their own experiences that affect how<br />

they interpret the content. Students’ cultures, previous school experiences, and previous<br />

interactions with the concepts will impact how much they interact with the material. How<br />

well students learn and understand content is also influenced by the way the student<br />

approaches learning (learning style), what type of intellectual approach a student uses,<br />

and the student’s motivation to learn the subject at hand.<br />

If we want students to “learn” then we have to provide experiences that address not just one<br />

way of learning but multiple ways of learning and different levels of motivation. By planning<br />

the learning experiences to take the differences of students into consideration, there is a<br />

higher probability of student success. In this section, we will examine different ways to<br />

address student diversity through the use of multiple teaching strategies that incorporate a<br />

variety of techniques, technologies and tools.<br />

Technology includes not only equipment and media but how we plan, deliver, and evaluate<br />

instruction. In order to insure that we use instructional time effectively, systematic planning<br />

is essential. While this section emphasizes the use of media and equipment, the importance<br />

of the previous sections in which planning was discussed can not be overemphasized. In the<br />

previous sections you learned that knowing the goals and objectives of the instruction were<br />

important to establish so that the planning, delivery, and ultimately the evaluation of student<br />

learning is consistent. Once we have established what students will be expected to know we<br />

can choose the appropriate tools to help students achieve success. Media and technology are<br />

just tools that can be employed to enhance learning.


Media (Audio-Visual Aids)<br />

This section will be divided into the following types of media: Visual, Audio and Motion.<br />

These types of media can be delivered through a variety of means. Visual media includes<br />

non-projected and projected media. Chalk and white boards; posters; flipcharts (easels);<br />

photographs; models; and real objects are examples of non-projected media. Projected media<br />

includes overhead projection, filmstrip projection, slide projection and the use of Liquid Crystal<br />

Display (LCD projectors) units. Audio can be delivered via tape, sound CD, and computer.<br />

Motion media can be presented using both projected and non-projected means. The most<br />

familiar means of delivering motion media is through the use of the television often combined<br />

with the use of a video tape player (VCR). The LCD projector can project motion media via<br />

a connection between the projector and a television, VCR, video camera, or computer.<br />

55<br />

Later in this section you will learn about diversity among learners. Perceptual preference is<br />

one way that we can address diversity. Some students prefer auditory means, others prefer<br />

visual stimulus, and still others must be kinetically involved in the learning environment.<br />

Support for the use of different media and the development of different media by students as<br />

a learning activity is also supported by Howard Garnder’s work in multiple intelligences. The<br />

variety of media is one way to address different learning styles and multiple intelligences.<br />

Visual Media<br />

Visual media can help instructors by providing a concrete reference for abstract information.<br />

Visuals run along a continuum from photographs which are the most realistic to drawings that<br />

are easily identified with concrete objects, to symbolic graphics, and finally to verbal symbols.<br />

Most visual forms can be delivered in both non-projected and projected formats. Regardless of<br />

the delivery method, there are specific characteristics that need to be considered when<br />

choosing or creating visuals. General visual design principles need to be followed in order to<br />

avoid distracting or confusing students with the visual.<br />

Visuals can help students understand material or can interfere with that understanding. The<br />

application of visual design principles can help insure that the visual will contribute to<br />

student understanding. You can refer to some of the books and web-sites in the Resource<br />

section to gain a fuller understanding of what those principles are. One of the most<br />

important to consider for instructional purposes is simplicity.<br />

When the principle of simplicity is applied to visuals it serves as a guide to making the visual<br />

easy for students to interpret. For example, let’s suppose we are teaching students to identify<br />

different types of columns. We have two visuals available for use: a photograph of a building<br />

with ionic columns and trees and people in the picture and a drawing of an ionic column.<br />

For introductory purposes, the drawing would be best. Once students have been introduced to<br />

different columns using the simpler representation, the photograph could be used to help<br />

students transfer what was learned to the more complex representation.


When one uses visuals that incorporate text it is essential to have legible text. The following<br />

elements need to be considered when using text in visuals:<br />

56<br />

<br />

Font style – Plain and simple (for projected<br />

media use sans serif style fonts)<br />

<br />

Special considerations for projected<br />

media (like PowerPoint):<br />

<br />

Font size – Should be large enough to be seen<br />

easily by students sitting in the back of a<br />

classroom when used with large groups. If the<br />

fonts are small, the graphic should be used for<br />

small groups only. When using PowerPoint or<br />

other projections, font size should be at least<br />

14 point for ease of reading by students<br />

when projected.<br />

❍ Use key phrases and words rather<br />

than paragraphs.<br />

❍ Use about six lines per slide (do not<br />

crowd lines on the screen).<br />

❍ Use graphics, animation, video to<br />

support topic.<br />

<br />

<br />

Use a combination of Upper and Lower case,<br />

not all upper case. Text that is all upper case is<br />

more difficult for readers to decode.<br />

Foreground/background contrast – the color<br />

of text should be quite distinct from the<br />

background color. The use of textured<br />

backgrounds (such as bricks) can hinder the<br />

clarity of the text. When using textured<br />

backgrounds make sure the text stands out<br />

clearly or box the text with a solid<br />

color background of sufficient<br />

contrast.<br />

❍ Motivational graphics and animation<br />

should be used sparingly.<br />

❍ Use screen transitions/animations<br />

when changing concepts (do not use<br />

for every screen).<br />

❍ Use text animations to gradually<br />

introduce information.<br />

❍ Use sound effects sparingly as they<br />

can distract learners.<br />

Auditory Media<br />

Auditory media provides learners with an additional means of learning material. We are used<br />

to listening to lectures, but audio materials can be used for other types of learning experiences.<br />

The first content areas that we consider as appropriate for auditory media are foreign language<br />

and music. However, auditory media can be used to provide auditory instruction for individual<br />

learners. Radio broadcasts, recordings of speeches, sound effects, and music can be used in<br />

other content areas when appropriate.<br />

Motion Media<br />

For the purposes of this discussion, video and animation are motion media. Video and<br />

animation can be delivered via VCR, laser disc, DVD player, and computer. In general, video<br />

can provide step by step demonstrations of skills, case studies for analysis, or direct instruction.<br />

Animation can present simplified examples of complex processes that would be difficult to<br />

capture with video.


Chart of Media Use Applications and Suggestions<br />

Media Techniques Uses<br />

57<br />

Non-projected<br />

Chalk or white board<br />

Real objects<br />

•Write only short phrases or words.<br />

•Write with side to board (half facing<br />

board and half facing students).<br />

•Print or write clearly.<br />

• Appropriate for full class presentation as<br />

long as text is large enough to be seen<br />

in the rear of the classroom.<br />

• Pass small objects.<br />

• Point out specific details for notation<br />

by students.<br />

•Note key points or equations during<br />

lecture.<br />

• List student ideas as students produce<br />

those ideas during discussions or<br />

brainstorming.<br />

• Use as reference point during lecture.<br />

• Use to stimulate student discussion<br />

or analysis prior to direct instruction.<br />

• Demonstrate operation or use of object.<br />

Flip Chart or Easel<br />

• Write only short phrases or words when<br />

not prepared prior to instruction.<br />

• Write with side to board (half facing<br />

board and half facing students).<br />

• Print or write clearly.<br />

• For prepared visuals, a pointer or ruler<br />

can help focus students’ attention to<br />

specific elements within the visual.<br />

• Appropriate for full class presentation<br />

as long as the text is large enough to be<br />

seen in the rear of the classroom.<br />

•Note key points or equations during<br />

lecture.<br />

• List student’s ideas as students produce<br />

those ideas during discussions or<br />

brainstorming.<br />

• Have students use in small groups for<br />

making notes to present to class.<br />

• Have visuals placed on easel (for<br />

example a graph, photograph, or<br />

drawing that helps clarify the topic).<br />

Poster<br />

• Place where the poster will be steady<br />

(holding up by hand is inappropriate).<br />

Posters are best placed on an easel, on<br />

a chalkboard tray, or tacked to<br />

corkboard.<br />

• Use to introduce new topic.<br />

• Use to close topic.<br />

• Provide a reference point during lecture.<br />

• Provide a starting point for student<br />

discussion.<br />

Photographs and<br />

Drawings<br />

• Regular size photographs and drawings<br />

are best used for small groups and by<br />

individual learners.<br />

• To stimulate discussion among students.<br />

• To have students analyze information<br />

from the photographs or drawings.<br />

• To provide concrete reference for<br />

students when being introduced to a<br />

concept or reviewing a concept.


Media Techniques Uses<br />

Projected<br />

58<br />

Overhead<br />

transparencies<br />

LCD Projections<br />

ELMO Projections<br />

Auditory<br />

CDs, tapes, and<br />

radio<br />

• Follow visual design principles.<br />

• Follow the elements for using text in<br />

PowerPoint stated above.<br />

• Prepare graphic and extensive text<br />

overhead transparencies in advance<br />

of class.<br />

• Use permanent pens when creating<br />

transparencies in advance.<br />

• Can be used to project video tapes<br />

from VCR or computer based<br />

information.<br />

• Can be used to project photographs,<br />

drawings, small graphs, maps, tables,<br />

and real objects. This allows large<br />

class use of these items.<br />

• An ELMO projector can also be<br />

used to switch between projecting<br />

real objects, and photographs, and<br />

video and computer based materials.<br />

• Make sure that volume will reach all<br />

students and that the sound is clear.<br />

• Use to provide visual focus during<br />

lectures.<br />

• Use blank transparencies to make notes<br />

during student discussion and/or<br />

brainstorming.<br />

• Use blank transparencies for students to<br />

put problem solutions on to share and<br />

discuss with classmates.<br />

• PowerPoint presentation to support<br />

lecture.<br />

• Interactive PowerPoint presentation<br />

(designed with built in discussion<br />

questions for students).<br />

• To show videos for demonstration<br />

purposes.<br />

• To show animations to demonstrate<br />

complex concepts.<br />

• To show video case studies for analysis.<br />

• Refer to photographs, drawings, and<br />

real objects for uses.<br />

• To provide examples of pronunciation.<br />

• Individualized study.<br />

• Analysis activities.<br />

Video tape<br />

DVD<br />

Motion<br />

• Can be shown using a VCR with a<br />

television or with an LCD projector<br />

(check to see if the projector needs<br />

speakers when used with the VCR).<br />

• Can be shown using a DVD player on<br />

a television, or DVD player with<br />

LCD projector, or computer with<br />

DVD drive with LCD projector.<br />

• Present new information.<br />

• Provide demonstrations.<br />

• Provide video case studies.<br />

• Provide vicarious experience through<br />

documentaries and dramatizations.<br />

• Provide individualized instruction.<br />

• Same as video tape.


Media Techniques Uses<br />

Motion<br />

59<br />

Computer-based<br />

animation<br />

Computer-based<br />

video<br />

• When not used for individualized<br />

instruction, the animations are<br />

projected using an LCD projector.<br />

• When not used for individualized<br />

instruction, the video can be<br />

projected using an LCD projector.<br />

• Present a simulation of a process<br />

(like cell division).<br />

• Present a motivational animation.<br />

• Same as video tape.<br />

Computers and Instruction<br />

Computers can be used to help students address a variety of objectives. Taylor (1980) divided<br />

computer use in educational settings into three major categories: tools, tutors, and tutees.<br />

Tools are applications that can be used by instructors or by students to create products.<br />

Word-processing is the most common of these. However, depending upon the field of study<br />

others are just as important. Auto-cad, graphic programs, and statistical analysis packages are<br />

just a few that are appropriate in different areas of study.<br />

Tutees are primarily programming languages and authoring software. Use of tutees is dependent<br />

upon the area of study.<br />

Tutors as a category covers a variety of software that can be considered instructional:<br />

Drill and practice software is software that provides students with practice for skills that have<br />

been previously taught. For example, a program that provided students with practice solving<br />

equations. An example of a drill and practice program can be found at:<br />

http://science.widener.edu/svb/tutorial/sigfigurescsn7.html (Significant Figures).<br />

Notice the program presents problems for the student to solve.<br />

Tutorial software as a specific category under tutors describes software that is used to<br />

introduce new information and requires learner input to which the program responds in ways<br />

that helps the student master the material. For example, students are presented with<br />

animations and audio that explains different types of chemical bonding. Students would<br />

watch the animations as a voice would tell them what was happening. The next text might<br />

be used to describe how one would complete chemical equations based upon what was shown<br />

in the animations. Examples of equations and their solutions would be provided. Throughout<br />

the introduction of the materials students would be asked questions to evaluate their<br />

understanding of the concepts. When students demonstrate understanding, the tutorial<br />

would introduce another type of bonding or more complex equations to solve. When<br />

students respond incorrectly, the tutorial would reteach the information in a different way.<br />

An example of a tutorial that provides pretesting (question by question) and presents<br />

information when asked for or as reteaching can be found at:<br />

http://www.biology.arizona.edu/immunology/tutorials/immunology/main.html<br />

(Introduction to Immunology).<br />

Simulations are also a type of tutor.<br />

One type of simulation shows students how something works and does not require<br />

student input. An example of this can be seen at http://www.med.ucla.edu/wilkes/inex.htm<br />

(The Auscultation Assistant) which is a web-site that allows medical students to hear<br />

heart and breathing sounds of different types.


The second type of simulation is one that can be considered problem-solving. Students are<br />

given “real world” or “authentic” type problems to address. These can be simple problems in<br />

which the student provides information for variables and then sees whether the solution<br />

succeeded. An example of this is a “Gas Simulation” which can be found at:<br />

http://intro.chem.okstate.edu/2001ACS/MoLEGasLawManual.pdf. The web address gives<br />

directions on how to use the simulation and the link to the simulation. Students input<br />

information and then see how that impacts the gas molecules.<br />

Simulations Problem-solving software also falls under the category of tutors. Students are<br />

presented with logic problems or other types of problems such as visual analysis problems<br />

(similar to jigsaw puzzles). These are simulations when they use “authentic” or “real world”<br />

situations so that this area overlaps simulations. An example of problem-solving software<br />

(which is also a game) is found at: http://www.shockwave.com/sw/content/picturepyramid and<br />

is called Picture Pyramid.<br />

Simulations Games are also considered under the tutorial category. Consider a game such as<br />

hangman (there are computer versions). Games have individuals compete either against<br />

themselves, the computer or another person. Usually there is a score.<br />

60<br />

As you can see from the above categories, software often combines elements for different<br />

categories. A tutorial can have elements of drill and practice and problem-solving combined<br />

with the direct instruction. Drill and practice can be combined with game elements to make it<br />

more palatable to students. Taylor’s categories did not include the use of the Internet. As can<br />

be seen from the reading above, his categories show up on the Internet. The tutors are quite<br />

evident but so too are tools. Students can access a variety of databases from disks, intranets,<br />

and the Internet (the government ERIC database is just one example). The use of the Internet<br />

includes more than the publicly accessible information and programs, it also includes courses<br />

that must be accessed using logins and passwords. One such program is BlackBoard.<br />

Platforms such as BlackBoard are used for on-campus course support or on-line course delivery<br />

over the Internet. BlackBoard contains several tools that can be used for either purpose. All<br />

students registered in the class are usually automatically enrolled in the course shell for the<br />

appropriate semester. This allows the instructor to e-mail students without looking up addresses.<br />

If the instructor prepares students and requires that they log into BlackBoard (for face-to-face<br />

courses), announcements can be placed that appear when the student opens the course. In<br />

addition, there are live chat capabilities (synchronous conversation), discussion board<br />

capabilities (asynchronous conversation), course document areas, assessment (quiz and test)<br />

capabilities, and the ability to place student grades in a format that students can access.<br />

As a support for face-to-face courses, it can be used to post the syllabus, provide live links to<br />

web-based materials that students will use in the course, and provide a common location for<br />

assignments and additional course documents.<br />

While the delivery method is different from face-to-face delivery similar concerns about active<br />

student involvement apply. As an on-line delivery system, usually all materials are placed in<br />

the shell, including quizzes. However, some instructors choose to put all materials on a CD<br />

and have the students use the shell only for uploading assignments and participating in<br />

on-line discussions.


Incorporating Instructional Technology<br />

By Karen Smith-Gratto, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Center for Professional Development,<br />

School of Education<br />

61<br />

Systematic planning of instruction is one of the elements of instructional technology. This has<br />

been discussed previously so in this section, how to consider the use of media and other<br />

technological tools will be addressed. Once you know what your goals and objectives are for<br />

the instruction (which can include state or professional organization standards), you establish<br />

learning activities. Not all goals and objectives require the use of media or technology,<br />

however, by examining the type of learning expected, you can best determine what type of<br />

media or technological tools would be appropriate. In addition, the learning activities and<br />

methods chosen will also influence the choice of the most appropriate media or technological<br />

tools. Refer to the Chart for Media Use and in the section on Computers and Instruction to<br />

help determine which are most appropriate.<br />

Additional Resources on Teaching and Learning<br />

Brightman, H. J., & Bahda, Y. K. (n.d.). Master Teacher Programs. Retrieved: February 14,<br />

2004. http://www.masterteacherprogram.com/ This source provides basic information<br />

about teaching and learning styles.<br />

Campbell, L., Campbell, B., & Dickinson, D. (2004). Teaching and Learning Through Multiple<br />

Intelligences. 3rd ed. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. This book provides concrete examples of<br />

activities that can be used to help students access learning through the use of different<br />

learning activities.<br />

Chang, D., Dooley, L., & Tuovinen, J.E. (2002). Gestalt Theory in Visual Design – A New Look<br />

at an Old Subject. Paper presented at: Seventh World Conference on Computers in<br />

Education. Copenhagen, July 29 – August 3, 2001. Retrieved: February 14, 2004<br />

http://crpit.com/confpapers/CRPITV8Chang.pdf This article provides insights into<br />

using this theory to improve the visual design for instructional materials.<br />

Heinich, R., Molenda, M., Russell, J.D., & Smaldino, S. E. Instructional Media and Technologies<br />

for Learning. (7th edition). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill-Prentice-Hall. This book<br />

provides theoretical and practical information about the use of media and computers in<br />

educational settings.<br />

Indiana <strong>University</strong>. (2004). CTL Learning Styles Site. Retrieved: February 14, 2004.<br />

http://www.indstate.edu/ctl/styles/ls1.html This web-site provides information about<br />

learning styles.<br />

Lajoie, S. P. & Derry, S. J. (Eds.). (1993). Computers as Cognitive Tools. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence<br />

Erlbaum Associates, Publishers. This book discusses how computers can be used to<br />

address higher level learning objectives.<br />

Leflore, D. & Smith-Gratto, K. (1999). Using learning theory to improve instructional<br />

computer presentations. American Association of Behavioral and Social Sciences Journal, 2.<br />

Retrieved: February 14, 2004. http://www.aabss.org/journal1999/f16Leflore.html This<br />

article provides theoretical and practical ways to design PowerPoint presentations to<br />

encourage active participation by students.<br />

Lever-Duffy, J., McDonald, J. B., & Mizell, A. P. (2003). Teaching and Learning with Technology.<br />

Boston:Allyn and Bacon. This book provides information about using media in<br />

educational settings with emphasis on computer uses.


Multimedia Educational Resource for Learning and Online Teaching (MERLOT). Retrieved:<br />

February 15, 2004. This is a data base created for university instructors in many different<br />

fields.The sites listed as instructional sites are reviewed and described. This is an<br />

excellent resource for finding computer-based resources to enhance learning.<br />

62<br />

New Horizons for Learning. (2002). Multiple Intelligences. Retrieved: February 14, 2004.<br />

http://www.newhorizons.org/strategies/mi/front_mi.htm This web-site provides<br />

information about Gardner’s theory of multiple intelligences.<br />

Shin, S., Smith, S. & Job, K. (n.d.). Visual Design of Web Pages. Retrieved: February 14, 2004.<br />

http://www.people.memphis.edu/~kjob/wbi/Index.html#indextopofpage This web-site<br />

provides information about visual design principles. While the authors say that the<br />

principles are for the design of webpages the principles apply to other forms of visual<br />

media, too.<br />

Teaching Methods & Instructional Strategies – Linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of<br />

Georgia.<br />

Teaching with Technology – Linked with permission from The Penn <strong>State</strong> Teacher II: Learning<br />

to Teach; Teaching to Learn, a publication of Schreyer Institute for Teaching Excellence<br />

at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

<strong>University</strong> of Delaware - Center for Teaching Effectiveness<br />

Full-length articles on these topics were linked with permission from the TA Handbook -<br />

• Interactive Lecturing<br />

• Audiovisual Aids<br />

• Instructional Technologies<br />

• Student Participation<br />

• Internal Student Involvement<br />

• Active Student Involvement<br />

• Questioning Strategies<br />

• Instructional Discussion<br />

• Choosing Groups<br />

• Laboratory Instruction<br />

• Demonstrations<br />

• Teaching Problem Solving Skills<br />

(See also <strong>University</strong> of Washington)<br />

• Problem Based Learning


Teaching Through Discussion<br />

By Marihelen Glass, Ph.D., CPH<br />

Professor of Horticulture<br />

School of Agricultural and Environmental Sciences<br />

63<br />

Class discussion can be a powerful tool<br />

for teaching and learning, but good<br />

discussions rarely happen by accident.<br />

Discussions should be interesting, lively,<br />

and most important — used as an<br />

effective tool for helping students<br />

learn. Good discussions are prepared in<br />

advance. As the instructor, you need<br />

to prepare yourself before a discussion<br />

takes place.<br />

Good discussions are purposefully led.<br />

Develop strategies to keep the discussion moving.<br />

What do you want students to learn from this<br />

discussion?<br />

Clarify your goals for the discussion.<br />

Plan guiding questions for the discussion.<br />

Design activities that will prepare students to discuss.<br />

Provide focused study questions before class.<br />

Post guiding questions prior to the discussion.<br />

Ask students to respond to the guiding<br />

questions, in writing or in small groups,<br />

prior to the discussion.<br />

Before the discussion, work with<br />

the students to set ground rules<br />

for participation, courtesy, and<br />

inclusiveness.<br />

During the discussion, ask<br />

questions that establish what<br />

students understand<br />

(comprehension and review)<br />

before asking them to do more<br />

complex or original thinking<br />

(apply or critique).<br />

Pause 5-10 seconds after a<br />

question so that students have<br />

time to formulate thoughtful<br />

responses.<br />

Ask follow-up questions that<br />

allow students to develop or<br />

clarify a response.<br />

Be aware of the effect of<br />

non-verbal cues such as eye<br />

contact, gestures, posture, and<br />

position in the room.<br />

After the discussion, provide a<br />

record or summary of key points<br />

as they have emerged, either<br />

orally or on the board.<br />

Draw connections between the day’s discussion and other topics students are learning in the<br />

course. Good discussions are assessed. How will you determine what students learned from the<br />

discussion? Leave time at the end of class for students to write key points from the discussion or<br />

list important questions that remain for them.<br />

Develop continuing assignments or quiz questions based on class discussions. Good discussions<br />

lead to more discussions. How will the next discussion build on the learning created in this<br />

discussion? Use students’ end-of-class comments or written responses to help you plan the next<br />

discussion. Then emphasize connections between the new topic and earlier discussions.<br />

Reference:<br />

Teaching and Learning Bulletin, Center for Instructional Development and Research.<br />

<strong>University</strong> of Washington.<br />

For further information on facilitating class discussions, see Frequently Asked Questions about<br />

Discussion, link provided with permission by Indiana <strong>University</strong>.


Planning A Class - Guidelines for Lectures<br />

By Kenneth H. Murray, Ph.D., PE<br />

Associate Vice Chancellor of Academic Affairs and<br />

Dean of Graduate Studies<br />

64<br />

Below are slides from a PowerPoint presentation that outline how to plan a class session by<br />

organizing the lesson and creating board notes that allow students to more easily follow the lesson.<br />

Planning A Class<br />

Lesson Organization<br />

and Board Notes<br />

ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />

A Structured Methodology for<br />

Organizing a Class<br />

✰ Formulate learning objectives<br />

Develop in-class learning activities.<br />

Prepare a lesson outline.<br />

Prepare “board notes.”<br />

Develop out-of-class learning activities.<br />

Select reading assignments.<br />

Develop homework assignments and projects.<br />

ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003


A Structured Methodology for<br />

Organizing a Class<br />

✰ Formulate learning objectives<br />

Develop in-class learning activities.<br />

Prepare a lesson outline.<br />

Prepare “board notes.”<br />

Develop out-of-class learning activities.<br />

Select reading assignments.<br />

Develop homework assignments and projects.<br />

65<br />

ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />

Prepare a Lesson Outline<br />

Identify major topics to be covered or learning<br />

activities to be performed.<br />

Typically 5 - 8 per class.<br />

Should address the lesson objectives.<br />

Determine the hierarchy of concepts.<br />

Determine a logical sequence.<br />

Plan visual aids and demonstrations.<br />

ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Some Ideas<br />

For sensory learners, include practical example<br />

problems (with real numbers).<br />

For visual learners, use sketches, graphs, pictures,<br />

demonstrations, and video clips.<br />

For inductive learners, work a problem or show an<br />

application first then develop the theory.<br />

For active learners, use small group exercises in class,<br />

and allow students to collaborate on homework.<br />

For global learners, discuss the relevance of the subject<br />

and relate it to concepts from other lessons and courses.<br />

ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003


Example Lesson Outline<br />

EM302, Lesson 16: WORK-ENERGY 1<br />

66<br />

I. Introduction<br />

II. In-class assessment quiz; review as<br />

necessary<br />

A. “Big Picture” where Work-Energy<br />

fits into EM302<br />

B. Scaler/Dot products<br />

III. Characteristics of Work-Energy<br />

Method<br />

IV. Derivation of W-E relationship from<br />

Newton’s Second Law<br />

A. Signs on energy terms<br />

B. Can use this relationship to solve<br />

for one unknown<br />

V. Identify forces/moments that “do<br />

work” and that “do not work”<br />

VI. Determine work due to:<br />

A. Weight<br />

B. Kinetic friction<br />

C. Springs (students do this and<br />

others for homework)<br />

VII. Unbalanced wheel on ramp example<br />

to demonstrate sign of work term.<br />

Use group work.<br />

VIII. Little Red Wagon (LRW) example solving<br />

a problem using entire W-E relationship<br />

A. Read the problem<br />

B. Draw the method<br />

C. Apply Priciples<br />

D. Use math to solve<br />

E. “Does the answer make sense?”<br />

IX. Homework/Next class<br />

Prepare “Board Notes”<br />

The entire classroom presentation recorded<br />

accurately on paper.<br />

Generally one board per topic.<br />

Plan use of colored chalk.<br />

Illustrates hierarchy of ideas.<br />

Enhances clarity, especially for graphics.<br />

Adds distinctive character to the class.<br />

ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />

Blank “Board Notes” Sheet


67<br />

Content of Board Notes<br />

All lesson content that you intend to discuss<br />

in class.<br />

May include:<br />

Administrative announcements.<br />

Visual aids and demonstrations.<br />

Questions.<br />

Transitions.<br />

ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />

Why Are Transitions Important?<br />

Integrate discrete topics into a coherent whole.<br />

Establish relationships between topics.<br />

Establish relationships between a given topic,<br />

prior knowledge, and the “big picture”.<br />

ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003


Using “Board Notes”<br />

68<br />

Preparation:<br />

Facilitates lesson organization.<br />

Serves as a rehearsal for class.<br />

Use for reference during class.<br />

Frees up your hands.<br />

Frees up a lot of RAM.<br />

Use a record of what you taught.<br />

ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />

Classroom<br />

Assessment<br />

Technique<br />

Approximate Analogy<br />

Board Notes are to a Class Presentation<br />

as _________________ is to __________________<br />

ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />

A Structured Methodology for<br />

Organizing a Class<br />

✰ Formulate learning objectives<br />

Develop in-class learning activities.<br />

Prepare a lesson outline.<br />

Prepare “board notes.”<br />

Develop out-of-class learning activities.<br />

Select reading assignments.<br />

Develop homework assignments and projects.<br />

ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003


Notes on Effective Lecturing<br />

By Mrs. Susan M. Payne<br />

Research Assistant<br />

School of Graduate Studies<br />

69<br />

In your role as a Teaching Assistant, you may be called upon to present a lecture. Your purpose<br />

should not simply be to transmit information – a book can do this more efficiently. Think of<br />

lecturing as a useful way to provide structure, organize scattered material, pace student<br />

learning, and reinforce assigned reading by providing an alternative perspective or source of<br />

information. A few tips to make lecturing easier and more effective include:<br />

• Speak clearly and loudly enough to<br />

be heard. This may seem obvious,<br />

but according to undergraduates,<br />

some TAs are ‘mumblers.’ Before you<br />

begin, you might suggest that people<br />

signal with a raised hand if they<br />

can’t hear you.<br />

• Avoid distracting mannerisms<br />

including verbal tics like “um” or<br />

“you know,” or methodically<br />

straightening your notes or adjusting<br />

your tie.<br />

• Provide an introduction. Begin with<br />

a concise statement, something that<br />

will preview the lecture. Give the<br />

listeners a “map” of where you are<br />

going during the remainder of your<br />

presentation. Refer to previous<br />

lessons to attract and focus the<br />

attention of your audience on what<br />

is to come.<br />

• Repeat your points in two or three<br />

different ways. Your listeners may<br />

not have heard or understood the<br />

first time, or they may need more<br />

time to write your points down.<br />

• Present an outline. Use the<br />

chalkboard, an overhead<br />

transparency, or better yet – a<br />

handout. Then be sure that you refer<br />

to the outline as you move from<br />

point to point in your lecture so the<br />

students do not get ‘lost’ or lose<br />

sight of the big picture.<br />

• Emphasize principles and<br />

generalizations. Research suggests<br />

that these are what people really<br />

remember—and they are probably<br />

what you really want to teach.<br />

• Include examples or concrete ideas.<br />

Use specific examples that help both<br />

understanding and remembering.<br />

• Use short sentences. Very long or<br />

overly complex sentences are more<br />

difficult to understand when<br />

listening than when reading.<br />

• Stress important points. This can be<br />

done with your tone of voice and by<br />

being explicit (e.g., “Write this<br />

down”; “This is important”; “This<br />

will be on the test.”).<br />

• Pause often. Don’t rush through your<br />

material. Give your listeners time to<br />

think and to write.<br />

• Make eye contact with each<br />

student at least once during the<br />

lecture. This personalizes the<br />

lecture and increases a student’s<br />

sense of involvement.<br />

• Do not read from your lecture notes<br />

or from your presentation slides if it<br />

is a PowerPoint presentation. Use a<br />

set of guide notes to make certain<br />

you cover all intended items.<br />

Remember these points about the style, content, and clarity of your presentation and your<br />

students will gain maximum benefit from the lecture.<br />

For further information on lecturing, see Improving Lecturing Skills: Some Insights From<br />

Speech Communication, linked with permission by Indiana <strong>University</strong>.


Teaching Laboratory Sections<br />

By Vallie Guthrie, Ph.D.<br />

Director<br />

Greensboro Area Math/Science Education Center (GAMSEC)<br />

70<br />

The purpose of laboratory instruction is to allow students to actively participate in real science<br />

experiments and processes of science, and to allow them to discover science phenomena for<br />

themselves. Lab classes help students gain competence in the following science processes:<br />

1. Stating and delimiting problems<br />

2. Controlling variables<br />

3. Controlling conditions<br />

4. Making measurements<br />

5. Tabulating and interpreting data<br />

Genuine discovery or problem solving laboratory experiences are generally preferred to the<br />

structured ‘cookbook-type’ exercises. The discovery/problem solving activities allow students to<br />

construct their own knowledge and to minimize the idea that the scientific method is a<br />

magical route to scientific discovery. It becomes, instead, a method whose effectiveness is<br />

determined to a large extent by the care with which disciplined, but often quite ordinary<br />

persons find answers to ordinary as well as extraordinary problems.<br />

Typical Daily Activities in the Classroom<br />

Start and end on time.<br />

6. Completing laboratory reports<br />

7. Drawing conclusions<br />

8. Solving problems related to experiments<br />

9. Developing laboratory techniques<br />

Take roll every class period. Keep your roll book up-to-date and in a secure location. Make a<br />

photocopy of the pages periodically and keep at home or another safe place as a backup.<br />

Students cannot receive credit for completing an experiment if they did not attend the class<br />

and perform the experiment themselves under the supervision of the assigned instructor.<br />

Prepare yourself well and outline in writing (being very specific) what you are going to teach.<br />

Share your plans with an experienced colleague or mentor and practice before the lesson.<br />

Outline your goals for the class period on the chalkboard or overhead for the students to<br />

follow. This provides a focus for students as the lesson unfolds.<br />

Start each class with a brief recap or summary of the previous class. This may include<br />

returning corrected lab reports to students, reviewing the purpose of the experiment,<br />

providing answers to key activity questions and exercises, and summarizing scores made<br />

by the class.<br />

Then initiate an ‘assessment of prior knowledge’ activity or question to determine what/how<br />

much students already know about the subject matter to be taught or experiment to be<br />

performed in the forthcoming class period.<br />

When using the chalkboard or overhead projector, make sure it is clean, uncluttered, and<br />

easily visible by all students in the room.<br />

When lecturing or discussing material with the class, stand to the side so students can view<br />

what you have on the chalkboard or overhead.<br />

Look into their faces as you talk and look for signs of comprehension, confusion, problems,<br />

etc. as you cover the material.<br />

If students do not ask questions, plan your lessons so that you can ask THEM questions along<br />

the way to determine if they are getting a grasp of the material you are covering.


Make sure your voice projects so everyone in the room can hear adequately.<br />

Remember that students retain only 10% of what you say in a lecture, but by showing some<br />

visual element or action you can increase that retention to about 30%. By involving them in<br />

some activity related to the learning that retention of knowledge increases to about 50%.<br />

Students learn/retain the most (around 90%) when they are teaching other students. Design<br />

a strategy for getting students to work in study groups where they can learn from each other.<br />

71<br />

Conclude each class with a prepared summary. This means you should stop “teaching” about<br />

10 minutes before the end of class so that you have time to summarize what you have covered<br />

that day and answer any questions that arise. For lab classes, allow enough time for students to<br />

complete the experiment.<br />

Evaluate yourself after each class and keep a record of your findings. Make note of errors so<br />

you will not repeat them in future teaching of same concepts. Also note what you did<br />

exceptionally well. Review your prepared notes and mark anything that left students confused<br />

or where you noticed problems. This will help you prepare for the lesson differently next time.<br />

Reviewing the Experiment for the Day<br />

The Pre-Laboratory Discussion is designed to introduce the experiment for the day, its objectives,<br />

and to share safety tips, laboratory tips, etc. Be careful not to tell the students so much that they<br />

do not have the enthusiasm to carry out the experiment. The following are the components of<br />

the pre-laboratory discussion:<br />

Write the TITLE of the<br />

experiment and the<br />

PURPOSE on the board.<br />

Review the OBJECTIVES<br />

for the experiment.<br />

Safety is the NUMBER<br />

ONE priority in the<br />

laboratory! The instructor<br />

must closely monitor<br />

students by moving through<br />

the room as experiments are<br />

being conducted. NEVER<br />

leave students alone in the<br />

Give a definition of terms<br />

and explanation of the undergirding<br />

science of the<br />

experiment.<br />

Provide safety tips (see below).<br />

Review clean-up procedures<br />

and requirements.<br />

Safety Tips<br />

lab when experiments are<br />

taking place.<br />

Students and instructor must<br />

wear goggles if there will be<br />

any heating, hammering,<br />

etc.<br />

Clean Up Procedures<br />

Decide and announce what<br />

is due at the end of the lab<br />

and what to do if they<br />

cannot complete the entire<br />

experiment in the specific<br />

time period.<br />

The hood must be turned on<br />

if there is any heating and<br />

all heating must be done<br />

under the hood.<br />

No solids should be poured<br />

into the sinks. The sinks will<br />

be checked before and after<br />

each lab.<br />

Cleaner laboratories are a 2003-2004 focus!<br />

They will be inspected after each laboratory<br />

class and a condition report will be prepared<br />

and provided to the chemistry chairperson<br />

each week.<br />

It is easier to require students to clean -up<br />

after themselves than to do it yourself.<br />

All glassware should be washed.<br />

All bottles/jars should be wiped with a paper<br />

towel to remove spills. All desktops should be<br />

wiped down.<br />

All lids and tops for chemicals must be<br />

returned and screwed on tightly.<br />

All equipment should be returned to desk<br />

drawers or other designated areas.<br />

The hood should be turned off.<br />

Every student must turn in the lab report for<br />

the experiment performed that day before<br />

leaving the lab.


Teaching Tips<br />

Move around the classroom and monitor<br />

students as they perform experiments and<br />

procedures. Move from group to group and<br />

observe. Ask questions. Look for safety in<br />

progress. Look for examples of students not<br />

having read the experiment or for students<br />

who have the answers and are not doing the<br />

experiment. Review the wording of the<br />

answers to questions the students are writing.<br />

When you note an answer that is not correct<br />

or well stated, ask the student to review the<br />

answer again.<br />

Some type of laboratory report should be<br />

required of all students and for all<br />

experiments completed in the lab. Laboratory<br />

reports or notebooks must be corrected by the<br />

instructor and returned to each student on a<br />

regular basis. Students need constant and<br />

periodic evaluation of their work in order to<br />

know whether they correctly understand the<br />

required course work or not.<br />

72<br />

Lost and Found<br />

If any personal items (textbooks, notebooks, calculators, etc.) are left by students, leave<br />

them with the secretary in the department each day. Inform students that this is the<br />

procedure and they should check with the secretary if they are missing an item.<br />

Accidents and Incidents<br />

All accidents and incidents must be<br />

reported to the department chair as soon<br />

as they occur.<br />

Write down the name, SS#, local address<br />

and phone # of the student(s) involved,<br />

the course # and section #, date, time,<br />

name of instructor, and title of<br />

experiment. Then describe exactly what<br />

happened and what you did in response.<br />

Students are not to be allowed to use<br />

profanity, be disrespectful, or pose any<br />

danger to the instructor, their classmates,<br />

or themselves during class. The instructor<br />

should address all such cases by writing it<br />

up and notifying the chairperson or<br />

supervising instructor.<br />

A first aid course will be provided by the<br />

course coordinator at an agreed upon<br />

time/place and all instructors are required<br />

to attend.<br />

Quizzes and the Final Examination<br />

For laboratory classes, two<br />

quizzes will be given on<br />

the dates listed in the<br />

schedule of experiments.<br />

An experiment is<br />

scheduled after each quiz.<br />

Each instructor will write<br />

the quiz for each class and<br />

remind students of quizzes<br />

during the pre-laboratory<br />

discussion two weeks prior<br />

to each quiz.<br />

Make sure students have<br />

received their corrected<br />

experimental papers prior<br />

to each.<br />

The final exam covers all<br />

experiments done in and<br />

out of class. It is given on<br />

Tuesday and Thursday of<br />

the last week of the<br />

semester at the time the<br />

class regularly meets.<br />

There should be a review<br />

session for the final<br />

examination.<br />

Teaching Laboratory Sections - Linked with permission from Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

(Scroll about half way down through linked article to locate this section)


Safety Considerations<br />

By Etta C. Gravely, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Department of Chemistry,<br />

College of Arts and Sciences<br />

73<br />

To achieve safe conditions for students in the classroom and other laboratory workers in the<br />

laboratory setting, evacuation routes should be prominently and permanently posted in every<br />

classroom, laboratory and other appropriate locations throughout the building. If this is not<br />

prominently displayed so that the Graduate Teaching Assistant (GTA) can direct the students<br />

as to where they are to exit the building and assembly outside of the building, the GTA should<br />

request that the building representative or safety officer provide the information to them.<br />

GTAs should know the location of and how to operate the fire exits, telephones and alarms in<br />

the buildings where they are teaching. For each group exiting, designate one or two persons to<br />

be responsible for counting those present after exiting and report the information to the<br />

individual in charge. No one should return to the building until the individual in charge<br />

authorizes the students to do so.<br />

Before doing demonstrations in the classroom, the GTA should review the Material Safety<br />

Data Sheets (MSDS), which provide information on the hazards and precautions for<br />

chemicals that are normally used in an industrial workplace. Please note that some of the<br />

information included in an MSDS may not apply to the chemical when it is used, handled or<br />

stored as a laboratory chemical. Consult the ACS Publication “Safety in the Academic<br />

Laboratories” for a list of the Common MSDS Errors regarding academic settings.<br />

Proper ventilation is essential for demonstrations producing airborne toxic substances (dusts,<br />

mists and fumes) that are considered to be chronic toxins. If someone needs medical attention,<br />

call campus security, the laboratory technician in charge, and the medical personnel at the<br />

Sebastian Health Center (334-7880). The laboratory technician will arrange for someone<br />

knowledgeable to accompany the victim to get help in the event of an accident. Report all<br />

accidents and near misses to your supervisor and the building safety officer. Maintain records of<br />

all accidents, including those requiring only minor medical treatment. If a student causes an<br />

accident or a near miss, require the student to write a report indicating how the student thinks<br />

it could have been prevented. File this report with your supervisor and the building safety officer.<br />

The laboratory instructor must be in the laboratory during the entire laboratory period.<br />

Do not allow untrained students or visitors to work with chemical. Prior to each laboratory<br />

session, discuss with the students the possible hazards involved in the specific experiment.<br />

Model appropriate protective equipment and insist that each student wear the same protective<br />

equipment. Inform students to report unsafe acts engaged in by other students to you.<br />

Apprise students of the location and use of safety equipment and facilities such as exits, safety<br />

showers and eyewash fountains. Ascertain from each student the chemicals that they are<br />

known to be allergic or sensitive to. Also inquire if students have any medical conditions that<br />

may be complicated by exposure to certain chemicals.<br />

During the pre-laboratory discussions, model or illustrate the set-up of equipment required for<br />

the experiment. Illustrate the proper method for detecting the odor of a non-toxic chemical.<br />

Laboratory Safety Guidelines<br />

(Extracted from the Student Safety Contract, Department of Chemistry, N.C. A&T <strong>State</strong><br />

<strong>University</strong>)<br />

Conduct yourself in a responsible manner at all times in the laboratory.<br />

Follow all written and verbal instructions carefully. If you do not understand a direction or<br />

part of a procedure, ask the instructor before proceeding.<br />

Never work alone. No student may work in the laboratory without the instructor present.


Do not touch any equipment, chemicals, or other materials in the laboratory area until you<br />

are instructed to do so.<br />

Any time chemicals, heat, or glassware are used, students will wear laboratory glasses or goggles.<br />

There will be no exceptions to this rule! Safety glasses are provided for each student upon<br />

checking into the laboratory. It is the student’s responsibility to bring the safety glasses to each lab.<br />

Do not eat food, drink beverages, or chew gum in the laboratory. Do not use laboratory<br />

glassware as containers for food or beverages.<br />

Dress properly during a laboratory activity. Long hair, dangling jewelry, and loose or baggy<br />

clothing are a hazard in the laboratory. Long hair must be tied back and dangling jewelry and<br />

loose or baggy clothing must be secured. Shoes must completely cover the foot. No sandals<br />

allowed.<br />

Contact lenses should not be worn in the laboratory.<br />

Be prepared for your work in the laboratory. Read and complete all pre-lab assignments prior to<br />

coming to the laboratory. Never fool around in the laboratory. Horseplay, practical jokes, and<br />

pranks are dangerous and prohibited.<br />

Observe good housekeeping practices. Work areas should be kept clean and orderly at all times.<br />

Bring only your laboratory instructions, lab notebooks, worksheets and/or reports to the work area.<br />

Dispose of all chemical waste properly. Sinks are to be used only for water and those solutions<br />

designated by the instructor. Solid chemicals, metals, filter paper, and all other insoluble materials<br />

are to be disposed of in the proper waste containers, not in the sink.<br />

Keep hands away from face, eyes, mouth, and body while using chemicals. Wash you hands<br />

thoroughly after performing all experiments. Clean, rinse, and wipe dry all work surfaces and<br />

apparatus at the end of the experiment. Return all equipment clean and in working order to the<br />

proper storage area.<br />

Dispose of all broken glassware in the designated glass receptacles only.<br />

Experiments must be personally monitored at all times. You will be provided a laboratory station<br />

at which to work. Do not wander around the room, distract other students, or interfere with the<br />

laboratory experiments of others.<br />

Students are never permitted in the chemistry storeroom or the chemical preparation area.<br />

Know the locations and operating procedures of all safety equipment including the first aid kit,<br />

eyewash station, safety shower, fire extinguisher, and fire blanket. Know where the fire alarm and<br />

the exits are located.<br />

All chemicals in the laboratory are to be considered dangerous. Do not touch, taste, or smell any<br />

chemicals unless specifically instructed to do so. The proper technique for smelling chemical<br />

fumes will be demonstrated to you.<br />

Never return unused chemicals to their original containers.<br />

Never use mouth suction to fill a pipet. Use a rubber bulb or pipeter.<br />

Report any accident (spill, breakage, etc.) or injury (cut, burn, etc.) to the instructor immediately.<br />

If a chemical should splash in your eye(s) or on your skin, immediately flush with running water<br />

from the eyewash station or the safety shower for at least 20 minutes. Notify the instructor<br />

immediately.<br />

Exercise extreme caution when using a gas burner. Take care that hair, clothing, and hands are a<br />

safe distance from the flame at all times. Never reach over an exposed flame.<br />

Never leave a lit burner unattended. Never leave anything that is being heated or is visibly<br />

reacting unattended. Always turn off the burner or hot plate when it is not in use.<br />

Heated materials and glass remain very hot for a long period of time. Do not place any hot<br />

apparatus directly on the laboratory desk. Always use the wire gauze pad.<br />

NEVER sit on any laboratory counter surface! All aisles must be kept clear.<br />

74


Strategies to Enhance Learning<br />

By Anthony Graham, Ph.D.<br />

Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />

Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />

School of Education<br />

75<br />

It is important that Graduate Teaching Assistants (GTAs) vary their instructional methods<br />

and styles in the classroom to meet the needs of all learners. The GTA should set a goal to<br />

educate all students and their charge should be to find ways to include students in the learning<br />

process rather than ways to exclude them.<br />

The biggest error that most teachers make is they teach the way that they learned best. Thus, a<br />

teaching assistant who learns best through visual representations will often rely heavily on<br />

visual aids in the classroom. While this method may prove beneficial to some students, it can<br />

be dreadful to others. Consequently, you must make a conscientious effort to create a classroom<br />

environment that welcomes all students to the table of knowledge.<br />

Central to this idea of teaching all students are learning styles. There are two learning styles<br />

with which students possess when they enter the classroom -- analytic learning styles and<br />

relational learning styles. Students who are analytic learners feel comfortable using small pieces<br />

of information to build a larger picture. These students tend to focus on facts, and typically feel<br />

more comfortable working individually. Those students who are relational learners feel more<br />

comfortable beginning with the large picture and breaking it down into smaller parts.<br />

In order to reach each student regardless of learning style, GTAs must address the various<br />

learning modalities, or receptive learning styles, within their classroom instructional methods.<br />

There are three learning modalities that GTAs should recognize and address in their pedagogical<br />

practices: visual learning styles, auditory learning styles, and tactile (kinesthetic) learning<br />

styles. The classroom should be arranged in a manner that each student has the opportunity to<br />

receive information through one of these learning modalities.<br />

Although this task may seem overwhelming, GTAs can address these learning modalities with<br />

various teaching strategies that they implement during the planning stage of their courses.<br />

They should recognize that students who are visual learners prefer to receive information<br />

pictorially. Thus, classroom instruction that involves television or movie clips, paintings,<br />

drawings, charts, graphs, timelines, Internet sites, and drama/stage productions will help these<br />

students “see” the main idea of the instruction.<br />

Those students who are auditory learners will prefer to listen to material rather than read<br />

about them. Class lectures and discussions will benefit these students, as well as music or radio<br />

excerpts, speeches, and debates. Students who are kinesthetic learners prefer to be physically<br />

involved in the learning process, because they learn through touching, moving, and<br />

manipulating objects. Effective classroom instruction for these learners involves role playing,<br />

hands-on activities like labs and experiments, creating productions like plays or movies, or<br />

conducting fieldwork.<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistants who develop thoughtful lessons that are sensitive to each of<br />

these learning modalities into their classes often see the greatest gains in their students’<br />

performances. Students in these instructors’ classes often discuss how “fun” the class was or<br />

how engaged they were in the learning process, because the GTA kept the students at the<br />

center of the instruction rather than catering to his/her individual preferences. In addition,<br />

these GTAs put much thought and consideration into their lesson planning for the course. In<br />

order to address these students’ needs, it is imperative that you give much thought and<br />

consideration about the various mediums that you can use to address students’ learning<br />

modalities. Thus, GTAs who prepare properly will prevent their students’ poor performance.


Table of Suggested Instructional Activities for Learning Modalities<br />

Discipline Mathematics/ Physical Sciences Humanities/<br />

Modality<br />

Engineering/<br />

Social Sciences<br />

Technology<br />

76<br />

VISUAL<br />

Demonstrations<br />

Graphs, flow charts<br />

Projections<br />

Trajectories<br />

Vector diagrams<br />

Sketches<br />

Numerical examples<br />

Overhead transparency<br />

Demonstrations<br />

Simulations<br />

Concept maps<br />

Flowchart<br />

Colored chalk<br />

Films/Movies<br />

Field Observations<br />

Storyboards<br />

Paintings<br />

Drawings<br />

Films/Movies<br />

Television clips<br />

Multimedia presentations<br />

(PowerPoint, Frontpage)<br />

AUDITORY<br />

Teacher-led lectures<br />

Interactive lectures<br />

Verbal directives<br />

Descriptive problems<br />

Descriptive projects<br />

Group discussions<br />

Class discussions<br />

Peer conferences<br />

Instructor conferences<br />

Teacher-led lectures<br />

Interactive lectures<br />

Class discussions<br />

Group discussions<br />

Panel discussions<br />

Guest speakers<br />

Peer conferences<br />

Instructor conferences<br />

Speeches<br />

Teacher-led lectures<br />

Interactive lectures<br />

Panel discussions<br />

Class discussions<br />

Group discussions<br />

Case study discussions<br />

Debates<br />

Peer conferences<br />

<br />

<br />

Instructor conferences<br />

KINESTHETIC<br />

Lab experiments<br />

Poster presentations<br />

Peer teaching<br />

Graphing<br />

Proof work<br />

Project building<br />

Problem-solving<br />

activities<br />

Manipulatives<br />

Lab experiments<br />

Manipulatives<br />

Categorizing activities<br />

Creating pictures,<br />

drawings, and graphs<br />

Peer teaching<br />

Class presentations<br />

Games<br />

Poster presentations<br />

Field experiments<br />

Role playing<br />

Movie productions<br />

Interactive games<br />

Writing assignments<br />

(journals, one minute<br />

papers)<br />

Research<br />

Peer teaching<br />

Dance/movement<br />

Drama productions


In addition, effective GTAs use various strategies in their classroom to create a sense of<br />

community with their students. To achieve this end, you may want to consider the<br />

following ideas:<br />

77<br />

Involve students in the planning of your course: Make the course truly “student<br />

centered” by learning from the students what they want to learn within the course and<br />

how they would like to go about learning this information.<br />

Begin with what students know: Rather than assuming that all students are on the<br />

same playing field, determine exactly where students are in regard to course knowledge.<br />

Once accomplished, the effective Graduate Teaching Assistant can begin to plan<br />

creative and challenging lessons that will move the students from where they are to<br />

where the instructor (and the students) would like for them to be.<br />

Make material meaningful and relevant to the real world: The effective Graduate<br />

Teaching Assistant is able to connect the course content to the world in which students<br />

live. When students can make these connections, then the course material becomes |<br />

more meaningful to their lives.<br />

Allow immediate application of knowledge: Once students have been introduced to<br />

the course content, provide opportunities for them to apply that knowledge.<br />

Application exercises reinforces the content material. The key, however, is that the<br />

application exercises should be meaningful and authentic to the students’ lives.<br />

Provide immediate feedback: Students need to know how they are doing and where<br />

they need to improve. Effective Graduate Teaching Assistants provide ongoing feedback<br />

to their students that encourages them to reflect on their work and promotes positive<br />

change in their work behaviors. Thus, providing immediate, honest, and ongoing<br />

feedback benefits all learners.<br />

These specific strategies used in conjunction with varied pedagogical practices can help<br />

students learn at a maximal level, which is the outcome of all effective instruction.<br />

Additional Resources:<br />

Strategies to Enhance Learning - Linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of California –<br />

Santa Barbara, Office of Instructional Development.


Teaching Strategies for a Diverse Student Body<br />

By Gloria M. Palma, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Department of Human Performance and Leisure Studies,<br />

School of Education<br />

78<br />

Currently, culturally and linguistically diverse students in the classrooms face barriers and<br />

challenges to their academic success on a daily basis. Providing excellence in the classroom is<br />

difficult if the instructor and students have different styles of communication, cultural beliefs,<br />

and modes of interaction. In order to minimize these barriers to academic excellence in a class<br />

room characterized by a diverse student body, the following teaching strategies are suggested:<br />

Set high expectations for all students<br />

and specify task outcomes in terms of<br />

learning.<br />

Be sure to communicate clearly when<br />

giving directions and new information.<br />

Monitor student progress and provide<br />

immediate feedback relevant to<br />

student work.<br />

Feedback should be clear, specific, and<br />

task-related and should be given to all<br />

students regardless of race, gender, or<br />

color.<br />

Provide class activities that require<br />

“teamwork” or “cooperative learning.”<br />

Working in a group setting will build<br />

the students’ self-confidence and<br />

interpersonal skills.<br />

Provide opportunities for active learning<br />

that can be pursued independently or<br />

with peers. Class activities that require<br />

application of theories or concepts<br />

learned in class will motivate the<br />

students to engage in class work rather<br />

than sitting still listening to the<br />

instructor’s lecture the whole time.<br />

Use a variety of teaching styles. Students<br />

have individual learning styles and learn<br />

best in different ways. Although some<br />

students may be visual learners, others<br />

may use more of auditory or tactile modes<br />

of learning.<br />

Be culturally responsive as an<br />

instructor. Make ways to learn more<br />

about the diverse cultural and linguistic<br />

backgrounds of your students.<br />

Encourage students to ask questions.<br />

Provide lecture outlines or copies of<br />

PowerPoint presentations. Some students<br />

may need time to write class notes during<br />

a lecture. In order to avoid important<br />

points missed during a lecture, handing<br />

students an outline of the instructor’s<br />

lecture presentations will be very helpful.<br />

Give reasonable extended deadlines<br />

for class projects.<br />

Try to rephrase directions or<br />

instructions if unclear to students.<br />

Use instructional materials that are<br />

accurate and free of stereotypes.<br />

Utilize the resources within the<br />

classroom among various cultural and<br />

linguistic groups.<br />

Encourage peer assisted learning<br />

and/or group studies.<br />

In addition to learning style preferences, students also have differences in terms of gender,<br />

sexual orientation, religious beliefs, learning abilities and disabilities, and minority vs. majority<br />

social status. Teaching strategies that address these differences are outlined in charts that are<br />

linked below to provide you with ideas on how to organize and plan instruction to address<br />

these differences:<br />

Linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of California – Santa Barbara - under Chapter 3 -<br />

Strategies to Enhance Learning – are the following articles:<br />

Gender socialization<br />

Students with learning disabilities<br />

Sexual orientation and religion<br />

Students with minority status<br />

Addressing value conflicts in the classroom<br />

Non-native speakers of English (ESL)


Using Your Voice Effectively<br />

By Robin Guill Liles, Ph.D.<br />

Assistant Professor<br />

Department of Human Development and Services,<br />

School of Education<br />

79<br />

Of importance to most teaching assistants is responsible pedagogy surrounding a specific content<br />

area; and in most university environments, these young academicians are uniquely poised to<br />

facilitate undergraduate learning. However, in addition to their teaching assignments, graduate<br />

teaching assistants will often find themselves engaged in other academic activities, ranging<br />

from commitment to their own graduate studies, to teaching and research assistance for faculty,<br />

to providing basic support services for departmental, school, university and professional activities.<br />

On any given day, Graduate Teaching Assistants may wear many academic “hats,” whereby it is<br />

reasonable to assume that they can experience feelings of confusion about their multiple academic<br />

roles. (Massy & Wilger, 1994) Thus, helping Graduate Teaching Assistants recognize and<br />

develop “effective voices” to move their professional lives in a positive and productive direction<br />

is important.<br />

Common wisdom suggests that open dialogue is helpful in accomplishing many, if not all, of our<br />

daily tasks. Open dialogue has been operationalized across two primary domains, specifically,<br />

respectful speaking and reflective listening. Like most professionals, Graduate Teaching<br />

Assistants may employ these dialoguing skills in multiple contexts, including self-discovery,<br />

interpersonal relationships, teaching and learning, as well as other professional activities.<br />

However, developmental theory suggests that the process of self-discovery, or what may be<br />

generally referred to as identify formation, is fundamental to positive interpersonal behaving,<br />

regardless of the nature of the relationship. If developmental theory holds true, then graduate<br />

teaching assistants may wonder that their greatest personal and professional responsibilities<br />

necessarily spring from this process of self-discovery. Moreover, Graduate Teaching Assistants<br />

should understand that self-discovery is a dynamic and fluid experience, inevitably filtered<br />

through life learning and experiences. Finally, developmental theory dictates that individuals<br />

who positively and courageously engage in the self-discovery process are rewarded with a strong<br />

sense of personhood, and with a clear and resilient vision of their personal values and beliefs.<br />

This vision can be profoundly useful to Graduate Teaching Assistants when negotiating the real<br />

and often bewildering challenges of “wearing many hats.” In confusing situations, exacerbated<br />

by their professional inexperience, Graduate Teaching Assistants may be left with nothing more<br />

than their personal values and beliefs to inform their thinking and decision-making, and to pilot<br />

their behaviors\and actions. Graduate Teaching Assistants whose values and beliefs hold them<br />

to an ethical standard which exceeds simple punishment avoidance or rule implementation, and<br />

who strive to do the greater good, are bound to speak with a more effective voice.<br />

For practical purposes, Graduate Teaching Assistants are most likely to find their professional<br />

time spent in preparing and engaging in their own graduate studies, and in planning and<br />

teaching their undergraduate classes. Massy and Wilger (1994) reported that one difficult reality<br />

which may occur in academia is that faculty work alone. Such autonomy has long been viewed<br />

as providing faculty and young academicians with the scheduling flexibility necessary to<br />

cultivate academic creativity and productivity, as well as personal initiative.<br />

Unfortunately, highly autonomous environments can also generate feelings of professional<br />

isolation, as well as impugn collegial communication and collaboration. These negative<br />

consequences may be further aggravated by other regrettable academic characteristics,<br />

including discrete and specialized teaching and research interests and departmental politics.<br />

Inexperienced Graduate Teaching Assistants are particularly vulnerable to the negative<br />

consequences stemming from more autonomous and less interactive environments, which may<br />

practically translate into no more expert assistance and guidance than a prescribed textbook and<br />

an erstwhile syllabus. Within these environments Graduate Teaching Assistants’ efforts to<br />

activate and utilize their effective voices may be largely unobserved or outright ignored.


By contrast, supportive academic cultures typically portray qualities intended to facilitate both<br />

professional growth and development among faculty, as well as student learning. Teaching is<br />

largely perceived as a collegial and cooperative activity, wherein faculty are about the business<br />

of helping one another sharpen and polish their teaching skills and practices, which naturally<br />

gives way to improved student learning experiences.<br />

80<br />

Supportive cultures also encourage respectful and reflective dialogue among faculty and young<br />

academicians whose professional opinions and personal worldviews may differ. Such dialogue<br />

advances professional and personal growth and development, and precludes the stagnating<br />

effects often associated with overly civil and essentially inauthentic social veneers. Finally, the<br />

generational chasm which can exist among senior and junior faculty and Graduate Teaching<br />

Assistants is narrowed in supportive academic cultures. Senior faculty are more likely to regard<br />

junior faculty as the future of the academic program, department, school, and university.<br />

Similarly, senior and junior faculty are more likely to deem Graduate Teaching Assistants as<br />

pivotal to the daily running of the program, department, school, and university. Of additional<br />

importance in bridging the generational chasm is the necessity of positive role modeling<br />

among <strong>University</strong> administrators. Within supportive academic cultures, it is reasonable to<br />

assume that Graduate Teaching Assistants’ efforts to activate their effective voices will not only<br />

be observed, but encouraged and valued.<br />

Bronfenbrenner (1979) posited that both personal and professional development evolves in<br />

context, and is a function of bi-directional interactions occurring between an individual and<br />

his or her contextual influences. If we characterize having an effective voice as an important<br />

and useful professional characteristic within academia, then we are obliged to define the<br />

individual and contextual pieces which necessarily work together to engender an effective<br />

voice. It is suggested here that three elements must co-exist to help the Graduate Teaching<br />

Assistant create and refine his or her effective voice.<br />

First, the Graduate Teaching Assistant ought to have a clear vision or his or her personal values<br />

and beliefs. This vision provides the Graduate Teaching Assistant with the solid footing crucial<br />

in guiding his or her professional thinking and behaving, regardless of which “hat” he or she<br />

may be wearing. Second, the university should define a supportive academic culture as one<br />

intended to maintain a healthy balance between creative professional autonomy, collegial<br />

cooperation, intergenerational collaboration, and student learning. Finally, growth-focused<br />

interaction between theGraduate Teaching Assistant and members of his or her academic<br />

culture must occur. In most if not all cases, such interaction becomes a function of open<br />

dialogue, framed by respectful speaking and reflective listening.<br />

In conclusion, the Graduate Teaching Assistant’s ability to use his or her voice effectively<br />

increases the probability that he or she will be able to grow and develop, both personally and<br />

professionally At the heart of every educational venue is the aim to help others as they<br />

advance through life. Thus, helping the Graduate Teaching Assistant recognize, expand, and<br />

refine his or her effective voice may be deemed a worthy goal across supportive academic cultures.<br />

References:<br />

Bronfenbrenner, U. (1979). The Ecology of Human Development: Experiments by Nature and<br />

Design. Cambridge: Harvard <strong>University</strong> Press.<br />

Massy, W. F., & Wilger, A. K. (1994). Overcoming ‘hollowed’ collegiality. Change, 26, p. 10.


SECTION VII<br />

Grades and Classroom Management<br />

Testing and Grading<br />

By Karen Smith-Gratto, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Center for Professional Development,<br />

School of Education<br />

81<br />

Introduction<br />

One of the responsibilities of teaching is evaluating student learning. There are many ways to<br />

do so, not just paper and pencil testing. In fact, the best grading (or evaluating of student<br />

learning) should incorporate more than paper and pencil tests. The learning objectives or<br />

standards (often set by professional organizations and/or the state) are always the foundation<br />

for deciding what assessment methods and techniques will be used to determine what a student<br />

has learned. Assessing student learning must reflect what students are told they are expected to<br />

learn. If the learning objectives are clearly articulated and followed, the design of appropriate<br />

graded assignments and tests should logically follow. The articulation of how and when student<br />

learning will be evaluated should be included on the syllabus, so that students have a clear<br />

understanding of what is expected. Informed students are more successful students.<br />

Planning in advance how student learning will be evaluated enhances the ability to carefully<br />

consider how to make sure that the activity or test actually addresses the learning objectives for<br />

the course. In addition, for such things as performance tests, advance planning enables you to<br />

carefully consider the objectives and how to design a grading rubric and activity that<br />

encourages fairness and objectivity when you grade students’ work. It is important to have<br />

objective criteria by which you can judge the student’s performance, either on tests or on other<br />

graded assignments.<br />

With all assessment activities, we want to grade in ways that accurately reflect the learning<br />

objectives (content validity), be consistent over time and between students (reliability), and<br />

be constructed in such a way that it does not embarrass or upset students by inappropriate<br />

cultural, gender, or ethnic descriptions or examples (without bias). First, to ensure content<br />

validity, assignments need to draw directly from the learning objectives and reflect those<br />

objectives accurately. (Please note that there are other types of validity – refer to some of the<br />

additional resources to learn about those). For example, if we have the following objective:<br />

“Students will compare and contrast the underlying causes of World War I and World War II,”<br />

an essay that simply has the students describe the underlying causes of either war is not a valid<br />

way to assess this objective. However, an essay that follows the exact wording of the objective<br />

or even a group assignment that follows the exact wording of the objective would be valid.<br />

Reliability should also be a concern. This means that graded assignment should reflect<br />

consistency (students who normally do well on most assignments (or the other items on a test)<br />

can be expected to do well on the particular assignment (or test item) and students who lack<br />

preparation and do poorly on most assignments (or on the other items on a test) will do poorly<br />

on the particular assignment (or test item). Another area that should be of concern is that of<br />

bias. Case studies and other activities in which language can impact student reaction should be<br />

carefully monitored in order to avoid terms, inadvertent slurs, or stereotypes because their<br />

emotional impact can influence how well the student does and cause an inaccurate evaluation<br />

of student knowledge.<br />

In addition to the consideration one gives to validity, reliability, and bias; it is important to<br />

provide feedback to the students as soon as possible after the assignment or test is completed.<br />

Assignments and tests should be used in order to help students learn, not just provide grades.<br />

By providing feedback, as soon as possible after the assignment or test, the student can review<br />

his or her mistakes and began correcting his or her understanding of the material. The longer<br />

the wait between completion of the assignment and feedback about the assignment or test the<br />

longer the student has to accept his or her incorrect knowledge as correct.


Grading Assignments and Activities<br />

Learning Activities and Products<br />

One way to accurately and fairly evaluate activities and products is to create a “Grading<br />

Rubric” that can be given to students in advance of the activity or production of the product.<br />

By creating a rubric, both you and the students will have a clear understanding of what is<br />

expected of the student. The rubric helps the grader maintain a more objective point of view<br />

than might otherwise be possible without the criteria being spelled out. Rubrics can be<br />

structured in a variety of ways. Rubrics can be developed that will address a variety of student<br />

performance activities: including but not limited to: laboratory exercises; musical performances;<br />

sport activities; and construction steps. Products of various sorts can also be evaluated by using<br />

rubrics. Some products that might be developed by students are: models; web-sites; computer<br />

programs; papers; and so forth. Regardless of the activity or product assessed, all rubrics require<br />

similar decisions and the development of certain characteristics.<br />

82<br />

Must address the<br />

evaluation of at least one<br />

objective or standard<br />

from the course.<br />

May address subobjectives<br />

that may be<br />

derived from the primary<br />

objective that is<br />

evaluated.<br />

May address additional<br />

objectives that are not a<br />

stated part of the course<br />

(such as writing style in<br />

an essay or research paper).<br />

Must articulate observable<br />

elements of the product<br />

or performance.<br />

Scoring must be planned<br />

in advance.<br />

Characteristics of Rubrics for Assessing Performances or Products<br />

While these characteristics sound simple, the development of a rubric for evaluating student<br />

learning should be thoughtfully constructed. The rubric should reflect what is important for<br />

the student to demonstrate. Three examples will be shown.<br />

The first example shown on the next page shows the element of part of the activity (an oral<br />

report) that is evaluated. In this example, each element is assigned a specific number of points.<br />

Students can not earn more than the stated number of points on a given element. However, if<br />

the element assessed is below a particular achievement level (say the student talks so quietly<br />

that others can not hear the student in the back of the room) points will be subtracted from<br />

the total points for that element (“Appropriate volume and rate” would lose 3 points). Once<br />

the activity is finished the points are summed.<br />

The second example (a rubric for a literature review paper) indicates the number of total<br />

points that can be assigned for the entire paper). Notice that for this rubric more points can be<br />

deducted for some of the items than would add up to the total number of points for this<br />

assignment. Using this technique can indicate to students that some errors (like grammar) can<br />

result in all points being deducted, even when other criteria is met.<br />

The third partial example (Final Project Evaluation) gives verbal descriptions of each level of<br />

performance for each element (or criteria) evaluated. Notice that each level (1 through 4)<br />

clearly describes the performance for that level. This format takes more time to develop, but<br />

facilitates quick grading because everything is clearly stated.


Example 1. Oral Report Rubric that provides the number of points that can be earned when each<br />

element is addressed.<br />

Oral Report Rubric<br />

83<br />

Area Evaluated Points Possible Total Received<br />

Content<br />

Presentation is well organized 10<br />

Concepts are clearly expressed 8<br />

Main ideas of topic are covered 10<br />

Demonstrates Understanding of topic 10<br />

(through how presented and responses to questions)<br />

Presentation<br />

Good pronunciation 5<br />

Good eye contact 5<br />

Good posture 3<br />

Neat Grooming 3<br />

Appropriate volume and speech rate 3<br />

Does NOT read from POWERPOINT slides 3<br />

PowerPoint Slides and other media<br />

Choice of media is appropriate 5<br />

Original media demonstrates good practice<br />

(visual design, sound quality, etc.) 5<br />

Handouts<br />

Adequately summarize topic from chapter<br />

(not PowerPoint slides) 10<br />

Includes your conclusions or position on the topic 5<br />

Demonstrate good writing and layout 5<br />

Learning Activity<br />

Activity reinforces learning and is on topic 10<br />

Total Points Earned 100<br />

Developed for CUIN 743 by Dr. Karen Smith-Gratto © 2004<br />

Oral portion should be from 10 to 15 minutes in length<br />

Activity portion should be from 10 to 15 minutes in length


Example 2. Literature Review with a table that provides how many points can be deducted for<br />

specific elements within the literature review.<br />

Rubric for Literature Review<br />

Your paper starts out with 100 points. Area evaluated explains what will be graded, the next column<br />

gives the total number of points that can be deducted for that area of evaluation. The third column<br />

will show what you earned. You can earn a minus grade but the grade entered would then be a zero<br />

(0).<br />

Area evaluated Points that can Points<br />

be subtracted for Subtracted<br />

item<br />

Introduction – must establish the importance of the topic Up to 20 points<br />

Body of the paper should have the following:<br />

Up to 40 points<br />

! Each article should be summarized<br />

! Logical organization of body – often done by categorizing<br />

articles<br />

! Identify the relationships among articles<br />

! Identify the differences in research, theory and/or opinion<br />

! Identify gaps in the literature<br />

Conclusion should have the following:<br />

! Summarize the general patterns of the literature reviewed<br />

! Describe what research you think would add to and enhance<br />

the research reviewed<br />

! Describe how the literature contributes to theory<br />

development or refinement<br />

! Explain possible steps in solving identified problems<br />

! Apply the literature reviewed to practice<br />

Writing style – the paper must exhibit the following:<br />

! Good paragraphing<br />

! Transitions between sections of the paper and between<br />

paragraphs<br />

! Good sentence structure that reads smoothly<br />

Demonstrates good APA format – 1 point per error deducted<br />

Demonstrates good grammer – 1 point per error deducted<br />

Demonstrates appropriate use of mechanics and correct<br />

spelling – 1 point per error deducted<br />

Up to 30 points<br />

Up to 40 points<br />

No limit<br />

No limit<br />

No limit<br />

84<br />

TOTAL POINTS deducted from 100<br />

SCORE FOR ASSIGNMENT<br />

Developed for: CUIN 743 by Dr. Karen Smith-Gratto © 2004


Example 3. Partial example of project rubric that describes the required elements at each level of<br />

accomplishment.<br />

Final Project Evaluation for Multimedia Development and Evaluation<br />

85<br />

Area 0 1 2 3 4 Weight Total<br />

Adequate Instructional Design Documentation and Thought (Part One)<br />

Audience<br />

is clearly<br />

defined<br />

(students)<br />

- Analysis<br />

Not<br />

found<br />

Shows an<br />

inadequate<br />

number of<br />

characteristics<br />

and<br />

characteristics<br />

that are not<br />

relevant – and<br />

does not<br />

specifically<br />

state diversity<br />

characteristics<br />

Shows an<br />

inadequate<br />

number of<br />

characteristics<br />

or shows some<br />

characteristics<br />

that are not<br />

relevant and/or<br />

does not<br />

specifically<br />

state diversity<br />

characteristics<br />

Shows both an<br />

adequate<br />

number of<br />

characteristics<br />

and all<br />

characteristics<br />

are relevant –<br />

does not<br />

include<br />

description of<br />

diversity<br />

characteristics<br />

Shows<br />

extensive<br />

student<br />

characteristics<br />

that are<br />

relevant – this<br />

includes a<br />

description of<br />

diversity<br />

characteristics<br />

x2<br />

The Not<br />

instructional found<br />

need is<br />

established<br />

and the<br />

objectives<br />

are clearly<br />

stated and<br />

adequate for<br />

the content<br />

– Analysis<br />

and Design<br />

No explanation<br />

or an<br />

inadequate<br />

explanation<br />

about why the<br />

objectives are<br />

important *<br />

*<strong>State</strong> or<br />

District<br />

Curriculum<br />

Guide for<br />

teachers or<br />

stated<br />

explanation of<br />

importance for<br />

business &<br />

industry<br />

The<br />

explanation<br />

about why the<br />

lesson is<br />

important is<br />

inadequate *<br />

Exhibits at least<br />

two of the<br />

following<br />

characteristics:<br />

The<br />

importance of<br />

the lesson is<br />

completely and<br />

adequately<br />

stated; the<br />

objectives are<br />

all correctly<br />

written; and<br />

there are<br />

sufficient<br />

objectives to<br />

meet the need<br />

Exhibits all of<br />

the following<br />

characteristics:<br />

The<br />

importance of<br />

the lesson is<br />

completely and<br />

adequately<br />

stated; the<br />

objectives are<br />

all correctly<br />

written; and<br />

there are<br />

sufficient<br />

objectives to<br />

meet the need<br />

x5<br />

From Complete Form – K. Smith-Gratto © 2002 Developed for CUIN 763


Testing – Planning the Test<br />

Testing is one means by which we evaluate student learning. Tests should address objectives that<br />

can most productively be evaluated by paper and pencil (or computer-based testing – such as in<br />

BlackBoard). Usually, several objectives are addressed through testing. It is easiest to develop a<br />

sound test by creating a “Table of Specifications” which outlines the objectives or sub-areas of<br />

objectives that will be tested. The identification of areas to be tested is only the first step. Next<br />

the test developer must determine how many points or what percentage of the test will be<br />

assigned to each objective or sub-objective. This is done by determining: 1) how important the<br />

objective is when considered in comparison with the other objectives to be tested; 2) how much<br />

class time was spent addressing the objective; 3) the number of activities and assignments that<br />

addressed the objective; and 4) how much the instructor emphasized the importance of the<br />

objective. The determination of weight requires thought and consideration because the decision<br />

made here can result in a student who works hard being unfairly assessed. For example: Dr.<br />

Who’s class spent 5 days on the impacts of WWII. In that time there were whole class discussions,<br />

mini lectures, additional readings, and brief group presentations. On the other hand, students<br />

read about the dates of different battles in the text but Dr. Who did not lecture about the dates<br />

of the battles nor did Dr. Who tell the students that they were responsible for the dates even<br />

though the dates and battles would not be discussed in class. Dr. Who writes the test and<br />

students are graded more heavily on the dates than on the impacts of WWII. This would be an<br />

invalid assessment of what the students learned.<br />

After determining the total number of points or percentage of the test will address the objectives<br />

and sub-objectives the developer might want to consider what level of questions that students<br />

will receive. You can refer to Bloom’s Taxonomy for more detail and include those levels on your<br />

“Table of Specifications” or you can consider low and high cognitive questions. Low cognitive<br />

questions would be those that address memorization or comprehension only. High cognitive<br />

questions would involve such things as comparing and contrasting, evaluating, analyzing, and<br />

synthesizing information. A low level question might ask what date something happened. A high<br />

level question would require that the student know and understand the lower level information<br />

and be able to use it in some way. An example of a Table of Specifications follows.<br />

Example of a Table of Specification that provides the number of points per objective and<br />

the objective the table is based upon.<br />

Objectives for Table of Specifications<br />

86<br />

• Explain what hypermedia is.<br />

• Describe what a flowchart is and when to<br />

use a flowchart.<br />

• Describe what a storyboard is and when to<br />

use storyboarding.<br />

• Describe what a script is and when to use a<br />

script.<br />

• Describe linear design.<br />

• Describe non-linear design.<br />

• Compare and contrast menu design with<br />

network design.<br />

• Describe hybrid design.<br />

• Explain the ADDIE model of Instructional<br />

Design.<br />

• Explain what a hyperlink is.<br />

• Explain what an action button is.<br />

• Explain the difference between slide masters<br />

and design templates.<br />

• Explain the difference between object<br />

linking and embedding.<br />

• List the six kinds of multimedia development<br />

software and give examples.<br />

• Create hyperlinks, action buttons, links to<br />

other applications or programs.<br />

• Draw a variety of lines and shapes in<br />

PowerPoint.<br />

• Create a slide master for PowerPoint.<br />

• Create a design template for PowerPoint.<br />

• Create a data sheet, a Graph in<br />

PowerPoint.<br />

•Create a PowerPoint that can be<br />

read on a computer without<br />

PowerPoint (Pack and Go and<br />

web-based).


Table of Specifications Quiz 2 CUIN 763 Fall 2003<br />

Topic High Low Total<br />

87<br />

Planning - ADDIE 4 2 6<br />

Planning – storyboard, flowchart, script 2 1 3<br />

Planning - Five basic multimedia design paradigms 3 3 6<br />

Triggers and hyperlinks 1 2 3<br />

Drawing (Chapter 36) 0 1 1<br />

Slide Masters and Design Templates (Chap 37) 0 1 1<br />

Creating Charts, Graphs, Tables, and Equations (Chap 38) 0 1 1<br />

Application Development Packages (Chap 9 and class –<br />

i.e. Lectora, Vox Proxy) 1 1 2<br />

Pack and Go (Chap 39) 0 1 1<br />

PowerPoint to Web Page 0 1 1<br />

TOTAL 11 14 25<br />

K. Smith-Gratto developed for CUIN 763 © 2003<br />

Notice that many of the objectives have a performance component. This does not mean that<br />

some aspects can not be evaluated via a paper and pencil test, only that a paper and pencil test would<br />

be inappropriate for a full assessment of the student’s knowledge. Also, if you look at the objectives<br />

and at the table you will see that some of the objectives have been combined. Usually for a full blown<br />

test this is not a good idea, but you will notice that the “test” is a “quiz”, which is normally accepted<br />

as being of less count in the overall grade than a test. The table was prepared not just to plan the quiz<br />

but to provide the students with a study guide. While you don’t need to provide students with a copy<br />

of the “Table of Specifications”, it can provide the students with information that can help them be<br />

successful in choosing what to study and answers the perennial student question “What’s on the test?”.<br />

Constructing and Grading Tests<br />

Test items can be constructed once what will be tested and at what level it will be tested has been<br />

systematically established. Test items can be divided into two categories: selected response items and<br />

constructed response items. Selected response items include: True/false and yes/no items; multiple<br />

choice items; and matching items. Constructed response items include: short answer items and essay<br />

items. There are advantages and disadvantages to both general types of questions. One disadvantage of<br />

selected response items is that it is easier for students to guess a correct answer. In order for selected<br />

response questions, particularly matching and multiple choice to be effective for assessment, care and<br />

time must be spent in the construction. In general grading selected response items is simple, objective,<br />

and reliable. When using constructed response items, guessing on the part of the student is less likely.<br />

However, when using constructed response items, a variety of answers may prove to be correct. One<br />

disadvantage to using constructed response items is that grading is often more subjective. This is<br />

particularly true because depending upon the question; several answers may be logically supported.<br />

Regardless of the type of item there are certain characteristics in good test writing that apply. Items<br />

should be written clearly, using plain unambiguous language. The student should be able to<br />

demonstrate knowledge of the content without being confused by the writing. Also, directions for all<br />

types of items on a given test should be clearly written and descriptive of what the student is expected<br />

to do.


Selected Response Items<br />

• True/false and Yes/No items<br />

o Use clear concise language<br />

o Avoid using “not” or other words that negate the statement<br />

o Use only one main idea or point<br />

e.g. Good – Pack and Go requires that users have a web browser.<br />

Bad – Pack and Go does not require that users have a web browser and they do not<br />

need to have PowerPoint.<br />

• Multiple Choice<br />

o Clear concise language.<br />

o Use simple sentences and appropriate vocabulary.<br />

o Avoid using “not” or other words that negate the statement. If you use “not” be sure to<br />

emphasize the word – for example: “Which of the following is NOT” or “Which of the<br />

following is not”<br />

o Do not give clues as to the correct answer.<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

The stem (the part of the multiple choice problem that asks a question or problem)<br />

should be about only one problem or question.<br />

The possible answers should be about the same length.<br />

Avoid answers that are “all of the above” and “none of the above”<br />

Use random assignment of correct answers for position of (a, b, c, etc.)<br />

You may have several answers based upon a reading selection. For example, a scenario<br />

or case study that the student may analyze is appropriate for higher level multiple choice<br />

questions.<br />

(Example follows).<br />

Wording of can be a question – such as: “Where is Greensboro located?” or a statement<br />

that needs completion – such as: Greensboro is located in _______.”<br />

Format of a multiple choice item requires a stem, an answer, and distractors.<br />

Stem – the first part of the item (Where is Greensboro located?)<br />

Answer – central <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong><br />

Distractors – central South <strong>Carolina</strong>, southern <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong>, eastern <strong>North</strong><br />

<strong>Carolina</strong>, southern South <strong>Carolina</strong><br />

e.g. Good stem, answer, and distractors - A habit that develops from imitation is<br />

called ________.<br />

a. Discriminative imitation<br />

b. Generalized imitation<br />

c. Vicarious imitation<br />

d. Delayed imitation<br />

Bad stem - When a person imitates someone else and the person who does the imitating<br />

develops a habit it is called __________.<br />

Bad answer and distractor combinations –<br />

a. Discriminative habit<br />

b. Generalized imitation<br />

c. A vicariously developed habit<br />

d. A delayed imitation and habit<br />

88


An Example of a Case Study/Scenario Type Multiple Choice Question –<br />

Read the following case study and answer the questions that follow it. (Items 8- 10).<br />

Scenario<br />

John is a very good worker and his boss appreciates how hard John works. However, John is a<br />

very sloppy dresser. If John’s work required him to be out of sight of customers his boss wouldn’t<br />

mind, but John must interact with customers. He is polite and always tries to help customers<br />

who need help. Unfortunately, some customers have complained John looks like a bum. In<br />

fact, both customers and co-workers have complained about John’s body odor. His boss doesn’t<br />

want to fire John. He knows John can be neat and that John doesn’t always have body odor. In<br />

fact, John was well groomed when he applied for the job and for the first few weeks on the job.<br />

How can John’s boss help John be better groomed?<br />

89<br />

8. One course of action for John’s boss to take according to what you have learned so far in the<br />

course is:<br />

A. Use classical conditioning to change John’s behavior by withholding part of John’s pay<br />

each day that John shows up for work improperly groomed.<br />

B. Use operant conditioning to change John’s behavior by withholding part of John’s pay<br />

each day that John shows up for work improperly groomed.<br />

C. Use social learning theory to change John’s behavior by withholding part of John’s pay<br />

each day that John shows up for work improperly groomed.<br />

9. If John’s boss did withhold some of John’s pay, it would be considered which of the following?<br />

A. Reinforcement<br />

B. Punishment<br />

C. Modeling<br />

D. Stimulus<br />

• Matching items<br />

o Consist items from one related topic<br />

o Relatively short<br />

o Have more responses than items to be answered<br />

o Make order logical in some way (alphabetical, chronological, or other logical<br />

organization)<br />

o Make it clear how items are to be matched.<br />

e.g. Good –<br />

Directions: In the space to the left of the state listed in Column 1, write the letter of the city<br />

that is the capitol of the state from Column 2. Each city in Column 2 may only be selected once.<br />

Column 1 Column 2<br />

____ 1. Louisiana<br />

a. Albany<br />

____ 2. New York<br />

b. Baton Rouge<br />

____ 3. <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong><br />

c. Olympia<br />

____ 4. Oregon<br />

____ 5. Utah<br />

d. Raleigh<br />

e. Salem<br />

f. Salt Lake City<br />

g. Tallahassee<br />

h. Trenton<br />

Bad –<br />

Directions: Match the items on the left with the items on the right.<br />

Column 1 Column 2<br />

_____1. Utah<br />

a. Salt Lake City<br />

_____2. <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong><br />

b. Baton Rouge<br />

_____3. Oregon<br />

c. Albany<br />

_____4. Louisiana<br />

d. Raleigh<br />

_____5. New York<br />

e. Salem


Constructed Response Items.<br />

• Short Answer<br />

o Questions or sentences with blanks at the end are appropriate.<br />

o All blanks for all items should be the same length.<br />

o Limit the number of words needed.<br />

o Plan possible answers in advance (to facilitate more objective grading).<br />

90<br />

• Essay<br />

o Use essays for in-depth and high level assessment, not fact or comprehension level<br />

questions.<br />

o Plan the criteria by which the essay will be assessed in advance. Also consider elements<br />

within the answer that will be required (but remember if a student logically supports a<br />

different answer you may need to give credit). For example, if an essay item is “What<br />

event in the 1950’s do you believe had the most impact on American Society? Support<br />

your answer with specific examples of the impact.” Notice, one student could say that<br />

the launching of Sputnik was the most important and support his/her answer, while<br />

another could say that the Brown vs. the Board of Education was the most important<br />

event and support that. In evaluating these types of essay questions, you must look<br />

carefully at the support provided. As can be seen, this is more subjective than other<br />

kinds of questions. Essay questions can be written in a more precise way that would<br />

exclude variety in the answers but that can also lower the cognitive level of the<br />

question. For example, an essay question that reads “Describe the impact of Brown vs.<br />

the Board of Education.” The result of this wording will lend itself to specific<br />

information without making the student evaluate events and then provide support for<br />

his/her evaluation of the events. The more open-ended questions, requires more<br />

thought on the student’s part than the second question.<br />

Course Grading<br />

Now that you have learned a bit about how to establish grading for assignments and create<br />

and grade tests, you need to look at the overall structure of grading for the course. When<br />

considering how to assign grades for a course you need to consider what the goals and<br />

objectives for the course are. First, the objectives should have been designed to allow students<br />

to meet the goal or goals for the course. If that is the case then establishing how to determine<br />

what gets the most weight in a course becomes easier. For example, in the example of<br />

assignments and grading from a syllabus for a graduate course in Educational Multimedia<br />

Development and Evaluation, you will notice that some of the assignments provide a<br />

foundation for the final assignment which is worth 50% of the grade. For some classes, you<br />

can provide students with choices for their assignments and let the students complete a<br />

contract (see Additional Resources for How to Develop Contracts). However, when using<br />

alternative assignments and contracts, make sure you are meeting the course objectives. The<br />

choices should be clearly defined on the syllabus and then individual contracts developed<br />

from those choices for the instructor and the student to sign.


Example of Information from Syllabus that informs students about assignments, testing, and<br />

grading policies.<br />

Activities:<br />

Class activities will include: lecture, large group discussion, small group discussion, group activities,<br />

hands-on activities, and individual activities.<br />

Assignments:<br />

Practice Multimedia Development Assignments (5% of your grade): You are expected to complete<br />

ALL parts of this assignment. You are expected to complete the following tasks to demonstrate that<br />

you have the skills needed by saving ALL of the files to a CD:<br />

• Audio work:<br />

o Create a voice file to e-mail to me<br />

o Create a digital file from the audio tape that I send you<br />

• Graphics work:<br />

o Graphic file made by scanning an image sent to you and edited by having the text “practice”<br />

added<br />

o Digital photo file made by you taking a picture of a person holding a sign with the current<br />

date on it (the date the picture is being taken)<br />

o A drawing file that you make which includes the following elements:<br />

freehand crooked line in red<br />

a square with a blue external line around it and yellow inside (yellow square with a blue a<br />

line around it).<br />

a green line circle (no fill color).<br />

A straight violet line<br />

Has Arial text in 12 point font<br />

• Animation work:<br />

o Create a gif animation file using Ulead animator using the the gif files: ani1.gif;<br />

ani2.gif; ani3.gif; and ani4.gif<br />

o Using the provided PowerPoint file animate:<br />

The text on the screen in two different ways<br />

Make each drawn object animate in different ways<br />

Include one sound effect<br />

• Video digitizing work:<br />

o Create a digital video file from the video tape provided. Add the title practice using a digital<br />

editing program (if you are familiar with a particular program use it - if not, you can<br />

download test editors from Ulead, Adobe, and others) .<br />

o Create a short video file using a digital video camera (you must have a handheld or posted<br />

sign that indicates the date the file is created). DO NOT edit in a date.<br />

Web Resource List (5% of your grade): Students will create a list of five useful web resources.<br />

The list must exhibit the following:<br />

o Be a Word Document with the filename: initials_web.doc (example: ksg_web.doc)<br />

o Put your name at the top of the document.<br />

o Create a table that looks like the following:<br />

Web-site name and address Web Address Description of the web-site and usefulness.<br />

One web-name<br />

In this cell you will describe the resource<br />

http://awebsite.address/index.html<br />

and why you think it is useful.<br />

Second web-name<br />

In this cell you will describe the resource<br />

http://awebsite.address/index.html<br />

and why you think it is useful.<br />

The others should follow the pattern of this table.<br />

Upload your completed document to the Provided Discussion Board in BlackBoard (Name of<br />

Discussion – Web Resources)so that your classmates can get the benefit of your research.<br />

91


Quizzes (10% of your grade) • Units 1 - 4 • Units 5 - 7 • Unit 10<br />

Short Literature Review Paper (15% of your grade): You may choose any topic related to<br />

multimedia in education. This can include: using multimedia in education in some way;<br />

developing different kinds of media for educational use; new developments in multimedia; and<br />

so forth. Note the following:<br />

• The Literature Review Rubric will be used to grade your paper. <strong>Download</strong>: litrev.doc from<br />

document sharing.<br />

• Paper should be 3 - 5 pages in length (this does not include the title page or the reference<br />

list page(s). (If you have three pages - you MUST have THREE FULL pages not 2 1/2).<br />

• You must have at least 10 references.<br />

• The references must include professional journals! You cannot use just web-based materials<br />

(see the Literature Review Rubric for the percent of web-sites allowed).<br />

Attendance (10% of your grade): Class activities and instruction will begin promptly at 6 p.m.<br />

Roll is taken at 6 p. m. Students who have complete attendance (you can miss or be late for one<br />

class) at the end of the semester earn 10%, those who have missed (or were late) two classes<br />

earn 8%, and those who missed 3 (or were late) classes earn 5%. Those who miss (or are late)<br />

more than 3 classes do not receive any credit for attendance.<br />

Evaluation of an Instructional Web-site (5% of your grade) - You will use the criteria established<br />

in the provided evaluation form. You will:<br />

• Choose one instructional web-site from one of the list at:<br />

http://www.ncat.edu/~student3/pt3/inweb.html<br />

• <strong>Download</strong> the evaluation form: filename - eval2.doc<br />

• Complete the evaluation form and save it to a file named yourintials_eval.doc (save on<br />

your course assignment CD)<br />

Final Project (50% of your grade): Students will complete a final multimedia/hypermedia<br />

project which will enable the students to demonstrate what was learned during the semester.<br />

Note the following information:<br />

• See Final Project Rubric.<br />

• You will include an instructional design plan.<br />

• You will create an instructional web-site that includes multimedia elements.<br />

• You will create a Lectora, Hyperstudio, Toolbook, PowerPoint, or other multimedia<br />

authoring tool instructional presentation that includes interactivity and multimedia<br />

elements.<br />

• You will write at least a one page reflection in which you explain the following:<br />

o What gave you problems when doing the project and how you addressed those problems.<br />

o How you have applied some of the theories explored in the course.<br />

You will save the whole project to a CD that will be handed in. The CD will NOT be returned to you.<br />

Evaluation:<br />

Grades are on a 4 point scale.<br />

3.8 – 4.0 = A (outstanding work that EXCEEDS criteria)<br />

3.0 – 3.79 = B (work meets all criteria)<br />

2.0 – 2.99 = C (work does not meet criteria adequately)<br />

Below 2.0 = F (work is substandard and inadequate to meet graduate standards)<br />

92


How to Calculate your own grade:<br />

Assignment Weight Total<br />

Practice<br />

Audio<br />

Average of the items<br />

Multimedia Grade:<br />

to the left X .05<br />

Development Graphics<br />

– Average Grade:<br />

of all sections<br />

Animation<br />

Grade:<br />

Video<br />

Grade:<br />

Web Resource List Grade X .05<br />

Quizzes –<br />

Quiz1<br />

Average of the quizzes<br />

Averages of all quizzes Grade:<br />

X .1<br />

Quiz 2<br />

Grade:<br />

Quiz 3<br />

Grade:<br />

Short Literature Review Grade X .15<br />

Attendance Grade X .1<br />

Evaluation of instructional web-site Grade X .05<br />

Final Project Grade X .5<br />

FINAL GRADE<br />

To determine final grade<br />

add all of the numbers in<br />

the far right column<br />

93<br />

Conclusion<br />

The assignment of grades needs to be systematic and adequately address the goals and objectives of the<br />

course. Keep in mind that all graded assignments and tests must strive to be valid, reliable, and without<br />

bias. In addition, a concerted effort must be made to grade each student fairly and objectively. In<br />

order to meet all of the demands of grading, one should think carefully about what will be assessed,<br />

how it will be assessed, and what weight the assessment should take in the course. By thinking about<br />

this and including the information in the syllabus, students are given specific information which helps<br />

them plan for wise time management and prepare for the course properly. The additional resources can<br />

be used to further develop skills for designing assessments that can be used to grade student learning.<br />

Additional Resources on Testing and Grading<br />

Astin, A. W., et al. (2003) 9 Principles of Good Practice for Assessing Student Learning. American<br />

Association of Higher Education http://www.aahe.org/assessment/principl.htm Retrieved:<br />

March 8, 2004. This web-site provides a list of principles for good assessment.<br />

Atherton, J. S. (2003). Learning and Teaching: Learning Contracts. UK.<br />

http://www.dmu.ac.uk/~jamesa/teaching/learning_contracts.htm. Retrieved: March 14, 2004.<br />

Bloom’s Taxonomy. (2003). Learning Skills Program. Counselling Services – <strong>University</strong> of Victoria.<br />

http://www.coun.uvic.ca/learn/program/hndouts/bloom.html Retrieved: March 8, 2004. This<br />

web-site provides information about Bloom’s Taxonomy, including verbs that can help indicate<br />

the level of test items and objectives.<br />

Codde, J. R. (1996). Using Learning Contracts in the College Classroom. Michigan <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

http://www.msu.edu/user/coddejos/contract.htm Retrieved: March 14, 2004.<br />

Davis, B. G. (2002). Tools for Teaching: Quizzes, Tests, and Exams. <strong>University</strong> of California, Berkeley.<br />

http://teaching.berkeley.edu/bgd/quizzes.html Retrieved: March 10, 2004.


Grading – Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of Delaware.<br />

Gronlund, N. E. (2003). Assessment of Student Achievement. 7th Ed. Boston: Allyn and Bacon.<br />

This book provides information about validity and reliability of assessments and detailed<br />

information about constructing assessments.<br />

High Plains Regional Technology in Education Consortium. (2003). Rubistar.<br />

http://rubistar.4teachers.org/index.php Retrieved March 12, 2004. This web-site helps<br />

you make rubrics to use for assessing student learning and assigning grades.<br />

Popham, W. J. (1995). Classroom Assessment: What Teachers Need to Know. 2nd Ed. Boston:<br />

Allyn and Bacon. This book provides information about validity and reliability of<br />

assessments and detailed information about constructing assessments.<br />

Testing – Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of Delaware.<br />

Walvoord, B. E. and Anderson, V. J. (1998). Effective Grading: A Tool for Learning and<br />

Assessement. San Francisico: Jossey-Bass Publishers. This book addresses grading and<br />

assessment in higher education.<br />

94<br />

Evaluating Student Performance<br />

By Gloria M. Palma, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

Department of Human Performance and Leisure Studies,<br />

School of Education<br />

Evaluation is important to any systematic approach to learning, and should be aligned with<br />

instructional objectives and students’ expected progress. Measuring a student’s progress means<br />

that evaluation should be conducted in relation to the student’s own abilities without regard<br />

to gender, age, cultural status, or disability. In addition, evaluation can be formative<br />

or summative.<br />

Formative evaluation is an ongoing process and is conducted while corrections or improvements<br />

in student behaviors are still possible. For example, information from quizzes, peer assessment,<br />

and self-testing activities permit changes in the learning process while changes can still affect<br />

final performance. On the other hand, cumulative evaluation is focused on the extent to which<br />

a student has been successful in mastering specific learning objectives. This type of evaluation is<br />

usually conducted at the end of the instructional unit. The following measures are cited as<br />

evaluation tools that can be utilized to measure student progress and performance:<br />

• Systematic observation with the use of a checklist or a rating scale. This method is often used<br />

to observe a student’s expected behavior associated with attitudes, preferences, emotions,<br />

values, and interests.<br />

• Written tests to measure cognitive learning to provide a systematic assessment of the student’s<br />

expected academic progress. Examples of objective written tests are short-response questions<br />

such as true or false, multiple-choice, matching, fill-ins, short essay answers, and<br />

problem-solving questions.<br />

• Peer evaluation involving one or more peers evaluating the behavior of another student.<br />

Peers can use a checklist or a rating scale in this type of evaluation.<br />

• The use of portfolio as a form of authentic assessment is rapidly emerging because it does not<br />

only enhance teacher-students involvement in evaluation, but clearly shows the achievements<br />

of the students in relation to the course objectives.<br />

• Other authentic assessment tools that can be utilized in evaluating students’ progress include:<br />

Independent work contracts<br />

Student reflections<br />

Teacher’s anecdotal reports<br />

Task sheets<br />

Workbook pages, and<br />

Class projects


Additional Resources on Student Evaluation are Listed and/or Linked below with Permission<br />

by the Host Institution:<br />

Classroom Assessment Techniques: A Handbook for College Teachers. Angelo, Thomas A.,<br />

and K. Patricia Cross. 2nd ed. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1988.<br />

95<br />

Commenting on Student Papers – Linked with permission from Schreyer Institute for Teaching<br />

Excellence at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Evaluating Student Learning – Linked with permission by the <strong>University</strong> of Washington,<br />

Center for Instructional Development & Research. Sub-topics also linked include:<br />

• Cheating or Plagiarism • Evaluation Methods • Grading<br />

Evaluating Student Performance - Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of Georgia.<br />

Article begins at bottom of first page of linked PDF file.<br />

Evaluating What You've Done – Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of California -<br />

Santa Barbara, Office of Instructional Development.<br />

Evaluating Your Students – Linked with permission from John Hopkins <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Testing and Grading: Assessing Student Performance – Linked with permission from Ohio<br />

<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Keeping Records<br />

Keeping Records – Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of Washington.<br />

Office Hours<br />

By Mrs. Susan M. Payne<br />

Research Assistant<br />

The School of Graduate Studies<br />

The GTA’s office hours are an important extension of the classroom. Most GTAs establish<br />

office hours, but students are not necessarily required to come in during those times. Usually<br />

office hours are scheduled before the semester begins and announced to the students at the first<br />

class session. One alternative is to check with the students about convenient times before<br />

establishing your office hours. Some professors may ask that you schedule your office hours at<br />

times that alternate with theirs, thus increasing the time that one or the other of you is available<br />

to students.<br />

How do you get students to come in? Let them know frequently that they are welcome. Invite<br />

them individually. A comment on a paper (e.g., “Please see me about this”) brings about a 75%<br />

response. Stress the importance and value of office visits both to you and to them. Most GTAs<br />

deal with freshmen and sophomores who are not yet use to personal contact with their<br />

instructors at the university. If those first few who come in have positive experiences, the word<br />

will spread.<br />

Some GTAs find that posting the answers to quizzes or homework problems on or around their<br />

doors is an effective means of attracting students to office hours. While many students may not<br />

take advantage of office hours, on occasion you may encounter those who are overly dependent<br />

on you either for assistance with course material or for companionship and counsel. It may be<br />

necessary to set limits with these students. You might ask them to try assignments on their own<br />

before coming to you for help.


96<br />

Getting students to come to your office hours is<br />

not always a problem. You may find that many<br />

students will come in, for many different reasons.<br />

You should be aware of ways to facilitate a<br />

helpful tutorial session:<br />

• Be approachable. The best thing to do when students come in to your office<br />

during hours is to make them feel welcome. It takes only a little bit of care to<br />

create a relaxed, pleasant atmosphere where communication is natural and easy.<br />

• Be Professional. After you have scheduled your office hours, keep them. Show<br />

up on time, and remain for the full office hour period. If you must make a<br />

cancellation, notify your students that you will not be in ahead of time.<br />

• Let the student tell you the purpose of their visit. You may suspect some<br />

hidden problem, but you should not press the student to disclose. You can help<br />

the students if they actively request it, but your responsibility need not extend<br />

further than responding to their requests.<br />

• Listen to your students. Give them your undivided attention. The best way to<br />

show that you are listening is to reflect their concerns in your own words. This<br />

also shows students that you find their concerns important. Students often fear<br />

that they are wasting your time. By listening attentively and responding<br />

thoughtfully, you can help allay their anxiety.<br />

• Don't be afraid to say, “I don't know, but I'll find out for you.” You should<br />

realize that you won't always be able to provide all the answers students may ask.<br />

• Be non-judgmental and try to see situations from the student's perspective.<br />

Work with students to achieve positive solutions.<br />

• Be aware of your own limitations. Refer serious problems beyond your<br />

expertise to the Counseling Services Department on campus at (336)334-7727<br />

or if the student is seriously depressed or emotional, walk with them to Room<br />

108 in Murphy Hall and stay with them until someone in Counseling Services<br />

can see them.


Advising Students<br />

By Rita Lamb, Ph.D.<br />

Director of<br />

The Center for Student Success<br />

97<br />

WHY ADVISING?<br />

Academic advising is an essential part of the educational<br />

process and an important aspect of the teaching and<br />

learning process. The primary function of advisors is to<br />

monitor closely the progress of their students while<br />

stressing to them their importance of accepting academic<br />

responsibility. Through proper advising, students are<br />

motivated to clarify values, set goals, establish priorities,<br />

develop management and leadership skills, and<br />

understand how the academic system works and their<br />

role in it.<br />

WHAT IS ADVISING?<br />

Advising is a developmental process that helps students<br />

clarify their life/career goals and to develop educational<br />

plans for realizing these goals. It is a decision-making<br />

process that helps students realize their maximum<br />

educational potential through communication and<br />

information exchange with an advisor.<br />

WHO ADVISES?<br />

At <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, students are<br />

advised in their academic departments by faculty.<br />

Academic counselors advise undeclared students in<br />

The Center for Student Success.<br />

WHERE IS ADVISING DONE?<br />

Academic advising takes place in the academic<br />

departments of each school and college. Undeclared<br />

students receive advising in The Center for Student<br />

Success. Advising can also take place on-line.<br />

WHEN IS IT DONE?<br />

Academic advising is an ongoing process. Faculty<br />

advisors post office hours of times available for advising.<br />

Students may request appointments at other times as<br />

needed. On-line advising allows advisement during<br />

extended hours.<br />

HOW IS IT DONE?<br />

The Role of the Academic Advisor<br />

• Help students define and develop<br />

realistic career plans.<br />

• Assist students in planning a<br />

program consistent with their<br />

abilities and interests.<br />

• Monitor progress toward<br />

education/career goals.<br />

• Discuss and reinforce linkages and<br />

relationships between instructional<br />

program and occupation/career.<br />

• Interpret instructional policies,<br />

procedures, and requirements.<br />

• Perform designated educational<br />

transactions (e.g., schedule, drops<br />

and adds, etc.)<br />

• Maintain an advising file on each<br />

advisee.<br />

• Refer students when academic or<br />

other personal problems require<br />

intervention by other professionals.<br />

• Inform students of the nature of<br />

the advisor/advisee relationship.<br />

• Assist advisees in identifying<br />

advisor opportunities.<br />

• Develop a caring relationship<br />

with advisees.<br />

• Inform students of special<br />

services available to them for<br />

remediation, academic assistance,<br />

and other needs.<br />

• Refer to the NCA&TSU<br />

Comprehensive Academic<br />

Advising handbook for additional<br />

information.<br />

The advising methods implemented include Individual, Academic Course, Group, Computer<br />

and Self-Advising. It is multi-faceted and the responsibility of both student and advisor. The<br />

advisor serves as facilitator of communication, coordinator of learning experiences through<br />

course and career planning and program progress review, and agent of referral to other campus<br />

services as necessary. Academic advising is coordinated through The Center for Student Success.


Role of the TA as a Faculty/Student Liaison<br />

By Robin G. Liles, Ph.D.<br />

Assistant Professor, Department of Human Development and Services,<br />

School of Education<br />

98<br />

Woessner and his colleagues (2000) found that students<br />

generally prefer to seek academic guidance and advice from<br />

peers rather than professors. These findings are not entirely<br />

surprising in view of the long-held belief suggesting that a<br />

natural, perhaps even necessary, divide exists between<br />

students and senior faculty. In this respect, Graduate<br />

Teaching Assistants may find themselves uniquely poised to<br />

act as a liaison between undergraduate students and their<br />

senior faculty.<br />

Within the context of most graduate and professional<br />

programs, there is the expectation that graduate students<br />

should strive to develop skills and abilities which distinguish<br />

them as future professionals and educators (Landrum &<br />

Nelsen, 2002). Moreover, common wisdom suggests that<br />

teaching assistantships provide multiple opportunities for<br />

graduate students to experience and engage in activities<br />

important to professional preparation. Specifically, Graduate<br />

Teaching Assistants routinely observe senior faculty as they<br />

negotiate the demands and complexities of the larger academic<br />

structure, little of which the typical undergraduate student is<br />

likely to understand. Similarly, Graduate Teaching Assistants<br />

often view the academic plights of undergraduate students<br />

with empathy, which may accordingly “set the stage” for<br />

positive Graduate Teaching Assistants/student interaction.<br />

Undergraduate students vary in their abilities to<br />

communicate effectively with senior faculty (Kelly, Duran,<br />

& Zolten, 2001). Many reasons may exist to explain this<br />

variance. However, most educators would agree that student<br />

learning moves in a positive direction when the student<br />

perceives the teacher, instructor, or professor as both caring<br />

and approachable. Thus, encouraging effective communication<br />

between students and teaching personnel seems important.<br />

As a practical matter and as indicated above, it is reasonable<br />

to assume that Graduate Teaching Assistantss may<br />

experience fewer impediments to positive communication<br />

when interacting with undergraduate students and that this<br />

interpersonal advantage could translate into helping smooth<br />

and improve communication between undergraduate<br />

students and senior faculty. Facilitating positive<br />

communication is an important trait or characteristic of an<br />

academic liaison.<br />

Martin, Meyers, and Mottet (1999) suggested undergraduate<br />

students have five primary objectives when communicating<br />

with senior faculty. These student objectives include: (a)<br />

participation (or making evident that they understand course<br />

content); (b) relational (or showing they desire a more personal<br />

relationship with the instructor); (c) excuses (or<br />

explaining tardy work or disappointing test scores);<br />

(d) functional (or trying to improve their understanding of<br />

course content); and (e) sycophancy (or trying to get on the<br />

teacher’s “good side”). At first blush, these objectives may<br />

appear somewhat transparent, and largely set to serve the<br />

student in his or her academic pursuits. In other words,<br />

student concerns regarding the overall academic picture,<br />

including Graduate Teaching Assistants’ and senior faculty’s<br />

scholarly activities, as well as the university’s administrative<br />

responsibilities, appear under-represented, if not altogether<br />

absent, among the listed objectives. Nonetheless,<br />

professional educators, the rank and file of which Graduate<br />

Teaching Assistants aspire to join, cannot lose sight of one<br />

fundamental goal – to impart knowledge to the next<br />

generation of learners. As an academic liaison, Graduate<br />

Teaching Assistants can foster among students a better<br />

understanding of the over all academic picture, and<br />

engender among senior faculty a greater sensitivity to the<br />

developmental nuances of typical undergraduate behavior.<br />

In conclusion, university Graduate Teaching Assistants find<br />

themselves set upon a professional course designed to allow<br />

them full admission into academia. Accordingly, Graduate<br />

Teaching Assistants can realistically define their academic<br />

role as one which spans multiple academic arenas. Moving<br />

comfortably and fluidly among multiple academic arenas is<br />

the hallmark of the liaison’s role. Graduate Teaching<br />

Assistants are encouraged to utilize this exclusive role to<br />

facilitate the teaching and learning occurring between<br />

senior faculty and students, as well as to further their own<br />

personal and professional growth and development.<br />

References<br />

Kelly, L., Duran, R. L., & Zolten, J. J. (2001). The effect of reticence on college students’ use of electronic<br />

mail to communicate with faculty. Communication Education, 50, 170-176.<br />

Landrum, R. E., & Nelsen, L. R. (2002). The undergraduate research assistantship: an analysis of the benefits.<br />

Teaching of Psychology, 29, 15-19.<br />

Martin, M. M., Meyers, S. A., & Mottet, T. P. (1999). Students’ motives for communicating with<br />

their instructors. Communication Education, 48, 155-164.<br />

Woessner, R., Honold, M., Stehr, S. N., & Steidel, W. I. (2000). Support and faculty mentoring programmes<br />

for medical students in Germany, Switzerland, and Austria. Medical Education, 34, 480-482.


Additional information is available at:<br />

Serving as a Faculty/Student Liaison - Linked with permission from Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> TA<br />

Handbook. (Scroll about half way down linked article to locate this section.)<br />

99<br />

Recommending ESL for International Teaching Assistants<br />

By Jason DePolo<br />

Lecturer<br />

Department of English,<br />

College of Arts and Sciences<br />

Introduction<br />

Language skills are essential to any individual placed in a teaching situation. The importance<br />

of these skills is amplified when the Graduate Teaching Assistant’s native language is not<br />

English. Concerns over pronunciation, speech clarity and volume, social interaction, and cultural<br />

awareness are only a few of the most important challenges the international Graduate Teaching<br />

Assistant will face. Developing sufficient English communication skills is a long and difficult<br />

process for ESOL learners. It is recommended that early on in an international Graduate<br />

Teaching Assistant’s program of study that he or she consider the proficiency at which English is<br />

used. The intention of this chapter is to outline the major concerns of international Graduate<br />

Teaching Assistants as well as suggest ways to improve communication in English.<br />

Cultural Awareness<br />

Awareness of the structure and diversity of the United <strong>State</strong>s’ education system is imperative.<br />

The educational system of the United <strong>State</strong>s drastically differs from learning institutions<br />

abroad. For example, students wishing to pursue higher education or vocational training are<br />

taught together in the same programs of study in most high schools unlike the specialized<br />

secondary training abroad. In addition, students often come from very diverse ethnic, cultural,<br />

sexual, age, and socio-economic backgrounds, which impact the way they learn, and<br />

consequently, how they are taught. It is very important to consider the cultural “make-up” of<br />

each class and approach instruction from diverse viewpoints. Three important classroom<br />

techniques exist that enable an instructor to be aware of student diversity and successfully<br />

meet the academic needs of the classroom community:<br />

Multiple Teaching Methods: By implementing various methods of instruction, the<br />

international Graduate Teaching Assistant can better address individual student learning<br />

needs. The learning styles of students have been, generally, categorized in three ways: visual,<br />

auditory, and kinesthetic. Visual learners are more successful when presented with material in<br />

texts, charts, graphics, and media. Auditory learners prefer oral explanations, lecturers, and<br />

even sound recordings. Kinesthetic learners need hands-on application of the material<br />

through explanations of how to apply the learned concepts or even physical manipulation of<br />

the lesson when possible. When these different approaches are used in the classroom, a<br />

greater number of students will actually learn the material.<br />

Student Interaction: Interaction should occur in the classroom in two ways: teacher/student<br />

and student/student. The international Graduate Teaching Assistant should be conscious that<br />

students not only learn from interaction with the instructor but also through in-class group<br />

work. A balance of these two types of interaction ensures diverse student needs are being<br />

addressed.<br />

Individual Student Needs: The international Graduate Teaching Assistant must be attentive<br />

to each student’s needs independent from the rest of the class. Regularly scheduling<br />

conferences and meeting office hours provides time for individual problems to be addressed.<br />

Because there is never enough time to adequately address all of the students’ needs during<br />

conferences or office hours, the IGTA needs to be aware of the various student support<br />

facilities available.


Classroom Communication<br />

Clear communication is essential. Undergraduates notice errors in pronunciation and grammar,<br />

which is often a concern for IGTA’s, and this can lead to classroom problems. Another issue is<br />

pacing. Pacing is the rate at which a teacher talks. If pronunciation and grammar are an issue,<br />

then the IGTA needs to speak slowly enough to allow comprehension to take place. The IGTA<br />

must be very careful that he or she is understood by the class. Comprehension can easily be<br />

checked by asking the class questions, analyzing the attentiveness of the class, and reviewing<br />

exams to check if an inordinate number of students are not grasping the material. If a problem<br />

does seem to exist that is rooted to the instructor’s English proficiency, the IGTA should seek help<br />

from on-line resources or the <strong>University</strong>’s ESOL program and lab. In addition, the IGTA should<br />

clearly outline on the board, or via overhead, the day’s lesson. This organizational strategy clearly<br />

provides students with a reference point that aids in comprehension.<br />

Conclusion<br />

Self-conscious teaching is the key to success for the International Graduate Teaching Assistant.<br />

Through monitored and careful practice, the ITA can meet diverse learner needs and even improve<br />

his or her proficiency in English. By presenting material in various ways to respond to individual<br />

learning styles, clarifying discussions with examples and illustrations, emphasizing and summarizing<br />

key ideas, and encouraging both teacher/student and student/student interaction, the international<br />

graduate teaching assistant can productively meet the needs of a diverse student body.<br />

100<br />

The Teacher - Student Relationship<br />

By Patricia Bethea-Whitfield, Ed.D.<br />

Rehabilitation Counseling Coordinator<br />

Department of Human Development and Services,<br />

School of Education<br />

The success of the teaching and learning process depends in large part on the relationship<br />

between the teacher and the student. While, the role of the teacher was once viewed as that of<br />

the impassive expert, today the teacher is more often viewed as facilitator and collaborator. Far<br />

from being a win-lose interaction, contemporary teaching sets up an academic partnership in<br />

which the teacher and student are each enriched by the presence and knowledge of the other.<br />

Consequently, the building of rapport is as important in teaching and learning as in any other<br />

relationship. From the outset, it will be necessary to accept the goodwill of the student<br />

recognizing that the student wants to achieve but may not have the skills or support to do so.<br />

Using the therapeutic principals of Rogers (1951), the teacher who demonstrates empathy,<br />

respect, and unconditional positive regard can create an atmosphere for growth and change.<br />

Empathy is an especially important part of healthy teacher-student relationships (Mendes, 2003).<br />

Being able to understand the student’s experience from his or her perspective requires the<br />

teacher to put away his/her judgments and value an issue because it is important to the student.<br />

To begin, identify the feeling the student is sharing and use it in a formula: ‘you feel ________<br />

because ____________’ (Egan, 2002).<br />

For example, “you feel frustrated because you do not have the background for this course”.<br />

Correctly identifying the feeling is a powerful connecting moment between two individuals but<br />

even if the first effort is not accurate, the student will perceive the caring of the teacher.<br />

To further understand the world of the student, teachers need an appreciation for diversity.<br />

Maintaining an open attitude to all students can help to create an environment for learning<br />

where students from different races, cultures and ethnic backgrounds can share and enrich the<br />

learning experience. This openness needs to extend to often neglected individual differences<br />

including age as in the case of non-traditional students, rural/urban backgrounds and<br />

socioeconomic status as well.<br />

Also, it is important to remember that while the classroom is an ideal place for students to voice<br />

their views, the teacher must remain the objective facilitator creating a level playing field for<br />

debate. It is never acceptable for students to attack or belittle other students. When the teacher


models an openness to diversity, students can learn to appreciate the diversity of peers at the<br />

university in preparation for the world of work later on.<br />

Along with student-centered teacher qualities, good listening is vital for the teacher-student<br />

relationship. First, remove the impediments to active listening such as being distracted or<br />

judgmental of the student. Secondly, do not jump to conclusions or generate premature<br />

solutions and thirdly, do not blame. ‘You’ statements generally are not effective. For example,<br />

‘you said you were going to come by yesterday. You kept me<br />

waiting’ communicates an attitude of blaming. Such a<br />

statement would rarely set the stage for productive dialog.<br />

Because what we do carries more weight than what we say,<br />

listening will be first reflected in our body language. Egan<br />

(2002) suggests a model for nonverbal communication,<br />

SOLER, which includes:<br />

☛ Relaxed<br />

Using these non-verbal cues can send a message that the student and his or her concerns are<br />

important. This attending is especially crucial because students often feel they are intruding by<br />

coming to the teacher’s office or desk after class. Never attempt to do several things at once or<br />

engage in any behavior that would make the student feel unvalued by your inattention. If you<br />

truly do not have time to meet, use good nonverbal responses as you say so and warmly invite<br />

the student to return when you will have the time to do your best listening.<br />

Ultimately, teachers who develop good rapport with their students may find themselves<br />

moving into a mentoring relationship as well. Mentoring occurs when professionals are willing<br />

to share their career experience and perspectives with students who are looking for direction.<br />

Sometimes mentoring takes the form of encouragement, information, advocacy or feedback<br />

that can help a student establish a career path. By investing in the mentoring relationship,<br />

mentors often find their lives enriched as well (Mullen, 2000). For further information on<br />

mentoring, see Adviser, Teacher, Role Model, Friend published by National Academy Press<br />

and available on the internet at http://www.nap.edu/readingroom/books/mentor/1.html.<br />

Finally, Egan (2002) makes the point that not all help is helpful. Despite the best efforts to<br />

develop quality relationships with students, conflicts can arise. Teachers do not help when they<br />

enable their students. In cases where a student refuses to accept responsibility for meeting<br />

deadlines or producing quality work, the teacher does not help who succumbs to requests for<br />

grade changes or accepts excessive absences and other manipulations. Learning how to<br />

confront without blaming can expedite the management of conflict. To achieve this, focus on<br />

the behavior, your reaction to the situation and what you want, avoiding the ‘you statement.’<br />

For example, “Ted, when you miss your appointment, I feel that you are not committed to your<br />

program. In the future, I will expect you to call if you cannot keep your appointment.” Helping<br />

students to accept responsibility for their choices helps to prepare them for learning and<br />

achieving in the classroom and beyond.<br />

References<br />

☛ Sitting square/facing the student<br />

and maintaining<br />

☛ Open posture (as opposed to<br />

crossed arms)<br />

☛ Leaning toward the other person<br />

and maintaining<br />

☛ Eye contact while remaining<br />

Egan, G. (2002). The Skilled Helper. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole.<br />

Mendes, E. (2003). What empathy can do. Educational Leadership, 61(1), 56-60. Retreived<br />

February 24, 2004, from Academic Search Elite.<br />

Mullen, C.A. (2000). Constructing co-mentoring partnerships: Walkways we must travel.<br />

Theory Into Practice, 39(1), 4-12.<br />

Rogers, C. (1951). Client-Centered Therapy: Its current practice, implications, and theory. Boston:<br />

Houghton Mifflin.<br />

Additional information may be located at the following link:<br />

Managing Student/Teacher Conflicts - Linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of Georgia -<br />

Handbook for Graduate TAs – Student-Teacher Conflicts Section.<br />

101


SECTION VIII<br />

Professional Development<br />

102<br />

Overview<br />

By Jason DePolo<br />

Lecturer<br />

Department of English, College of Arts and Sciences<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistants play a vital role at any university or college. It is a challenge<br />

often met with apprehension due to a lack of prior teaching experience. Primarily, the anxiety<br />

does not arise from questioning what to teach, but rather how to teach. However, teaching is a<br />

lifelong learning process. Both new and experienced teachers alike can grow and alleviate<br />

teaching anxiety through the simple practice of reflective teaching.<br />

Professional development constitutes activities generated by individual teachers, organizations,<br />

and schools that aid old and new teachers in learning current and effective ways to teach.<br />

Unfortunately, regular professional development opportunities are often not readily available<br />

when inexperienced teachers need them. The main focus of this section is to explore ways in<br />

which the Graduate Teaching Assistant can use the “self” as a source. Professional development,<br />

inherently, is the responsibility of the individual. As academics, new and old teachers possess<br />

the critical tools and insight necessary to invent new strategies and methods of teaching simply<br />

through self-reflection, or cognitively negotiating between what has been done and what could<br />

be done better. By reflecting on teaching, the Graduate Teaching Assistant can be involved<br />

directly in the constant pursuit of positively changing and tweaking his or her teaching methods.<br />

Reflective professional development can provide personalized, custom-designed, and self-directed<br />

insight into teaching ability and growth. This can be achieved through professional organization<br />

membership, teaching journals, case studies, audio/visual observation, and teaching portfolios.<br />

Professional Organization Membership<br />

By joining a professional organization, often at discounted student rates, Graduate Teaching<br />

Assistants can open themselves up to a world of development opportunities. The professional<br />

publications of these organizations provide insight into the theoretical and pedagogical<br />

practices of a discipline, as well as introduce the Graduate Teaching Assistant to the various<br />

positions on issues that impact the field. In addition, membership includes invitations to<br />

conferences and workshops that lead to new and effective teaching strategies. Each organization<br />

acts as a collective voice with outlets for advocacy of the profession, advanced education and<br />

training, theoretical and empirical foundations for learning, and standards of practice.<br />

Teaching Journals<br />

Journals are an integral part of the teaching reflection process. They record observations and<br />

changes in teaching perspective. Also, journals provide Graduate Teaching Assistants with an<br />

outlet to comment on lectures, class discussions, assignments, and concerns. Ideally, the<br />

reflective teaching journal should be designed dialogically. A group of Graduate Teaching<br />

Assistant in a given department would keep a teaching journal and then exchange the journals<br />

periodically to be responded to through actual writing in the journal by a colleague. This<br />

practice creates deeper perspectives of reflection as well as a community of teacher/learners.<br />

Case Studies<br />

Case studies aid in recognizing what other teachers are doing and provide insight into what the<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistant can do to improve his or her teaching. The Graduate Teaching<br />

Assistant selects an experienced teacher in the department and conducts a mini-ethnographic<br />

study of teaching practices. First, the Graduate Teaching Assistant interviews the experienced


teacher and transcribes responses to questions that give insight into the concerns, pedagogical<br />

and otherwise, what the Graduate Teaching Assistant deems significant. This can include questions<br />

dealing with the selected teacher’s own early teaching experiences, evaluation procedures, and<br />

classroom management strategies. The GTA then collects archival material, such as syllabi,<br />

course calendars, assignment descriptions, and sample student work. Next, the student observes<br />

the instructor in the class room and documents techniques and student reactions. Finally, the<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistant writes the case study, describing and evaluating the teacher’s practices<br />

and theoretical viewpoints. Ultimately, the student gains a clearer sense of what an experienced<br />

teacher does and how hose strategies and methods can be applied to his or her own teaching.<br />

Audio/Video Observation<br />

One of the most overlooked strategies of self-initiated professional development is revealing<br />

what actually goes on in the Graduate Teaching Assistant’s classroom with the objective use of<br />

video and audio tape. By videotaping or tape recording a series of classes, the Graduate Teacher<br />

Assistant can observe first-hand those things he or she does well and those that need improvement.<br />

For example, the Graduate Teaching Assistant may observe the fact that he or she does not<br />

circulate around the classroom, use a clear and projected voice, acknowledge a variety of<br />

student volunteered responses, or effectively use board space. This type of observation provides<br />

insight into other wise unconscious teaching habits.<br />

Teaching Portfolios<br />

Like journals, teaching portfolios provide the Graduate Teaching Assistant with documentation<br />

for reflection and revision. In addition, if the Graduate Teaching Assistant plans on a professional<br />

career in teaching, hiring universities commonly require teaching portfolios as part of the job<br />

application process. Simply put, the teaching portfolio is a structured collection of information<br />

about a teacher’s practice in the classroom. It should include the following:<br />

103<br />

• Teaching philosophy<br />

• Details of courses taught<br />

• Peer observation notes/evaluations<br />

• Feedback from learners<br />

• Examples of student work<br />

• Teaching materials, such as<br />

handouts, assignments, and exams<br />

with written explanations of their<br />

content and function<br />

• Teacher writing samples<br />

The teaching portfolio allows the Graduate Teaching Assistant to examine what is done in the<br />

classroom, what isn’t, and what should be done to ensure students’ needs are being met.<br />

Reflective teaching improves a Graduate Teaching Assistant’s awareness of what is actually going<br />

on in the classroom, how it can be better approached, and how it can be improved. It opens up<br />

his or her mind to the possibility of change. Finally, it is through change that professional<br />

development and intellectual growth occur.<br />

The following sub-sections provide additional information on resources and services to aid you<br />

in incorporating reflective practice into your own teaching experiences.<br />

Additional Information on Professional Development for GTAs:<br />

Professional Development of GTAs in the United <strong>State</strong>s – linked from Learning and Teaching<br />

Support Network.


Reflective Practice<br />

By Patrice J. Faison, M. Ed, NBCT<br />

Clinical Faculty<br />

Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />

School of Education<br />

104<br />

Today education is in dire need of reform. Educational reform has to begin with changing how<br />

we prepare our teachers. In shifting the way we prepare teachers for professional practice, we<br />

enable our students to confront, shift, and/or refine the beliefs, knowledge, values, and<br />

assumptions that form their personal theories about teaching and learning (Abell, Anderson,<br />

and Bryan). Reflection helps beginning teachers untangle the web of deeply entrenched<br />

personal theories about teaching and learning.<br />

Prospective teachers no longer view teaching as a predetermined set of rules or “bag of tricks”<br />

to apply to any given classroom situation, but as a practice which is grounded in a system of<br />

values, theories, and practice (Schon, 1983). Reflective Practice is one of the major changes<br />

we must make and will be briefly discussed in this section.<br />

For the purpose heretofore, reflective practice will be defined as ‘thinking about and learning<br />

from one’s own practice.’ It can involve talking and keeping a journal, but always involves<br />

thinking and acting. Furthermore, from thinking and acting, the teacher is able to experiment<br />

with solutions to problems of one’s practice and examine the consequences and implications.<br />

From this talking and journal keeping, questions are being developed as to the importance<br />

and the effectiveness of the learning experience. The practitioner is also thinking about the<br />

effect on student learning and the significance of the activity to impact student learning.<br />

Steps to Becoming a Reflective Practitioner<br />

Reflective practice begins with framing issues of classroom practice and specific experiences in<br />

one’s own practice. One must begin to question and examine passionately held ideas and<br />

assumptions about their teaching. This will assist in developing and communicating the<br />

rationale that underlies teaching strategies that are implemented.<br />

In addition to questioning and examining oneself, others can assist in<br />

the reflective process. Students can be of a huge assistance with the<br />

reflection process. It is imperative to know if the information you are<br />

intending to convey is opaque or confusing to students. There are<br />

varieties of ways feedback can be gathered from students:<br />

•Journaling<br />

•Discussion<br />

•Surveys<br />

•Observation<br />

These methods can be used concurrently and should be ongoing and permanent in the<br />

reflection process. Another factor that can play an important part in becoming an effective<br />

reflective practitioner is contribution from colleagues. Colleagues can assist by observation and<br />

thoughtful conversations, and providing help with aspects of your practice that you may not be<br />

aware. They can also suggest strategies to address particular situations.<br />

By becoming a reflective practitioner, educators will enhance their teaching success and, in<br />

turn, help repair our educational system.<br />

References:<br />

Schon, D.A.(1987).Educating the reflective practitioner: Toward a new design for teaching<br />

and learning in the professions. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.<br />

Abell, S.K., Cennamo, K.S., Anderson, M.A., Bryan, L.A. Coaching Reflective Practice<br />

Among PreService Elementary Science Teachers.<br />

http://www.ed.psu.edu/CI/Journals/96pap27.htm


Student Surveys<br />

By Therese Coon<br />

GTA at N. C. A&T<br />

<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

105<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistants are practitioners<br />

who should continually evaluate the effects of<br />

his or her choices and actions on others<br />

(students, faculty, and other professionals in the<br />

learning community) and actively seek out<br />

opportunities to grow professionally. One way to<br />

evaluate your teaching is to seek feedback from<br />

the students you teach. Many GTAs provide a<br />

form for student feedback during and/or at the<br />

end of the semester. A couple of examples are<br />

provided for you as a guide, as well as a link to a<br />

web-site where you can create customized course<br />

evaluations on-line.<br />

The first is a survey designed and utilized by Therese<br />

Coon. As you can see, she precedes the survey with<br />

a brief note of instruction to the students.


Survey A<br />

From:<br />

106<br />

To: Course: Semester:<br />

Date:<br />

Re: Course Evaluation and Recommendations<br />

Thank you for making my first semester as a graduate teaching assistant, and student, an interesting experience!<br />

I have enjoyed meeting you and working with you throughout the semester. Your response to this survey will<br />

help me understand what to keep and what to change to improve the course.<br />

Thank you for taking the time to complete this questionnaire. Please return in to me by _____________________<br />

either directly or to my mailbox ______________________________.<br />

1. What was the most useful thing you learned this semester?<br />

2. What was the least useful thing you learned this semester?<br />

3. What would you prefer to see changed about this course?<br />

4. What would you keep in this course?<br />

5. To take advantage of the career fair timing, I pulled up Chapter 7 (The Job Search) and parts of<br />

Chapter 6 (Letters) to the front of the schedule. Was this effective for you?<br />

6. The papers, presentation, and final exam made up ~75% of the grade and due dates all fell in last<br />

part of semester. Would you recommend spacing these out differently? If so, how?<br />

7. Was lab time useful to you? Were the lab assignments (few) helpful? How would you recommend<br />

lab time be worked into the course?<br />

8. I am considering contracting with students for grades. For example, students would need to<br />

complete up to 800 pts worth of work. This could be done by homework assignments, class<br />

assignments, some number of projects, and mid-term/final exams. The total available work would<br />

be worth more than 800 pts. What do you think about this option? Have you experienced this<br />

type of grading in other courses?<br />

9. Would you prefer to see more group work or more individual work in this course? Why?<br />

10. What are your thoughts on the use of the various presentation materials used this semester?<br />

Overheads: use more use less about right<br />

PowerPoint: use more use less about right<br />

Handouts: too many too few about right<br />

Lecture: too much too little about right<br />

In-class work: too much too little about right<br />

Lab time: too much too little about right<br />

Guest speakers -<br />

(campus/industry): too much too little about right<br />

Do you have comments about any of these materials? Are there materials or teaching aids that you<br />

recommend that may communicate this material more effectively?<br />

11. What would have helped you prepare better for the major documents?<br />

12. Any facility suggestions you may have?<br />

13. Any other recommendations or ideas that I may not have asked about?


Another survey sample, reprinted from a newsletter at the <strong>University</strong> of California-Los<br />

Angeles, is included as an appendix item in the Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> TA Handbook (linked<br />

with permission from Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.) You may want to tailor the evaluation to your<br />

circumstances and the aspects of your teaching on which you want students to comment.<br />

Instead of a numerical rating, you may prefer a more informal survey to collect student<br />

suggestions and opinions.<br />

107<br />

You are encouraged to use this format or design your own at Customized Course Evaluations<br />

that addresses the elements of the particular course(s) you are teaching.<br />

While most professors distribute a standard Student Opinion Form to students at the end of<br />

each semester to gather feedback, this data is not always compiled and available to the GTA in<br />

a time frame that allows them to use the feedback for the very next course they teach. By<br />

providing your own survey tool in addition to the standard university form, you will be able to<br />

study the feedback immediately and determine what aspects of the course and/or your teaching<br />

need to be fine-tuned before the next semester begins.<br />

Additional resources on reflective practice for Graduate Teaching Assistants are available<br />

by clicking on the links below.<br />

Assessing and Improving Your Teaching – <strong>University</strong> of Washington, Center for Instructional<br />

Development & Research. Sub-topics include:<br />

•Student Ratings<br />

• Teaching Portfolio<br />

•Peer Observation<br />

• Four Elements of Effective Teaching<br />

•Faculty Observation<br />

Feedback from your Students - Linked with permission from Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

(Scroll down about 9/10 of the way through the linked article to locate this section.)<br />

Growth as a Teacher – Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Journaling – Inspiring Teachers Publishing, Inc.<br />

Professional Reflective Journaling – Patricia E. Eagle<br />

Student Surveys of Teaching – Murdoch <strong>University</strong>


Instructional Support and Services<br />

What’s offered at NC A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

The School of Graduate Studies offers several workshops each semester designed to prepare<br />

graduate students to enter academic or research careers. Funding for the workshops is provided by<br />

the Student Retention and Transition (STAR) Program, which is supported by a grant from the<br />

National Science Foundation. Previous topics included:<br />

“The Teaching Process: A Study in an Active<br />

Learning Environment”<br />

“Conducting the Class”<br />

“Discussion Class Guidelines”<br />

“Lecture Class Guidelines”<br />

Department Training and Resources<br />

“Using Technology to Support Pedagogy”<br />

“Using Your Voice Effectively”<br />

“Practice Teaching Session”<br />

“Creating a Teaching Portfolio”<br />

Many departments schedule orientation and training activities for new Graduate Teaching Assistants<br />

and/or faculty. In some cases, this orientation involves several days of meetings, interviews, and<br />

information sessions. Most of these orientation sessions – which may run for an afternoon or for<br />

several days – take place at the beginning of the fall term. Contact your department about<br />

orientation and training possibilities available to you.<br />

Your primary contacts as a Graduate Teaching Assistant will be with the department that has<br />

hired you. As a member of the teaching staff of the department, you will find your departmental<br />

office to be a major source of advice and assistance.<br />

In most departments, one person serves as the primary adviser for graduate students. In small<br />

departments, the chair may handle this function. Elsewhere, another faculty member may be primarily<br />

responsible for orienting new graduate students, answering their questions, and<br />

getting them started on the process of finding suitable major professors. The department’s Director<br />

of Graduate Education may serve as the primary contact person for general questions relating to<br />

assistantships. Another faculty member may serve as supervisor for the course in which you have<br />

been assigned a role as one of the GTAs (in most instances GTAs are, in fact as well as in name,<br />

assistants to professors in classrooms and laboratories). A member of the<br />

clerical staff may handle classroom or supply allocations.<br />

108<br />

Developing a good working relationship with all of these departmental faculty and staff<br />

members is an important factor in a productive and pleasant graduate experience.<br />

Additional Campus Resources<br />

Academy for Teaching and Learning<br />

Promotes teaching excellence and the scholarship of teaching and learning, by integrating new<br />

technologies into instruction and adopting multimedia resources to create, support, and manage a<br />

responsive learning community.<br />

Provides leadership in coordinating and distributing technical support services and resources<br />

for sound pedagogical practices enhanced by the latest wireless classroom lab,<br />

teleconferencing, videoconferencing, and multimedia technologies.<br />

Conducts workshops and holds think share sessions to support pedagogic activities<br />

• Instructional enhancement (Teaching and<br />

Learning with Technology)<br />

• Professional and personal development<br />

•Technology accessibility and infusion<br />

• Assessment and evaluation assistance<br />

• Leadership development for professional<br />

growth<br />

• Scholarly exchange of works<br />

• Grant writing and reporting<br />

• Collaborations and partnerships<br />

• Recognition and reward system<br />

•Research initiatives<br />

• Development of innovative works


Campus Media Centers<br />

• Academy for Teaching and Learning<br />

(Bluford Library-Lower Level)<br />

o On-line course delivery faculty development<br />

and training<br />

o Laptops, projectors, and electronic devices for<br />

faculty use and training<br />

o Arranging and coordinating videoconferences and<br />

other Web cast programs for academic departments<br />

o Conducting special workshops on technology<br />

and pedagogy<br />

o Training faculty and staff on basic computer<br />

skills and software usage<br />

o Coordinating and delivering campus-wide media<br />

services including video production, audio<br />

recording, computer, and multimedia<br />

applications<br />

• Center for Distance Learning<br />

(1020 Wendover Avenue 2nd Floor)<br />

o Electronically equipped wireless room for<br />

professional meetings, small classes, seminars,<br />

and presentations<br />

o Videoconferencing, and teleconferencing<br />

o Coordinate and implement distance learning<br />

activities<br />

Professional Development Center:<br />

• Crosby Hall (College of Arts and Sciences)<br />

o Video and audio production<br />

o Visual communications<br />

o Instructional television<br />

o Media streaming (audio and video no the Web)<br />

• McNair Hall (College of Engineering)<br />

o eleconferencing<br />

o Videoconferencing<br />

o Interactive/Web cast classroom<br />

• Smith Hall (School of Technology)<br />

o Video and teleconferencing<br />

o Distance Learning/Digital Communication<br />

Networks<br />

o ISDN videoconferencing (High speed video via<br />

telephone lines)<br />

o IP videoconferencing (Internet)<br />

o Direct satellite and cable television programs<br />

•Webb Hall (School of Agriculture)<br />

o Satellite links<br />

o Video services<br />

o Photography<br />

109<br />

• Offers professional developmental workshops<br />

• If you need information regarding workshops and any additional information on what<br />

services are offered please contact:<br />

Dr. Muktha B. Jost<br />

Professional Development Center<br />

2105 Yanceyville Street (336) 275-2060 ext. 3027<br />

Bluford Library:<br />

Instructional Resources:<br />

• Course Related Instruction<br />

• Consultation of Faculty and Librarian over<br />

Library Assignments<br />

• Bluford Individualized Instruction Program<br />

• Interactive Tutorial<br />

• Printed Materials (Guides, Handouts, etc.)<br />

•Walk-In/Point-of-Use Instruction<br />

• Archives on 2nd Floor<br />

• Interlibrary Loan – Service provides for<br />

GTAs and Faculty. Books and articles can<br />

be delivered to Library from other locations.<br />

• Collection Management – Can request the<br />

purchase of material from workshops to be<br />

cataloged and available in library for use.<br />

Virtual Reference Service<br />

NC Knows is a project, still in its testing phase, to provide chat-based virtual reference services in<br />

libraries throughout the state. It is staffed by librarians from various libraries in and outside of the state,<br />

who are on call to chat with and assist you regarding your research needs. You will not necessarily be<br />

speaking to an A&T librarian.<br />

Clicking on the NC Knows banner will take you to the NC Knows page, where you can learn more about<br />

the service, its purpose, and its limitations. Then log in and chat with a librarian to try out the service.<br />

Learning Resources Center:<br />

• If you need information regarding workshops and any additional information on what services<br />

are offered please contact:<br />

Dr. Muktha B. Jost<br />

Professional Development Center<br />

2105 Yanceyville Street (336) 275-2060 ext. 3027


Counseling Services:<br />

• Assists GTAs and faculty with seminars, study workshops, presentation preparation<br />

• Assists with Career Development<br />

110<br />

Further Reading for Professional Development<br />

For more information on teaching and instructional support, locate the following resources at<br />

the campus library or local public library or click on the link (if provided) for Internet access:<br />

Active Learning on the World Wide Web, link provided by San Diego <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Andrews, J. D. W. (Ed.). (1985). Strengthening the teaching assistant faculty. New Directions for<br />

Teaching and Learning, No. 22. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.<br />

Belenky, M. F., Clichy, B. M., Goldberger, N. R., & Tarule, J. M. (1986). Women's ways of knowing:<br />

The Development of Self, Voice, and Mind. New York: Basic Books.<br />

Bess, J. L. (1973). Integrating faculty and student life styles. Review of Educationa Research, 43, 377-403.<br />

Classroom Assessment Techniques, link provided by Southern Illinois <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Cones, J. H., III, Noonan, J. F., & Janha, D. (Eds.). (1983). Teaching Minority Students. New Directions<br />

for Teaching and Learning, No. 16. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.<br />

Davis, Barbara Gross. (1993). Tools for Teaching. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.<br />

Educational Icebreakers, link provided by ABOUT.com.<br />

Erickson, B. L., & Strommer, D. W. (1991). Teaching College Freshmen. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass<br />

Fink, L. D. (1984). The first year of college teaching. New Directions for Teaching and Learning.<br />

No. 17. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.<br />

Kamarovsky, M. (1985). Women in College: Shaping New Feminine Identities. New York: Basic Books.<br />

McKeachie, Wilbert. (1999). Teaching Tips: Strategies, Research, and Theory for College and<br />

<strong>University</strong> Teachers, 10th ed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.<br />

Nyquist, J. D., Abbott, R. D., & Wulff, D. H. (1991). Preparing the Professoriate of Tomorrow to Teach:<br />

Selected Readings in TA Training. Dubuque, IA: Kendall-Hunt.<br />

Pascarella, E. T. Student-faculty informal contact and college outcomes. Review of Educational<br />

Research, 50, 545-595.<br />

Perry, W. G. (1970). Forms of Intellectual and Social Development in the College Years: A Scheme.<br />

New York: Holt, Rinehart, & Winston.<br />

Robinson, G. M., & Moulton, J. (1985). Ethical Problems in Higher Education. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:<br />

Prentice-Hall.<br />

Contact Information for Professional Development<br />

The links below provide information on publications and/or organizations in the field of<br />

higher education.<br />

American Association for Higher Education<br />

Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of<br />

Teaching<br />

The National Council for Staff, Program, and<br />

Organizational Development<br />

The National Teaching and Learning Forum<br />

POD Network- Professional and Organizational<br />

Development Network in Higher Education<br />

Society for Teaching and Learning in Higher<br />

Education<br />

Syllabus: Education Technology for Higher<br />

Education<br />

The Teaching Professor Newsletter, published by<br />

Magna Publications ten times per year.<br />

Tomorrow's Professor, a product of Stanford<br />

<strong>University</strong>’s Learning Laboratory.<br />

<strong>University</strong> Business.com<br />

World Lecture Hall, a product of the <strong>University</strong><br />

of Texas at Austin.


Preparing the Professional Portfolio<br />

By Karen D. Guy, Director, Ph.D.<br />

Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />

School of Education<br />

and Thurman N. Guy, Ph.D.<br />

Associate Professor<br />

School of Agriculture and Environmental Sciences<br />

111<br />

To compete in the 21st century, institutions of higher education, businesses, and special career<br />

organizations at the national and international levels are seeking the best-qualified graduate<br />

students for their programs and for employment. As graduate students compete in school and in<br />

the work force, the need to showcase one’s intellectual capital and professional capabilities<br />

through authentic means has become a challenge for many. However, one trend used in assessing<br />

and evaluating one’s present intellectual capital and capabilities is the professional portfolio.<br />

In higher education, noting the need for assessment and evaluation changes, research has<br />

reported strong use of the professional portfolio as a maverick approach in charting graduate<br />

students professional and personal goals and development. This article describes the professional<br />

portfolio for graduate students in the developing phase, organizing phase, and the collecting<br />

phase. In addition to this discussion, a list of suggested categories are described when preparing<br />

a professional portfolio.<br />

The professional portfolio is simply defined as an organized selective descriptive story or a<br />

profile presentation that documents the achievement of an individual’s professional goals<br />

describing knowledge, skills, and dispositions in a specialized career area. A professional<br />

portfolio documents the professional goals and growth developed over time to showcase the<br />

accomplishments of an individual (Kilbane and Milman, 2003). Most importantly, the<br />

professional portfolio provides graduate students the opportunities to have time to reflect<br />

and refine their professional and personal experiences by charting their own growth<br />

and development.<br />

Developing a professional portfolio<br />

Many graduate schools and businesses across the nation are requesting students to submit a<br />

professional portfolio with their application as an additional supportive documentation before<br />

or during the interview session. The professional portfolio illustrates diverse examples of your<br />

professional and personal growth over an extended period of time during your studies. A welldeveloped<br />

professional portfolio presents the reader with authentic evidence of one’s overall<br />

development that reflects professional and personal goals and objectives. Equally important,<br />

key benefits in preparing a professional portfolio include fostering self-assessment, opportunities<br />

for personal reflections, and developing a tool for future collaboration experiences.<br />

Organizing a professional portfolio<br />

Organizing your professional portfolio in a goal driven manner demonstrates the expected<br />

knowledge, skills, and dispositions that you bring to graduate school or the work force. In<br />

organizing the portfolio, develop comprehensive professional and personal goal statements from<br />

one to five years. In addition, the organization of the portfolio should address the competencies<br />

and/or standards of an individual’s discipline. According to Campbell, Cignetti, Melenyzer,<br />

Nettles, and Wyman (2001), “Regardless of the goals or standards chosen, everything collected<br />

for your portfolio should be organized around the chosen goal statements” (p.4). Therefore, the<br />

artifacts/evidences selected should demonstrate ones ability to be effective in their chosen<br />

discipline. Listed below are key tips for organizing a professional portfolio:<br />

<br />

<br />

Use a quality leather binder for the best looking professional portfolio. A leather binder is<br />

an excellent choice for organizing information that can be added or deleted with dividers<br />

to separate each section.<br />

Use quality paper and section sheets or tabs throughout the portfolio to organize the<br />

information in a professional manner.


Use appropriate fonts, art designs, and other special features for a high quality looking<br />

professional portfolio that is free of all spelling and grammatical errors.<br />

Use photographs, newspaper articles, illustrations, charts, graphs, web citations, and<br />

PowerPoint to display your professional and personal goals and objectives.<br />

Use data, audio and video information to enhance your professional portfolio.<br />

Collecting materials for a professional portfolio<br />

In developing a professional portfolio, various kinds of artifacts or sample evidences of a<br />

student’s work should be collected to illustrate the story presentation or profile plan of an<br />

individual. Such artifacts or samples of work of an individual’s actual performance are presented<br />

through: (1) authentic artifacts of work demonstrated, (2) samples or completed work in<br />

progress, and (3) reflective commentaries with evidence of supportive documentation that an<br />

individual acquired during graduate studies or employment.<br />

112<br />

Diverse documentation from the three sources should be collected, organized, and presented in<br />

a professional manner in a hard copy (paper) document and/or electronic delivery mechanism.<br />

A professional portfolio should not be an exhaustive sample of everything you have<br />

accomplished, but a selective body of documents that are diverse and valued-added that<br />

supports your specialized career path. The following categories may be included in your<br />

professional portfolio:<br />

•Title page<br />

•Table of Contents<br />

• Copy of resume or vita<br />

• Biographical sketch<br />

• Copy of transcripts<br />

•National test results that demonstrate<br />

competencies in a specialized area of study<br />

• Letter of application(s) for employment or<br />

graduate school<br />

• Philosophy summary or a short narrative<br />

related to a specialized area of study<br />

• Professional development plan with goals<br />

and vision statements<br />

• Summary of career professional and<br />

personal milestones<br />

• Special recognitions of achievements<br />

including awards, honors, certificates,<br />

and letters<br />

•Video and audio work samples<br />

• Demonstration of technology skills<br />

• Professional memberships including<br />

leadership positions<br />

• Professional development conferences,<br />

workshops, and meetings participation<br />

and attendance<br />

• Research competition activities<br />

• Scholarly and reflective papers<br />

• Patents and trademarks<br />

• Blueprints, technical drawing, and<br />

illustrations<br />

•Volunteer work or service learning<br />

experiences<br />

• Internships and field-based experiences<br />

• Publications including electronic media<br />

•Work-in progress activities (article, book,<br />

presentation, etc.)<br />

• Recommendations and/or appointments<br />

letters<br />

• Professional reading list for the last two<br />

years<br />

The professional portfolio is an internal picture of you, a snapshot of you professionally and<br />

personally. The final product should be presented accurately, illustrating your knowledge, skills,<br />

and dispositions in a manner that provides positive insight into your past and present<br />

experiences. As a graduate student, this document will be a valuable resource over time for<br />

self-growth, assessment and evaluation purposes, and employment opportunities.


References:<br />

Campbell, D. M., Cignetti, P. B., Melenyzer, B. J., Nettles, D. H., & Wyman, R.M. (2001).<br />

How to Develop a Professional Portfolio: A Manual for Teachers. Needham Heights,<br />

MA: Allyn & Bacon. (p.4).<br />

113<br />

Kilbane, C. R., & Milman, N. B. (2003). The Digital Teaching Portfolio Handbook: A How-<br />

To Guide for Educators. Boston, MA: Allyn and Beacon.<br />

Below are links to several resources to assist in planning and developing your own portfolio.<br />

These links have been provided with permission granted by the host institution:<br />

“Creating a Teaching Portfolio,” (This PDF file is a workbook of activities to get you started on<br />

a teaching portfolio.) Teresa Dawson, Office of Teaching Advancement, <strong>University</strong> of<br />

Toronto at Scarborough, Canada.<br />

“Designing a Teaching Portfolio,” (This file asks questions to help you get started on a teaching<br />

portfolio.) Center for Excellence in Learning and Teaching, Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong><br />

<strong>University</strong>.<br />

Developing a Teaching Portfolio. Linked with permission from the Center for Teaching<br />

Excellence at Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> (Scroll down to Section 5)<br />

How To Produce a Teaching Portfolio. Seldin, Peter. “The Teaching Portfolio – A Practical<br />

guide to improved performance and promotion/tenure decisions.” Bolton, MA: Anker<br />

Publishing Company, Inc. 1991.<br />

“Preparing a Teaching Portfolio: A Guidebook,” The Center for Teaching Effectiveness, The<br />

<strong>University</strong> of Texas at Austin.<br />

“Recommended Portfolio Contents,” Center for Teaching Excellence, Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.


SECTION IX<br />

114<br />

<strong>University</strong> Policies and Procedures related to GTAs<br />

GRADUATE ASSISTANTSHIP ADMINISTRATION POLICY<br />

Dated 8/17/00<br />

Graduate Assistants (GAs) are afforded the opportunity to function both as students and as<br />

professionals, thereby, enhancing the quality of their education through this dual role. They<br />

complement students toward their degrees with teaching, research or administrative work,<br />

under the supervision of faculty or staff.<br />

The demands of this dual role requires them to have a clear understanding of the requirements,<br />

responsibilities, and privileges of their positions. This document is designed to provide basic,<br />

yet comprehensive, information regarding graduate assistantships at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong><br />

Agricultural and Technical <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

Graduate Assistants at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> Agricultural and Technical <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

Graduate assistants at A&T, like their counterparts at other colleges and universities, play a<br />

dual role functioning both as students and professionals. While meeting the academic<br />

requirements of an academic degree, or serving in research, administrative, or teaching<br />

capacities, the graduate assistant works under the supervision of a mentor (faculty or staff<br />

member). Maintaining a clear understanding of this unusual position and becoming familiar<br />

with the requirements and responsibilities to be met both as a student and a professional pose<br />

a unique and difficult challenge for the graduate student. Thus, the graduate student must<br />

become aware of the academic regulations of the School of Graduate Studies at A&T and of<br />

any other specific requirements of his/her academic department. By understanding their role in<br />

the overall function of the university, graduate assistants may meet, more adequately, the<br />

demands of the graduate school and function more confidently as graduate students.<br />

Purpose<br />

A graduate student’s principle objective is to earn a graduate degree. Appointment as a graduate<br />

assistant contributes to that objective by providing an apprenticeship experience along with<br />

financial support. This apprenticeship complements formal instruction and gives the student<br />

practical and personal experience than can only be gained by performing instruction, research,<br />

and administrative activities. Rather than interfere or conflict with the graduate student’s<br />

educational objectives, the assistantship is to aid in the successful completion of the degree<br />

program. To this end, graduate assistants should be given assignment and supervision that will<br />

help them grow professionally. Their responsibilities and formal instruction should reinforce<br />

each other. Research projects should lead to a thesis or dissertation. Teaching should give greater<br />

insight into their own performance as students. The mentor relationship is extremely vital in<br />

achieving this type of integration. Careful planning and valuation will provide both the<br />

university and the graduate student a beneficial relationship.<br />

Graduate Assistantships<br />

A Graduate Assistant (GA) is a general term meaning a graduate student enrolled and<br />

employed by A&T to assist a faculty member or staff member in the area of administration,<br />

research or teaching.<br />

A graduate assistant may fall into one of the following categories:<br />

Graduate Administrative Assistant (GAA)<br />

A Graduate Administrative Assistant’s duties primarily involve assisting the university's<br />

administrative staff or that of a specific department with collecting, organizing and<br />

analyzing various administrative data. These duties should be relevant to the graduate<br />

program and professional goals of the student.


A GAA is most often involved with assisting at registration, collection materials, performing<br />

computer work, editing, helping with department exhibitions and working on special projects.<br />

Minor responsibilities involve attending seminars, engaging in library research and holding<br />

conferences.<br />

Graduate Research Assistant (GRA)<br />

A Graduate Research Assistant is one who assumes research-oriented responsibilities which<br />

involve library work, computer programming, analysis, fieldwork, laboratory experiments,<br />

scientific investigations, or other endeavors. The principal investigator of a funded research<br />

project normally employs GRAs. The student’s work on a research project should be closely<br />

supervised; it could lead to the successful writing of a thesis or dissertation, and provide<br />

long-range direction for the student’s development as a scholar.<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistant (GTA)<br />

A Graduate Teaching Assistant serves in an instructional role in a class or laboratory within<br />

a specific department at NCA&TSU. GTAs may perform pedagogical functions, such as,<br />

preparing lectures, teaching classes, constructing and grading tests, holding conferences,<br />

assigning course grades, or providing support for the faculty member in charge of the course.<br />

In all cases, the GTA works under the supervision of a faculty member. To this end, the GTA<br />

works to gain teaching skills and a better understanding of the essentials of his/her academic<br />

discipline.<br />

115<br />

Both GRAs and GTAs must also fulfill duties and responsibilities concerning safety in the<br />

laboratory equipment. Guidelines are available from the colleges/schools department offices.<br />

Eligibility<br />

To be eligible for a GA appointment, students may not hold non-degree, special, or probationary<br />

status at the <strong>University</strong>. Exceptions to this regulation must be approved by the Dean of School<br />

of Graduate Studies. The GA must be fully admitted to a graduate program devoting full time<br />

towards the degree.<br />

To qualify for a GA appointment, a student must satisfy the following eligibility requirements:<br />

1. Be pursuing a graduate<br />

degree at A&T <strong>State</strong><br />

<strong>University</strong>.<br />

2. Be registered during the<br />

academic year for a<br />

specific number of hours<br />

as prescribed by the<br />

academic department.<br />

3. Maintain a 3.0 grade<br />

point average and make<br />

progress towards the<br />

graduate degree.<br />

4. Satisfy other requirements<br />

published by the<br />

employing college/school<br />

5. The academic unit<br />

shall establish eligibility<br />

for assistantships for<br />

summer sessions.<br />

International students applying for graduate assistantships who are graduates of institutions of<br />

higher education located outside the USA in non-English speaking countries are required to<br />

demonstrate proficiency in the English language by having official scores directly from the test<br />

of English as Foreign Language (TOFEL) submitted to the School of Graduate Studies.<br />

International teaching assistants MUST score a minimum of 550 on the paper base test or 213<br />

on the computer base test. Only scores received from Educational Testing Service, Princeton,<br />

NJ 08451, will be considered official. Students are responsible for requesting ETS to forward<br />

scores to the university.


A graduate student for whom English is a second language must obtain clearance through the<br />

International Students Office for enhancing their communication skills. This office is located in Murphy<br />

Hall, <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> Agricultural and Technical <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, Greensboro, NC 27411; the<br />

telephone number is (336)334-7551. The academic unit (department, college, and school) also<br />

evaluates international students’ effective communication skills.<br />

Academic Enrollment<br />

Graduate Assistants must register during the academic year for a specific number of hours as<br />

prescribed by the academic department.<br />

Additional On-Campus and Outside Employment<br />

No specific established policy regarding additional employment exists. Most departments,<br />

however, discourage additional employment.<br />

Appointment/Reappointment/Duration of Appointment<br />

The Department Chairperson and the Dean of the college/school will make appointment of<br />

GAs. Decisions concerning policies for the appointment and reappointment of GAs are<br />

determined by the academic department with the approval of the appropriate college/school<br />

dean within the guidelines established by the Graduate Council.<br />

Each department must complete an appointment letter. This letter will include:<br />

1. Type of assistantship<br />

2. Amount of stipend<br />

3. Responsibilities of the position<br />

Each GA should expect to receive a letter of appointment including this information. The same<br />

procedure is followed for notification of reappointment. GAs are expected to respond in writing<br />

their acceptance/rejection of letters of appointment and reappointment.<br />

The letter of appointment constitutes the first normal step toward employment as a GA.<br />

Typically, the letter contains a job description outlining the type of appointment, responsibilities,<br />

minimum/maximum course load, salary, length/dates of appointment and a faculty supervisor.<br />

Time of Offer<br />

The following timetable is suggested for the offer and acceptance of the appointments by<br />

academic departments employing graduate students.<br />

Timetable Deadlines Acceptance/Rejection:<br />

4. Duration of the appointment<br />

5. Minimum number of credit hours<br />

Semester Offer Dates Response Dates<br />

Summer February 1 February 15<br />

Fall April 1 April 15<br />

Spring October 1 October 15<br />

Acceptance given or left in force after response date prevents the student from accepting another<br />

appointment without first obtaining formal release from the employing unit. Those academic<br />

departments offering initial appointments after April 15 must make offers as early as possible<br />

during the Spring and Summer sessions.<br />

Consistent with planning information and funds, employing academic departments may offer<br />

another graduate assistantship as early as possible, but no later than two weeks before the end<br />

of Spring Semester.<br />

Commitments are made only for the period initially assigned and are non-transferable in terms<br />

of time. The letter of appointment includes the beginning and ending dates of commitment.<br />

116<br />

All appointments are contingent upon the availability of funds for this purpose. A&T also<br />

adheres to the Council of Graduate Schools resolution regarding graduate assistants.


Period of Appointment<br />

The academic unit (department, college or school) normally makes graduate assistant<br />

appointments. The academic unit also defines the duration and level of compensation for<br />

graduate assistants.<br />

Termination Criteria<br />

A GA appointment may be terminated prior to the end of the appointment period for any of<br />

the following reasons:<br />

1. The GA is no longer enrolled in the School of Graduate Studies.<br />

2. The GA is registered for fewer credit hours than approved by the<br />

academic unit.<br />

3. The GA is registered for more than the maximum number of graduate<br />

credit hours approved by the academic unit.<br />

4. Performance by the GA is determined to be unsatisfactory by the<br />

employing academic department.<br />

5. The position has been terminated due to budgetary constraints.<br />

117<br />

Performance Review<br />

Evaluation is a crucial part of the assistantship program. Supervision and performance reviews<br />

should be an on-going process of communication between the GA and the faculty/staff<br />

supervisor/mentor.<br />

At the end of each term appointment, a formal evaluation will be conducted by the School of<br />

Graduate Studies in a manner equitable to all GAs in each academic department. However,<br />

informal evaluations and observations should be conducted as needed by the department.<br />

The formal evaluation should assure fairness in reappointment. Excellence should be noted as<br />

well as continued inadequacies in performance. As part of the total evaluation, the GA should<br />

assess the experience from his/her perspective as well. The evaluation form utilized at A&T is<br />

provided in Appendix A. Your supervisor will complete the evaluation and discuss it with you<br />

at the end of the semester.<br />

Conduct and Discipline<br />

Means for resolving students’ complaints:<br />

The GA, categorized as both student and instructional leader, especially as a GTA, is subject to<br />

disciplinary procedures for academic misconduct. As an instructional leader, the GA must not<br />

become involved in academic honesty in terms of cheating, plagiarism, fabrication, forgery and<br />

aiding/abetting academic dishonesty. A GA is expected to behave at the highest level of<br />

ethical behavior.<br />

Academic Department Responsibilities<br />

Within the above-stated policies on the Administration of Graduate Assistantships, each<br />

employing academic department appointing GAs must develop, publish and make available its<br />

GA rules. The publication should include the following information:<br />

1. Criteria and procedures for<br />

selecting GAs.<br />

2. Criteria and procedures for<br />

reappointing GAs.<br />

3. Period of appointments.<br />

4. Availability of summer<br />

appointments.<br />

5. Date for notifying students of<br />

appointments and for receiving<br />

acceptance or refusal.<br />

6. <strong>State</strong>ment of duties and<br />

responsibilities.<br />

7. Criteria and procedures for<br />

evaluating and reporting<br />

GA performance.<br />

8. Criteria and procedures for<br />

terminating GA appointments.<br />

9. Grievance procedures within<br />

the academic department.<br />

10. Space and facilities.<br />

11. If available, stipend levels.


Each academic department should endeavor to provide its GAs with appropriate space and<br />

facilities necessary to carry out their assigned teaching, research or administrative duties. A desk<br />

and chair, file space and a mailbox within the department should be provided. Access to a<br />

typewriter or computer, office duplicating equipment and a telephone should be provided.<br />

Grievance Procedures<br />

Discussion of a GA’s concerns with an advisor, supervisor, Graduate Studies Committee Chairperson,<br />

chairperson of the academic department or school dean normally leads to resolution of a grievance.<br />

There may be instances in which resource to these persons does not provide resolution. The<br />

Graduate Council has established grievance procedures, copies of which are available in the School<br />

of Graduate Studies.<br />

Remuneration<br />

Policies related to compensation for GAs vary among colleges/schools. For information<br />

regarding levels of compensation, each GA should contact the respective college/school dean.<br />

Guidelines regarding GTA Qualifications<br />

From NC A&T GTA Evaluation Guidelines – Administrative Memo #349:<br />

118<br />

• Graduate Teaching Assistants (GTAs) must possess a demonstrated competence in the subject matter<br />

that they will be teaching as determined by experts in the field. They should have an appreciation<br />

for the theory and practice of the subject matter, as well as a developing understanding of the major<br />

themes and divisions of their field. They should have an appreciation for the teaching and learning<br />

enterprise acquired from their own undergraduate and graduate academic programs, as well by means<br />

of both required and optional teacher training seminars, symposia, workshops, publications, and<br />

university staff resources. Competency to teach includes an effective command of the language of<br />

instruction, usually American English, and an appreciation for the culture of the American<br />

university classroom.<br />

• GTAs must be graduate students in good standing in their programs, which requires<br />

maintaining a minimum B average, or, at some campuses, receiving no grade lower than B.<br />

Professional/Ethical/Legal Responsibilities for Graduate Assistants<br />

By Kenneth H. Murray, Ph.D., PE<br />

Associate Vice Chancellor for Academic Affairs and<br />

Dean of the School of Graduate Studies<br />

As a Graduate Assistant, you are an employee of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, which<br />

means that the students believe you are the university’s representative in all matters. Many may<br />

not fell that you represent the university outside of the classroom or laboratory, but the students<br />

believe that you do. This means that you must be very careful to understand your responsibilities.<br />

Definitions<br />

To begin the discussion of your professional, ethical, and legal responsibilities requires that we<br />

define some basic terms that will be used throughout this discussion.<br />

Professional – characterized by or conforming to the technical or ethical<br />

standards of a profession which is defined as a calling requiring specialized<br />

knowledge and often long and intensive academic preparation.<br />

Ethical – conforming to accepted professional standards of conduct<br />

controlled by a set of moral principles or values.<br />

Legal – established by law.


Professional Responsibilities<br />

Your professional responsibilities are defined by the teaching profession and include:<br />

Giving correct information at all times, if you<br />

do not know the answer, say so and get help.<br />

Being prepared for all assignments and seek<br />

help from others when it is needed.<br />

Being on time with everything – attendance,<br />

returning work, assignments, etc.<br />

Ethical Responsibilities (Values)<br />

Dressing appropriate for the assignment.<br />

Controlling your actions and language at<br />

all times.<br />

Handling each person as an individual<br />

with respect for them and their views.<br />

Your ethical responsibilities are defined by the standards of the educational community and<br />

especially the standards at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>. They include:<br />

119<br />

Performing your assignments to the best of your<br />

ability.<br />

Being fair and honest in handling people and<br />

data.<br />

Handling all grading as personal and<br />

confidential.<br />

Legal Responsibilities<br />

Your legal responsibilities are defined by Federal and <strong>State</strong> law and often overlap your ethical<br />

responsibilities since many of our ethical values have been canonized into the law. They include:<br />

Providing the university with all legal<br />

documentation required for the position.<br />

Understanding your duties and carrying them<br />

out according to the published schedule.<br />

Not disclosing private or personal information<br />

to anyone except that person.<br />

Not embarrassing anyone under your control<br />

in public – correct improper or incorrect<br />

actions in private with the individual.<br />

Not developing romantic or intimate<br />

relationships with students or staff under<br />

direction.<br />

Not placing relatives under your direction or<br />

give them any special treatment.<br />

Not developing romantic or intimate<br />

relationships with students or staff under your<br />

direction.<br />

Not placing relatives under your direction or<br />

give them any special treatment.<br />

Conclusion<br />

As a Graduate Assistant at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, you have professional,<br />

ethical, and legal responsibilities with respect to your assignment. We have trusted you with<br />

these responsibilities and believe you are capable of caring out these responsibilities and<br />

representing the <strong>University</strong> with the highest of standards. To do this you must understand<br />

the following:<br />

Ethics and values are personal, but with<br />

broader impact.<br />

Maintaining your values is a must, both<br />

personally and professionally.<br />

Shakespeare wrote - “To thine own self be<br />

true” - but this only works if you are “true and<br />

ethical.”<br />

Your values should not change with<br />

situations, but may change with new e<br />

xperiences and over time, and we hope they<br />

improve with each change.<br />

Remember that as a Graduate Assistant you can always ask for help from faculty, staff, and<br />

administrators without feeling embarrassed about not knowing. Great men and women always<br />

know when to say, “I do not know,” and then find the answer. Good luck!<br />

For more information, click on Classroom Legal Issues - linked with permission from<br />

<strong>University</strong> of California - Santa Barbara, Office of Instructional Development.


Safety and Emergency Procedures in the Classroom<br />

Provided by Marvin Dickerson,<br />

Director, ARISA/Environmental Health and Safety,<br />

<strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

120<br />

Instructor’s Responsibility<br />

NC A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> holds in high regard the health and safety of faculty, staff, students<br />

and visitors. It is the policy of the <strong>University</strong> to provide a loss-control program that protects<br />

employees from occupational injuries and illnesses, protects <strong>University</strong> property from loss and<br />

damage, and protects the environment. Operational procedures as developed by <strong>University</strong><br />

safety organizations will be implemented and enforced by all university department/<br />

administrative units.<br />

Consistent with this policy, instructors must become familiar with the Division of Student<br />

Affairs, Crisis Response and Emergency Management Handbook and the <strong>University</strong>’s<br />

Comprehensive Emergency Management Plan (CEMP). These documents are available from<br />

the Vice Chancellor of Student Affairs and the Director of Environmental Health and Safety<br />

office. In addition, the CEMP can be accessed from the <strong>University</strong>’s Front Page Web-site at<br />

www.ncat.edu.<br />

Provide his or her class or audience with general information relating to emergency procedures.<br />

This information should be shared during the first week of class or at the start of a seminar. Please<br />

note the posted information for “Classroom Emergency Procedures.”<br />

Know how to report an emergency from the classroom being used.<br />

Assure that persons with disabilities have the information they need. The instructor should be<br />

familiar with the student’s plan and be able to direct visitors with disabilities.<br />

Take responsible charge of the classroom and follow emergency procedures for all building alarms<br />

and emergencies.<br />

Supplemental Information<br />

As an instructor, what do I need to know about Emergency Preparedness?<br />

Every university department and unit should have a written Emergency Plan covering specific<br />

procedures for their facility and employees. These plans will cover events such as: fire,<br />

earthquake, power outage, bomb threat, hazardous material spills, severe weather, etc.<br />

Instructors will find it helpful to review the plans for the buildings in which they teach to see<br />

if the plans differ from the general information provided here.<br />

The “instructor” is an authoritative figure for the student, either consciously or subconsciously,<br />

and can influence how the student responds in an emergency. Calm, collected and clear<br />

directions by the instructor will have a calming effect on the students. In order for the<br />

instructor to exhibit this controlled personae he or she must be prepared for emergencies.<br />

1. EVACUATION ROUTES – Unless unusual conditions dictate otherwise, the best<br />

evacuation route is the nearest stairway and out the nearest exit.<br />

2. EMERGENCY ASSEMBLY POINTS – After the class leaves the building or area, it is<br />

important for them to go to a pre-determined area where the presence of persons can be<br />

documented. This “safe area” will be a designated Emergency Assembly Point where the class<br />

will not interfere with responding emergency services nor place themselves at risk of injury<br />

from the emergency. Evacuation routes in most university buildings lead the occupants out<br />

the building. However, in some high-rise buildings the evacuation routes may lead occupants<br />

horizontally into another wing or down a couple of floors below the source of the alarm.<br />

These high-rise buildings may have Emergency Assembly Points for both inside and outside<br />

the building.


Accounting for all students can be very difficult, particularly with a large class. However, an<br />

attempt must be made. For example, it might be possible for the instructor to: wait until all<br />

the students have left the room/lab, use the class roster, use a head count or have students see<br />

if the students seated next to them are at the assembly point. You must also account for<br />

persons with disabilities (see below).<br />

121<br />

3. EVACUATION FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES – If there is a person with a<br />

disability in the class, the instructor must be knowledgeable of their response and who may be<br />

assisting them. Four options are available to persons with disabilities:<br />

Horizontal Evacuation to outside or another building, if available.<br />

Stairway Evacuation.<br />

Stay in Place unless danger is imminent.<br />

Area of Refuge if available.<br />

“Elevators cannot be used during an emergency evacuation”!<br />

4. REPORTING TO BUILDING EMERGENCY COORDINATOR – After exiting and<br />

accounting for students, the Building Emergency Coordinator will notify emergency personnel<br />

of persons missing or trapped or persons with disabilities that are waiting assistance in areas<br />

of refuge.<br />

5. FIRE ALARMS – Fire alarms will sound and may include strobe lights for people with<br />

hearing disabilities. When the alarm sounds, everyone must exit the alarmed area according<br />

to the evacuation plan.<br />

Everyone Must Evacuate Immediately!<br />

Procedures that may be hazardous if left unattended should be shut down.<br />

Verify that everyone leaves and that all the doors are closed. Closed doors significantly<br />

reduce fire and smoke damage.<br />

6. WHAT TO EXPECT IN A POWER OUTAGE – The <strong>University</strong> campus power system<br />

is serviced by Duke Power and, over time, has proven to be reliable, even during major<br />

windstorms. Many campus buildings are provided with emergency lighting or standby power<br />

from emergency generators. This system is automatic and should be operational within 60<br />

seconds. Consequently, if the power does go out during class, have the people stay in their<br />

seats for a little while and wait for the power to return. If the power does not return in a<br />

reasonable length of time, (~ 5 minutes) then evacuate the classroom or laboratory.<br />

Evacuation should take advantage of available lighting unless the building is in alarm, and<br />

then use the same evacuation procedures as during a fire. Caution students that there is no<br />

rush and they should take their time exiting the building. Emergency lighting may or may<br />

not be functioning in the room, hallway or stairways.<br />

7. HOW TO REPORT AN EMERGENCY – Check each classroom, lecture hall or laboratory<br />

for the nearest working telephone, the nearest life safety (fire) alarm pull station and the<br />

nearest fire extinguisher.<br />

a. Fire Activate Fire Alarm Pull Station<br />

and if possible - Call 4-7675 or 911<br />

b. Health/Police - Call 4-7675 or 911<br />

c. Hazardous Material Spill - Call 4-7675 or 911<br />

d. Facility or Utility Failure - Call 4-7675 or 911


What Emergency Preparedness Materials should I have with me in Class?<br />

Roster<br />

Important telephone numbers (in addition to Emergency Numbers)<br />

Department Administrator As appropriate<br />

Physical Plant 4-7634<br />

Student Services 4-7696<br />

Other – as appropriate<br />

Classroom Emergency Procedures<br />

1. When you hear the fire alarm…<br />

The Elevators<br />

cannot<br />

be used during<br />

a fire alarm!<br />

Everyone should calmly collect his or her coats and books and<br />

exit the classroom, lecture hall or laboratory.<br />

Please turn off the gas supplies in laboratories.<br />

Leave the room/lab and go to the nearest building exit.<br />

Know the location of alternate exits.<br />

Go to the Emergency Assembly Point. Exception: Persons<br />

with disabilities may choose to remain in place or report to an<br />

area of refuge.<br />

122<br />

2. When there is a power outage…<br />

Everyone should stay in his or her seat to see if the outage is<br />

temporary and to let his or her eyes adjust to the lower light<br />

level.<br />

If the outage appears to be long term, everyone should<br />

calmly collect their materials and carefully exit the building.<br />

3. If there is an earthquake…<br />

4. Shelter-in-Place…<br />

Drop and Cover your head for protection from material that<br />

might fall from the ceiling or walls.<br />

After the shaking stops, calmly evacuate the building.<br />

You should prepare to remain inside of the building or facility<br />

and take directions from designated staff or faculty<br />

Shelter-in-Place coordinators.<br />

5. Student Accident or Injuries…<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

You should assist the injured person with immediate<br />

emergency medical care.<br />

Contact the <strong>University</strong> Police Department and the Office of<br />

Student Affairs.<br />

Collect as much information as possible concerning the<br />

accident and complete an Accident Report (Attachment in<br />

the Student Affairs, Crisis Response and Emergency<br />

Management Handbook).<br />

Forward all obtained information regarding the incident,<br />

directly to the Office of Student Affairs as soon as possible.


<strong>University</strong>-Based Technology Transfer<br />

Economic impact on the university and the world around us<br />

Copyright 2000 © Association of <strong>University</strong> Technology Managers. All rights reserved.<br />

123<br />

Doug Speight<br />

Interim Director<br />

<strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

Office of Technology Transfer and Commercialization<br />

What is Technology Transfer?<br />

Technology Transfer is a term used to describe a formal transferring of new discoveries and<br />

innovations resulting from scientific research conducted at universities to the commercial<br />

sector. One way that universities transfer technology is through patenting and licensing new<br />

innovations. The major steps in this process include: 1) the disclosure of innovations; 2)<br />

patenting the innovation concurrent with publication of scientific research; and 3) licensing<br />

the rights to innovations to industry for commercial development.<br />

How do Academic Institutions Measure Success in Technology Transfer?<br />

Early numerical measures include the number of patents filed, license agreements executed,<br />

and new companies formed. Later, numerical measures include royalties paid to the academic<br />

institutions from the companies that commercialized their inventions and the numbers of<br />

products successfully introduced to the market. Additional models for calculating the public<br />

benefits of technology transfer activities include induced investment, return to licensee/investor,<br />

taxes, and jobs. Success is also demonstrated by the impact the particular products have on our<br />

lives (see for product vignettes.)<br />

Within the university setting, results of technology transfer include a university's capability to<br />

retain entrepreneurial faculty and attract outstanding graduate students; its reputation for<br />

innovation; the enhancement of university research through interaction with the private sector;<br />

and, its reputation for providing highly trained students for the industrial workforce.<br />

What are the Benefits of Technology Transfer?<br />

Academic Technology Transfer in FY 1999-specifically the licensing of innovations by<br />

universities, teaching hospitals, research institutes and patent management firms-added more<br />

than $40 billion to the U.S. economy and supported 270,000 jobs. It has helped to spawn new<br />

businesses, create industries, and open new markets. Moreover, it has led to new products and<br />

services that improve our quality of life. From new cancer treatments to faster modems, from<br />

environmentally friendly metal processing to beautiful flowering plants, technology transfer<br />

from academic institutions is enhancing the way we live and work.<br />

Has There Been Growth in Academic Technology Transfer Programs?<br />

Yes. Academic institutions have seen a significant increase in technology transfer activity.<br />

Prior to 1980, fewer than 250 patents were issued to U.S. universities each year and discoveries<br />

were seldom commercialized for the public's benefit. In contrast, in FY 1999, reports indicated<br />

that 3,914 new license agreements were signed. Between FY 1991 and FY 1999, annual<br />

invention disclosures increased 63% (to 12,324), new patents filed increased 77% (to 5,545)<br />

and new licenses and options executed increased 129% (to 3,914).<br />

Why Has There Been Such a Growth in Technology Transfer Programs?<br />

This success in university technology transfer-and the resulting economic and health benefits is<br />

the direct result of the 1980 Bayh-Dole Act. This legislation, co-sponsored by Senators Birch<br />

Bayh and Robert Dole, enabled universities, nonprofit research institutions, and small<br />

businesses to own and patent inventions developed under federally funded research programs.<br />

The Act provides an incentive for universities to market their innovations and for industry to<br />

make high-risk investments.


How Does the Public Benefit from <strong>University</strong>-Industry Partnerships?<br />

<strong>University</strong>-industry partnerships are helping to move new discoveries from the laboratory to the<br />

marketplace faster and more efficiently than ever before-ensuring that products and services<br />

reach the public more quickly and often. The partnership enables a researcher-who made the<br />

initial discovery-to participate in the further development of a product or process, which in turn,<br />

significantly reduces the time to eventual commercialization.<br />

How Do Universities use the Royalties Earned from Licensing?<br />

Royalties earned by academic institutions are used to help advance scientific research and<br />

education through reinvestment in the academic enterprise. The royalties are given, in part, to<br />

university research departments to provide, among other things, new opportunities for graduate<br />

students, buy research equipment, or fund new research. They also are used to help sustain the<br />

technology transfer process by paying for a portion of the legal fees associated with patenting<br />

and licensing, as well as technology management staff. And finally, as the Bayh-Dole Act<br />

requires, a portion of the revenues is shared with the university inventor.<br />

Copyright 2000 © Association of <strong>University</strong> Technology Managers. All rights reserved.<br />

For more information regarding technology transfer at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>,<br />

please contact:<br />

Doug Speight<br />

Interim Director <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

Office of Technology Transfer and Commercialization<br />

Phone: (336) 334-7995 Fax: (336) 334-7086<br />

Email: mspeight@ncat.edu<br />

124<br />

Student Initiated Programs and Unfunded Projects<br />

By Marvin H. Watkins<br />

Special Assistant to the Vice Chancellor for<br />

Research and Economic Development<br />

The Division of Research at NC A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> facilitates scholarly productivity<br />

throughout the university with the fundamental core values being customer service, quality,<br />

commitment, and excellence. The on-going major priorities for the division are to enhance<br />

research and the productivity of sponsored programs for the entire university, to provide<br />

comprehensive support services for the development and administration of research and<br />

sponsored programs, and to enhance the university’s infrastructure for technology transfer and<br />

commercialization. These major priorities also includes programs initiated by graduate students,<br />

both funded and unfunded.<br />

Both undergraduate and graduate students at A&T are heavily involved in a variety of research<br />

and other sponsored program activities in a diversity of areas. Most of these research activities<br />

are sponsored through individual discipline-specific research awards, or through interdisciplinary<br />

research programs. All units and offices of the Division of Research, including those of the<br />

Director of Research Services and the Research Compliance Officer, are available to assist<br />

students interested in research and other sponsored programs. Please contact us at<br />

(336) 334-7995 or visit the Division of Research on the 4th floor of the Fort Interdisciplinary<br />

Research Center (IRC) Building on the main campus.


SECTION X<br />

125<br />

How to Help GTAs Be Successful<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistants are undoubtedly valuable members of the instructional team at<br />

A&T. While many areas have tried and true ways of gracefully blending their GTAs into the<br />

structure and flow of the department, others do so somewhat haphazardly. So regardless of<br />

where your area falls in this spectrum, the following checklist is a tool that will guide you in<br />

preparing for and orienting your GTAs to their new roles.<br />

For the Supervising Professor:<br />

A CHECKLIST to Help GTAs Be Successful<br />

Teaching Assistant’s Name ___________________________________________________________________<br />

Semester/Year _________________________________________ Dept: _______________________________<br />

Supervising Professor’s Name _________________________________________________________________<br />

Check off items as they are completed by initialing in the<br />

column to the left and indicating date accomplished<br />

Notes<br />

Letter of appointment and job description provided to GTA.<br />

Acceptance from GTA received/acknowledged.<br />

List of specific responsibilities and duties provided to GTA<br />

along with important dates and deadlines.<br />

Arrangements for compensation made.<br />

Office space with a phone arranged.<br />

Arrange for a mailbox and place for messages to be left.<br />

Access to a photocopier, fax machine, computer, and printer.<br />

Clear directions on course requirements, content, etc.<br />

Regular guidance and feedback on the course and their<br />

performance in leading it.<br />

Contact numbers where supervising professor can be reached<br />

at most times in the event of an emergency or crucial situation.<br />

Please add any items that are specific to your department/area as needed.


GTA-to-GTA Advice<br />

By Therese Coon<br />

GTA at N. C. A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

126<br />

Sometimes advice straight from another graduate student who is serving or has served as a<br />

GTA can shed light on an area that you haven’t thought about or are struggling with. Below<br />

are contributions from current and former GTA’s at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />

See which ones can help you in your new role:<br />

From Therese Coon, Graphic Communication Systems:<br />

Remember your classroom experiences as an undergraduate: which instructors and<br />

TAs inspired you to learn the content and do your best work? Model their behaviors<br />

in planning, instruction, feedback.<br />

Treat your GTA assignment as a job. You’ll be writing it into your resume, right? Be<br />

professional, on time, organized, and responsive to the needs of the instructor<br />

(your boss) and the students (your customers).<br />

What’s in it for you? Define what you want to learn from this experience and put that<br />

into your planning for the semester. Do you want to improve your content mastery?<br />

How about giving smoother presentations to the class? Find a creative way to present<br />

the material? Build relationships within the department, school or university?<br />

Remember that you are a role model to the undergraduates. They are soaking up your<br />

perceptions and attitudes about them as students, about being a graduate student,<br />

and about your attitude toward the instructor, department and university with<br />

each interaction. We have not outgrown the poem “Children Learn What<br />

They Live”.<br />

Tips From Former GTAs:<br />

Reflect on what works well for you in class and what doesn't work well and find ways to<br />

further develop your teaching skills.<br />

Utilize resources both in your department and on campus.<br />

Before ever meeting the students, contact the professor in charge of the course and others<br />

involved in the course to learn as much as possible about particular responsibilities and how<br />

the course should be organized and taught.<br />

Talk to colleagues, peers, and friends to learn from them and share teaching experiences.<br />

Offer your students as many opportunities for communication as you are comfortable with.<br />

For example, inform students they can reach you by telephone and provide numbers and<br />

appropriate time frames for calling, or that they can send an e-mail message, drop their work<br />

or notes off in your departmental mailbox, or come by during your office hours.<br />

Try to communicate in a variety of ways based on your audience's needs. Some of us like to<br />

listen to information, others would rather read the information, while others prefer to have it<br />

demonstrated or acted out. Still others may prefer to discuss things.<br />

Keep your presentations simple, exciting and challenging, and adjusted to your audience's<br />

background, knowledge level and interests. Know your audience and consider the needs of<br />

the different groups in your audience to help them learn. Create opportunities for them<br />

to participate.<br />

Students love to get feedback and it needs to be prompt. Grade student work in a consistent<br />

fashion and return it promptly. Allow students to earn extra points if they can present a<br />

convincing argument or prove that the error they made is realized and that they now know<br />

how to do it right.


Be sure to let students know where, when, and how they can reach<br />

you during the semester. Place the name and number of the course<br />

on the board along with your name, e-mail address, phone numbers,<br />

office location and office hours.<br />

Ask students to introduce themselves by sharing their name,<br />

hometown, major, and what they hope to gain from the course.<br />

Hand out 3x5 cards and ask students to give the information they<br />

just gave in the verbal introduction, along with any confidential<br />

information that will help you assist them as a student. For instance,<br />

do they have a learning disability, have they struggled with the<br />

subject in the past, or do they have a hearing problem that you<br />

can accommodate?<br />

It can be helpful to students if you allow them time to get the<br />

names, phone numbers, and e-mail addresses from two or three<br />

other students so they can get notes and assignments from missed<br />

classes or find someone to study with during the semester.<br />

Conduct a warm-up activity. For example, students could play a<br />

word game to help them (and you) learn names. You could also<br />

have the class brainstorm important topics for the course or conduct<br />

preliminary debate on an issue central to the course content.<br />

Introduce students to the course syllabus and the contents within it,<br />

so they can return to the document for questions they have at a<br />

later time.<br />

Be sure to cover attendance and homework expectations, exam and<br />

grading policies, and class participation expectations.<br />

Explain major assignments, papers, projects, reports, and/or lab work.<br />

Make sure you have copies of the textbook, lab manual, and any<br />

other materials used for the course.<br />

Let students know about reserve books, check out policies, and websites<br />

that would be useful to them in their study.<br />

Discuss with students how they can best read the text and study for<br />

this course.<br />

Provide an overview of the course, key concepts, and terminology,<br />

including what you will focus on during the semester and what will<br />

receive only limited coverage.<br />

Explain how the course builds on previous classes they may have<br />

had or how it fits into higher level courses they may one day take<br />

later on.<br />

Offer a specific problem or challenge and work through it with<br />

the class to help them see how people in this field think about<br />

their work.<br />

Share your interest and motivation for the subject itself. Modeling<br />

enthusiasm is key to generating students’ enthusiasm toward<br />

the subject.<br />

Additional Resources:<br />

TIPS FROM THE TRENCHES, linked with permission by the<br />

<strong>University</strong> of Delaware, Center for Teaching Effectiveness,<br />

TA Handbook. Education Resources Links<br />

Graduate Students<br />

may face the<br />

challenge of being<br />

husbands, wives, sons,<br />

sisters, parents and<br />

employees.<br />

To Maintain Balance<br />

and Void Burnout...<br />

•Manage your time<br />

wisely<br />

•Strive for excellence<br />

NOT perfection<br />

•Schedule play time<br />

into everyday<br />

•Believe in yourself<br />

•Ask someone to be<br />

your “Vent Partner”<br />

•Always have a<br />

“Plan B”<br />

•Exercise<br />

•Learn to meet your<br />

own needs<br />

•Talk with a<br />

Counselor<br />

NC A & T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />

Counseling Services<br />

108 Murphy Hall<br />

(336) 334-7727<br />

127


Balancing Your Roles<br />

By Shea D. Burns, Ph.D.<br />

Assistant Professor<br />

Mathematics,<br />

Collage of Arts and Sciences<br />

128<br />

As a Graduate Teaching Assistant, you are held accountable for your own academic development<br />

as well as the academic development of the students enrolled in the classes assigned to you.<br />

Balancing these responsibilities is an ongoing process. To maintain this balance, you must create a<br />

plan of action. The following suggestions are things to consider:<br />

1. Identify all positions that will affect your performance as a Graduate Teaching Assistant.<br />

Make a list of all the roles you will occupy during your teaching assignment and the people<br />

involved. Your agreement to be a Graduate Teaching Assistant normally does not cancel the other<br />

responsibilities in your life. Besides the obvious role of graduate student, you may have obligations<br />

to family, employment, research, etc. Unless you have made plans to eliminate these duties until<br />

the completion of your teaching assignment, they will require some attention from you.<br />

2. Have an honest conversation with each person involved in each role to determine your<br />

responsibilities.<br />

Before you actually begin your teaching assignment, make an appointment with each person involved<br />

in your activities listed above. The goal of these meetings is to establish an agreement on your<br />

duties. For example, schedule an appointment with your academic advisor to discuss credit hours or<br />

GPA requirements needed for the semester. Allow him/her to express his/her expectations of you.<br />

Be honest about your other obligations. If his/her expectations exceed what you are capable of<br />

fulfilling, make every effort to come to an agreement that is reasonable and satisfying for both parties.<br />

3. Manage your time wisely by prioritizing your obligations.<br />

After establishing your duties, you should have a reasonable idea of which ones require more from<br />

you than others. Of course, because your Graduate Teaching Assistantship is dependent on your<br />

status as a graduate student, graduate classes and study time should be your first priority. Next, your<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistantship may require class time, office hours, and time for grading and<br />

preparation. In some instances, you may be able to combine these obligations. For example, during<br />

office hours, you may use time in between students to study your own class work. Make sure that<br />

you schedule some time for all your obligations regardless of their importance. For example, family<br />

members might understand you spending less time with them in order to focus on your studies.<br />

However, you do not want to neglect all time with them.<br />

4. Make regular self-assessments and obtain feedback from others on your ability to meet your<br />

responsibilities.<br />

It is very easy to focus on one activity more than the others. This is more likely to happen when<br />

one activity is more demanding than others. For example, class attendance and assignments are a<br />

regular and necessary part of graduate school. Thus, you may devote all of your attention to them<br />

and neglect the office hours for your teaching assignment. This happens often when students are<br />

always willing to let you finish your assignments and “come back to office later”. While making a<br />

self-assessment, you may be able to identify problem areas. However, it is important to get feedback<br />

from others involved to get a complete view of your performance. Be open and willing to<br />

hear all remarks, both positive and negative, that they may share.<br />

5. Be willing to ask for help and/or eliminate some of your responsibilities.<br />

If you happen to get some negative feedback, ask for suggestions to help accomplish your goals.<br />

Find a mentor or partner with another graduate student who is successfully balancing his/her<br />

roles. Being accountable to another person is a good way to stay focused on your objectives. If<br />

during your self-assessment, you find that you have overextended yourself, reschedule appointments<br />

with the necessary people to renegotiate your duties. For example, suppose you told your students<br />

you would offer Saturday problem sessions, but you find that you need that extra day to devote to<br />

your studies. Explain to your class that you are no longer able to offer that service and find an<br />

alternative solution for them such as campus tutoring services.


Balancing your roles, although challenging, can be accomplished with some planning and continuing<br />

assessment. With guidance from others and thorough self-evaluation, it can become manageable.<br />

Questions Frequently Asked by TAs<br />

129<br />

Q: What can I do to get a sense of how my sections are going?<br />

Many new GTAs are unsure about their teaching performance. In fact, all new teachers inevitably hit<br />

some rough spots early in their development. Despite the urge to keep one's questions private for fear of<br />

being judged, it is usually extremely helpful to discuss problem areas with other GTAs. Once you view<br />

teaching as an ongoing learning process, you realize that any problems you are encountering have been<br />

experienced by nearly everyone in your department at one time or another. Developing an open<br />

attitude toward your teaching and toward feedback about your teaching makes it easier to identify and<br />

develop your strengths and work on your limitations. Two ways to gather feedback are (1) through the<br />

use of a mid-semester (or earlier) assessment survey; and (2) by scheduling a videotaped recording of<br />

one of your sections and a follow-up consultation, a service offered free of charge by The Academy of<br />

Teaching and Learning.<br />

Q: I recently had my students do a mid-term evaluation of the class, and the feedback was not very<br />

positive. Can you give me some suggestions on how I can improve my teaching?<br />

First, you should set up an appointment with your supervising professor who can review the feedback<br />

with you. Second, you might consider being videotaped in the classroom and receiving feedback on your<br />

teaching from The Academy of Teaching and Learning. This is one of the most effective ways to improve<br />

your teaching. Third, the campus library has a multitude of books and articles on various<br />

pedagogical topics that can be of assistance to you.<br />

Q: What should I do if I know some of my students are struggling in the course, e.g., if they<br />

receive a D or F on their first paper or exam?<br />

This is a complex question, one that has no easy answers but highlights a vital role you will play as a<br />

GTA. Often GTAs are the first “official” university personnel to become aware of student difficulties. At a<br />

minimum, you should establish personal contact with such students after the first paper or exam, perhaps<br />

by writing a note on their papers or exams, inviting them to come see you for assistance. You should also<br />

discuss the matter with your supervising professor. Additionally, you should refer the student to the<br />

services of the Center for Student Success, which can provide counseling and assistance for students<br />

before they encounter even more serious academic difficulties. Their phone number is (336)334-7855.<br />

Q: A student handed in a paper that I think was plagiarized. What should I do?<br />

You should discuss it with the your supervising professor immediately to decide an appropriate<br />

course of action to take. Plagiarism, cheating, unauthorized possession of examination materials,<br />

and unauthorized changing of a grade all fall under the auspices of academic dishonesty, which is<br />

outlined in detail in the Student Handbook under the “Student Conduct” section. Please review<br />

this section of the handbook for more detail.<br />

Q: What should I do if I suspect a student is carrying a firearm, weapon, or illegal substances?<br />

The <strong>University</strong> upholds a zero tolerance policy on illegal drugs, as well as forbids the possession of<br />

weapons of any type on campus. If you have a reason to believe a student in your class has any of the<br />

above in his or her possession you should not confront the student yourself, but get to a phone where<br />

you can make a private call and contact either the supervising professor, department chair, or the<br />

campus police for assistance. The campus police numbers are (336)334-7128 or 334-7144.<br />

If possible, engage the class in a reading assignment or other activity that will occupy them while<br />

you leave to make the phone call. No indication should be made that there is an ensuing problem.<br />

Q: What if a student challenges me or exhibits disruptive behavior in the classroom?<br />

If the student is challenging the subject matter being taught, try to be open to the challenge and<br />

encourage them to express why they do not accept things “as is,” acknowledging that it is wise to not<br />

passively accept everything they hear. At the same time, do not allow their challenge to disrupt<br />

learning for the rest of the students. It may be something that can be best resolved after class.<br />

However, if the student is being blatantly disruptive, do your best to defuse the student’s anger and/or<br />

resolve the problem while maintaining a tone of calmness and professional objectivity. If the situation<br />

appears to be escalating out of control, either go yourself, or send another student, to the nearest


administrative office or use a cell phone to contact campus police for assistance. The campus police<br />

numbers are (336) 334-7128 or 334-7144. Be sure you can give them the building and room number<br />

where the class is being held.<br />

130<br />

NEVER threaten a student in any way, and do not give in to their demands just to avoid confrontation.<br />

Again, either diffuse the situation, ask them to meet with you after class to resolve the issue, or if<br />

necessary, call campus police. If you do meet the student after class and they are still highly agitated or<br />

aggressive, it is advisable to have another GTA or professor present.<br />

Q: What should I do if a student comes to me with a personal problem?<br />

Students are more likely to go to GTAs than to professors with personal problems. While some personal<br />

contact and general advice is certainly within the domain of your role as GTA, for larger personal<br />

problems you should refer students to the services on campus available for them.<br />

Trained professional counselors in Counseling Services, located in Room 108 of Murphy Hall, offer<br />

confidential counseling to students for educational, career, social, personal or emotional concerns. Their<br />

phone number is (336) 334-7727. For health concerns, Sebastian Health Center provides primary<br />

health care, counseling and health/wellness education. Their phone number is (336) 334-7880.<br />

Q: What should I do if students confide in me about problems they are having with the<br />

supervising professor's lectures, assignments, and exams?<br />

Undergraduates are much more likely to air their discontent with the course with GTAs and not with<br />

professors. When this happens, GTAs should encourage students to use the professor's office hours to<br />

share their thoughts and ideas directly. If they are not already scheduled, GTAs should suggest periodic<br />

meetings with the professor to go over the mechanics of the course and to air their problems and discuss<br />

student progress. Graduate students sometimes find it difficult to offer constructive criticism to<br />

professors, particularly when they are involved with professors in other academic areas. Providing<br />

feedback can be made easier by scheduling regular feedback meetings before the semester begins.<br />

Q: What should I do if I ever encounter difficulties with either my supervisor or other GTAs I<br />

am working with in a particular course?<br />

Difficulties among co-workers can arise in any situation. Problems are best handled by discussions<br />

among the parties involved. If difficulties continue with fellow GTAs, you should speak to the course<br />

supervisor. If this doesn't clear things up, see your department's chair. Most minor tensions and<br />

difficulties can be settled by simply talking with the people involved, but you should always feel free<br />

to consult others when difficulties arise.<br />

Q: What constitutes Sexual Harassment when it comes to students and GTAs?<br />

The policy of the <strong>University</strong> states that sexual harassment is defined as deliberate, unsolicited and<br />

unwelcome verbal and/or physical conduct of a sexual nature or with sexual implications, which has or<br />

may have direct employment or academic consequences resulting from acceptance or rejection of<br />

such conduct.<br />

Q: Does the Faculty Handbook have a policy on It?<br />

As a GTA, you should maintain a friendly but professional relationship with your students and provide<br />

no cause for them to feel uncomfortable about the student/instructor relationship. On the other hand,<br />

should a student make advances directed at you personally, you should make it clear that while<br />

you are in the role of instructor of a class that he or she is enrolled in, it is advisable to keep the<br />

relationship strictly as student/instructor and nothing more.<br />

Q: What if a student challenges a grade I’ve given them on an assignment?<br />

Agree to meet with the student individually and hear their reason(s) for challenging the grade. You<br />

may want to reiterate the grading policy and explain why you gave them the grade you did. If you<br />

still have not come to terms at this point, inform the student that you will meet with the supervising<br />

professor and seek his/her feedback. Give them a time frame in which they should hear back from you.<br />

Then make it a point to speak with your supervising professor and ascertain if the grade should stand as<br />

given, or if any adjustment is warranted. Make sure you follow up with the student in a timely manner<br />

and do so in private, either outside of class or ask them to stay after class.


REFERENCE GUIDE TO CAMPUS RESOURCES<br />

Area Code is 336<br />

Departments Phone Fax<br />

Academic Affairs, Division of 334-7965 334-7136<br />

Accounting Department 334-7581 334-7093<br />

Accounting Office - Business & Finance 334-7684 334-7013<br />

Administrative Affairs 334-7804 334-7227<br />

Administrative Information Systems 334-7440 334-3833<br />

Admissions Office 334-7946 334-7478<br />

Affirmative Action Office 334-7977 334-7136<br />

Agriculture, School of 334-7979 334-7580<br />

Agricultural Economics Department 334-7943 334-7793<br />

Education Department 334-7711 334-7257<br />

Agricultural Engineering Department 334-7787 334-7270<br />

Air Force ROTC 334-7588 334-7184<br />

Animal Science Department 334-7547 334-7288<br />

Architectural Engineering Department 334-7575 334-7126<br />

Army ROTC 334-7588 334-7184<br />

Art Department 334-7993 334-3635<br />

Arts & Sciences, College of 334-7806 334-7173<br />

Biology Department 334-7907 334-7105<br />

Bookstore 334-7593 334-7481<br />

Budget Office 334-7631 334-3827<br />

Business Administration Department 334-7656 334-7093<br />

Business & Economics, School of 334-7632 334-7233<br />

Business Education & Administration Department 334-7657 334-7093<br />

Business and Finance, Division of 334-7587 334-7914<br />

Business Services 334-7703 334-3827<br />

Campus Mail Center 334-7544 334-4787<br />

Campus Police 334-7675 334-7230<br />

Career Services 334-7755 334-7018<br />

Center for Distance Learning 256-0355 256-0357<br />

Chancellor's Office 334-7940 334-7082<br />

Chemical Engineering Department 334-7564 334-7904<br />

Chemistry Department 334-7601 334-7124<br />

Civil Engineering Department 334-7737 334-7667<br />

Computer Science Department 334-7245 334-7244<br />

131


Departments Phone Fax<br />

Construction Mgmt. & Safety Department 334-7590 334-7433<br />

Contracts & Grants 334-7683 334-7013<br />

Counseling Services 334-7727 334-7284<br />

Development & <strong>University</strong> Relations, Division of 334-7654 334-7094<br />

Economics Department 334-7744 334-7093<br />

Education Leadership & Policy Department 334-7522 334-7033<br />

Education, School of 334-7757 334-7132<br />

Electrical Engineering Department 334-7761 334-7716<br />

Electronics & Computer Technology Department 334-7718 334-7546<br />

Engineering, College of 334-7589 334-7540<br />

English Department 334-7771 334-3342<br />

Financial Aid Office 334-7973 334-7954<br />

Food Service 334-7560<br />

Foreign Language Department 334-7886 334-3634<br />

Foreign Students Advisor 334-7551 334-7103<br />

Graduate School Office 334-7920 334-7282<br />

Graphic Communication Systems Department 334-7550 334-7577<br />

Handicap Students Affairs 334-7791 334-7378<br />

Health Services Center 334-7880 334-7264<br />

Health, Physical Education & Recreation Department 334-7719 334-7264<br />

Helpdesk 334-7195 334-3833<br />

History Department 334-7831 334-7837<br />

Housing Operations 334-7708 334-7170<br />

Human Development & Services Department 334-7916 334-7280<br />

Human Environment & Family Services Department 334-7850 334-7265<br />

Human Resources Office 334-7862 334-7477<br />

Industrial Engineering Department 334-7780 334-7729<br />

Information & Directory Assistance 334-7500 334-7214<br />

Information Services & Policy Development 334-7085 334-7227<br />

Information Technology and Telecommunications 334-7856 334-3833<br />

Internal Auditor 334-7910 334-7227<br />

Landscape Architecture 334-7520 334-7844<br />

Learning Assistance Center 334-7855 334-7010<br />

Legal Affairs 334-7592 334-7194<br />

Library Services 334-7782 334-7281<br />

Manufacturing Systems Department 334-7758 334-7704<br />

132


Departments Phone Fax<br />

Mathematics Department 334-7822 334-7283<br />

Mechanical Engineering Department 334-7621 334-7417<br />

Memorial Union 334-7571 334-7380<br />

Music Department 334-7926 334-7484<br />

Natural Resource & Environmental Design Department 334-7543 334-7844<br />

Nursing, School of 334-7751 334-7637<br />

Payroll 334-7888 334-7013<br />

Physical Plant 334-7626 334-7214<br />

Physics Department 334-7646 334-7283<br />

Political Science Department 334-7666 334-7321<br />

Psychology Department 334-7970 334-7538<br />

Purchasing 334-7555 334-7013<br />

Registrar, Office of 334-7595 334-7466<br />

Research, Division of 334-7995 334-7086<br />

Salary Administration 334-7794 334-7227<br />

Sociology & Social Service Department 334-7894 334-7197<br />

Speech Comm. & Theatre Arts Department 334-7900 334-7770<br />

Student Activities 334-7676 334-7366<br />

Student Affairs, Division of 334-7696 334-7103<br />

Student Government Association 334-7820 334-7380<br />

Student Teaching & Internships 334-7663 334-7132<br />

Summer School & Continuing Education 334-7607 334-7081<br />

Technological Graphic Communication Department 334-7550 334-7098<br />

Technology, School of 334-7567 334-7098<br />

Ticket Office 334-7749 334-7382<br />

Title III Coordination 334-7166 334-7136<br />

Transportation Institute 334-7745 334-7093<br />

Treasurer's Office 334-7721 334-7208<br />

Veteran's Office 334-7765 334-7333<br />

Waste Management Institute 334-7030 334-7399<br />

133


NORTH CAROLINA A&T STATE UNIVERSITY<br />

APPENDIX A<br />

School of Graduate Studies<br />

GRADUATE ASSISTANT EVALUATION<br />

134<br />

Department ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />

Name of Graduate Assistant: ___________________________________________________________________<br />

Contract Period: From __________________________________ Through _____________________________<br />

GRADUATE: ❒ Administrative Assistant ❒ Laboratory Assistant ❒ Research Assistant ❒ Teaching Assistant<br />

PERFORMANCE<br />

FACTORS<br />

Quality of Work<br />

Accuracy, thoroughness,<br />

neatness<br />

Quantity of Work<br />

Productive Output<br />

Dependability<br />

Follows instructions,<br />

judgment<br />

Compatibility<br />

Attitude, ability to get<br />

along with others<br />

Attendance<br />

Supervisory/Teaching<br />

Ability<br />

PERFORMANCE APPRAISAL<br />

Far Exceeds Exceeds Meets Partially Meets Does Not Meet<br />

Consistently<br />

excellent, errors,<br />

seldom<br />

<br />

Output<br />

unusually high,<br />

exceptionally<br />

fast<br />

<br />

Consistently<br />

dependable<br />

<br />

Consistently<br />

inspires others to<br />

work with and<br />

assist co-workers<br />

<br />

Consistently<br />

present and on<br />

time<br />

<br />

Exceptional<br />

ability to<br />

supervise/teach<br />

<br />

Better than<br />

average, few<br />

errors<br />

<br />

Does a good<br />

day’s work,<br />

better than<br />

average quantity<br />

<br />

Dependable in<br />

most respects<br />

<br />

Quick to<br />

volunteer to<br />

work with and<br />

assist others<br />

<br />

Seldom absent<br />

or late<br />

<br />

Above average<br />

ability to<br />

supervise/teach<br />

<br />

Consistently<br />

satisfactory,<br />

occasional errors<br />

<br />

Average, turns<br />

out required<br />

amount of work,<br />

seldom more<br />

<br />

Ordinarily<br />

dependable<br />

<br />

Generally works<br />

well with and<br />

assist others<br />

<br />

Average<br />

attendance<br />

record, usually<br />

on time<br />

<br />

Adequate skills<br />

in supervisory<br />

/teaching<br />

responsibility<br />

<br />

Frequent errors,<br />

careless<br />

<br />

Slow output,<br />

frequently below<br />

required quantity<br />

<br />

Frequently<br />

undependable<br />

<br />

Cooperates only<br />

when has to,<br />

frequent conflict<br />

<br />

Frequent<br />

absences<br />

and tardiness<br />

<br />

Has some<br />

difficulty with<br />

supervisory and<br />

teaching skills<br />

<br />

Unsatisfactory,<br />

many errors<br />

<br />

Output<br />

inadequate to<br />

retain on job<br />

<br />

Consistently<br />

undependable<br />

<br />

Consistently<br />

does not work<br />

well with or<br />

assist others<br />

<br />

Attendance too<br />

poor to retain<br />

<br />

Exhibits little to<br />

no supervisory/<br />

teaching<br />

capability<br />

<br />

Immediate Supervisor’s Comments: ________________________________________________________________<br />

_________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />

_________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />

Recommendation (check one): Retain: ❒ Yes ❒ No Reassign: ❒ Yes ❒ No<br />

Graduate Assistant’s Comments:___________________________________________________________________<br />

_________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />

_________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />

_____________________________________________ ________________________________________________<br />

Supervisor Date Graduate Assistant Date<br />

________________________________________<br />

Department Chair or Graduate Coordinator Date<br />

Signatures Required:


INDEX<br />

135<br />

A<br />

Academic Advising - 97<br />

Adults as Learners - 52<br />

Sources Used - 52<br />

Advising Students - 97<br />

Appendix A - 134<br />

Appendices - 135<br />

B<br />

Balancing Your Roles - 128<br />

Questions Frequently Asked by TAs - 129<br />

Benefits of Having a Mentor - 11<br />

Resources For Additional Advice - 13<br />

C<br />

Checklist for Teaching - 29<br />

Classroom Situations to Consider - 26<br />

Absenteeism - 26<br />

Be Prepared - 26<br />

Be Professional - 26<br />

Disruptive Students - 26<br />

Inadequate Writing Skills - 26<br />

Personal Issues - 26<br />

Plagiarism - 26<br />

Tardiness - 27<br />

Textbooks - 26<br />

Use Various Forms of Course<br />

Delivery - 26<br />

Cooperative Learning - 51<br />

Additional Resources - 51<br />

Course Planning and Design - 35<br />

Course Planning - 35<br />

References - 36<br />

Cultural Dimensions - 10<br />

D<br />

Diversity in The Classroom - 39<br />

References - 42<br />

Duties of GTAs - 2<br />

General Assistant to a Professor - 3<br />

Grader - 3<br />

Laboratory Assistant - 3<br />

Recitation or Discussion Leader - 2<br />

Tutor - 3<br />

E<br />

Effective Instruction - 15<br />

E (Continued)<br />

Additional Resources - 17<br />

Effective Communication Skills - 17<br />

Instructional Planning - 16<br />

Monitoring Student Progress - 17<br />

Summary - 17<br />

Establishing the Classroom Climate - 33<br />

Allow for Student Input into Course<br />

Framework - 34<br />

Communicate Interpersonal Sensitivity - 34<br />

Get to Know Your Students - 33<br />

Have High Student Expectations - 34<br />

Promote and Provide Multicultural<br />

Viewpoints - 34<br />

Provide All Students the Opportunity to<br />

Participate - 34<br />

Use a Variety of Instructional<br />

Strategies - 34<br />

Evaluating Student Performance - 94<br />

F<br />

FUTURES - VII<br />

G<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistants As Writing<br />

Teachers - 33<br />

Recommended Reading - 33<br />

GTA-to-GTA Advice - 126<br />

Additional Resources - 127<br />

H<br />

How Students Learn - 46<br />

Additional Information - 46<br />

I<br />

Incorporating Instructional Technology - 61<br />

Additional Resources - 61<br />

Instructional Support and Services - 108<br />

K<br />

Keeping Records - 95<br />

L<br />

Learning Styles and Preferences - 46<br />

References - 47<br />

List of Contributors - VIII


M<br />

Modes of Teaching - 21<br />

Additional Resources - 22<br />

Case Study - 21<br />

Collaborative Learning Groups - 21<br />

Concept Checks - 21<br />

Large/Small Group Discussion - 22<br />

Research Projects - 21<br />

N<br />

Notes on Effective Learning - 69<br />

O<br />

Overview of the Contents - X<br />

P<br />

Planning A Class - 64<br />

Preface<br />

Acknowledgements - VI<br />

Preferences for Good Practice in<br />

Undergraduate Education - 47<br />

Additional Resources - 50<br />

Bibliography - 50<br />

Preparing the Professional Portfolio - 111<br />

Collecting Materials for a Professional<br />

Portfolio - 112<br />

Developing a Professional Portfolio - 111<br />

Organizing a Professional Portfolio - 111<br />

References - 113<br />

Bibliography - 50<br />

Additional Resources - 50<br />

Principles for Good Practice in Undergraduate<br />

Education - 47<br />

Professional/Ethical/Legal Responsibilities for<br />

Graduate Assistants - 118<br />

R<br />

Recommending ESL for International Teaching<br />

Assistant - 99<br />

Reference Guide to Campus Resources - 131<br />

Reflective Practice - 104<br />

Steps to Becoming a Reflective<br />

Practitioner - 104<br />

Role of the TA as a Faculty/Student<br />

Liaison - 98<br />

S<br />

Safety and Emergency Procedures in The<br />

Classroom - 120<br />

S (Continued)<br />

Instructor's Responsibility - 120<br />

Supplemental Information - 120<br />

Safety Considerations - 73<br />

Laboratory Safety Guidelines - 73<br />

Section I - 1<br />

Introduction - 1<br />

What It Means to be a GA at<br />

NC A&T SU - 1<br />

Section II - 10<br />

International GTAs - 10<br />

Language Requirements - 10<br />

Section III - 14<br />

Foundations of Good Teaching - 14<br />

Overview - 14<br />

References - 14<br />

Section IV - 28<br />

Orientation at NC A&T <strong>State</strong><br />

<strong>University</strong> - 28<br />

Getting Started - 28<br />

Checklist for Teaching - 29<br />

Additional Resources - 32<br />

Section V - 44<br />

Helping Student Learn - Overview - 44<br />

Helping Students Learn - 45<br />

Section VI - 54<br />

Multiple Instructional Strategies,<br />

Situations, Techniques, Technologies,<br />

and Tools - 54<br />

Section VII - 81<br />

Grades and ClassroomManagement - 81<br />

Testing and Grading - 81<br />

Introduction - 81<br />

Grading Assignments and<br />

Activities - 82<br />

Testing - 86<br />

Section VIII - 102<br />

Professional Development - 102<br />

Overview - 102<br />

Audio/Video Observation - 103<br />

Case Studies - 102<br />

Professional Organization<br />

Membership - 102<br />

Teaching Journals - 102<br />

Teaching Portfolios - 103<br />

136


S (Continued)<br />

Section IX - 114<br />

Graduate Assistantship Administrative<br />

Policy - 114<br />

Section X - 125<br />

How to Help GTAs Be Successful - 125<br />

Checklist for the Supervising<br />

Professor - 125<br />

Standards for Graduate Teaching<br />

Assistants - 4<br />

Assessment - 8<br />

Communications and Technology - 7<br />

Content Pedagogy - 4<br />

Diverse Learners - 5<br />

Knowledge, Skills, and Attitude to be an<br />

Effective GTA - 4<br />

Motivation and Management - 7<br />

Multiple Instructional Strategies - 6<br />

Planning - 7<br />

Reflective Practice: Professional Growth - 8<br />

School and Community Involvement - 9<br />

Student Development - 4<br />

Strategies to Enhance Learning - 75<br />

Table of Instructional Activities - 76<br />

Additional Resources - 77<br />

Student Initiated Programs and Unfunded<br />

Projects - 124<br />

Student Surveys - 105<br />

Additional Resources - 107<br />

Suggestions for The First Day of Class - 37<br />

T<br />

Teaching Laboratory Sections - 70<br />

Accidents and Incidents - 72<br />

Clean Up Procedures - 71<br />

Lost and Found - 72<br />

Quizzes and the Final Examination - 72<br />

Reviewing the Experiment for the Day - 71<br />

Safety Tips - 71<br />

Teaching Tips - 72<br />

Teaching Methods and Active Learning - 23<br />

Teaching Strategies for a Diverse Student<br />

Body - 78<br />

Teaching Through Discussion - 63<br />

References - 63<br />

Teaching with Technology - 54<br />

Auditory Media - 56<br />

Computers and Instruction - 59<br />

T (Continued)<br />

Media (Audio-Visual Aids) - 55<br />

Motion Media - 56<br />

Visual Media - 55<br />

The Teacher - Student Relationship - 100<br />

References - 101<br />

The Ten Commandments of Teaching - 15<br />

Time Management in The Classrooms - 53<br />

Tips for Conducting The Class - 38<br />

Traits of Effective Teaching - 18<br />

Additional Resources - 20<br />

Teaching Styles - 20<br />

What Can Graduate Students Do To<br />

Be More Effective TAs? - 20<br />

Types of Graduate Assistant Roles and<br />

Duties - 2<br />

Graduate Administrative Assistant - 2<br />

Graduate Research Assistant - 2<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistant - 2<br />

Graduate Teaching Assistant - 2<br />

U<br />

<strong>University</strong>-Based Technology Transfer - 123<br />

<strong>University</strong> Contacts - IX<br />

Using Your Voice - 79<br />

References - 80<br />

137

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!